arioonet.com€¦ · Thank you for choosing our products. We appreciate your business. Your...

FONST 5000 U Series

Packet Enhanced OTN Equipment

Product Description

Version: A

Code: MN000002058

FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

April 2014

Thank you for choosing our products.

We appreciate your business. Your satisfaction is our goal.

We will provide you with comprehensive technical support

and after-sales service. Please contact your local sales

representative, service representative or distributor for any

help needed at the contact information shown below.

Fiberhome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: No. 67, Guanggu Chuangye Jie, Wuhan, Hubei, China

Zip code: 430073

Tel: +6 03 7960 0860/0884 (for Malaysia)

+91 98 9985 5448 (for South Asia)

+593 4 501 4529 (for South America)

Fax: +86 27 8717 8521

Website: http://www.fiberhomegroup.com

Legal Notice

are trademarks of FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

(Hereinafter referred to as FiberHome)

All brand names and product names used in this document are used for

identification purposes only and are trademarks or registered trademarks

of their respective holders.

All rights reserved

No part of this document (including the electronic version) may be

reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior

written permission from FiberHome.

Information in this document is subject to change without notice.

Preface

Related Documentation

Document Description

FONST 5000 U Series Packet

Enhanced OTN Equipment

Product Description

Introduces the product’s functions and features, protection

principles, network modes and applications, and technical

specifications.



Hardware Description

Describes the equipment’s structures, functions, signal

flows, specifications, and technical parameters in terms of

its hardware components (i.e. the cabinet, the subrack,

cards, and cables).



100G System Commissioning

Specification

Discusses the important issues for the commissioning of

the equipment, the commissioning flow, and the methods.


Enhanced OTN Equipment Start-

up and Configuration Guide

Introduces the rules and methods for the configuration of

various services and functions through service

management, NE configuration and card configuration via

the OTNM2000; gives some typical configuration examples

and operation procedures.



Testing Specification

Gives a detailed introduction to testing projects, testing

methods, and inspection and acceptance standards of the

product.



Troubleshooting Guide

Gives a detailed introduction to notices of fault

management, fault isolating methods as well as procedures

and methods of fault management.



Routine Maintenance

Gives a detailed description of routine maintenance items

and operation procedures in terms of day, week, month,

quarter and year.



Alarm and Performance

Reference

Describes classification and category of alarm and

performance indicators and their binding relationships, and

lists definitions, causes and management of each alarm

and performance.



Installation Guide

Introduces the preparations before installation, installation

flows, as well as the requirements for the installation

environment.

I

Document Description



Quick Installation Guide

Briefs how to install the equipment, connect and lay out its

wires and cables using figures.

PDP850A User GuideIntroduces the functions of the PDP (3000064); briefs how

to install the PDP, connect and lay out its wires and cables.

PDP296B User GuideIntroduces the functions of the PDP (3000068); briefs how


PDP1063A User GuideIntroduces the functions of the PDP (3000082); briefs how


Quick Installation Guide for the

21-inch Cabinet (340mm-deep)

(404000282 to 404000285)

Introduces the installation methods of the 21-inch cabinet

(340 mm-deep).

Quick Installation Guide for the

21-inch Cabinet (680mm-deep)

(404000305 to 404000308)

Introduces the installation methods of the 21-inch cabinet

(680 mm-deep).

Packet Enhanced OTN

Equipment ASON User Manual

Introduces functions, related concepts, configuration

methods and maintenance methods of ASON.

e-Fim OTNM2000 Element

Network Management System

Manual Set

Includes four manuals, i. e., product description, operation

guide, routine maintenance and installation guide, all of

which are aimed at introducing common and fundamental

contents of the OTNM2000 for a better understanding and

proficient use of the network management system.

II

Version

Version Description

A Initial version.

Intended Readers

This manual is intended for the following readers:

u Planning and designing engineers

u Commissioning engineers

u Operation and maintenance engineers

To utilize this manual, these prerequisite skills are necessary:

u OTN technology

u PTN technology

u Data communication technology

u Optical fiber communication technology

u SDH communication theory

u Ethernet technology

III

Conventions

Terminology Conventions

Terminology Convention

FONST 5000 U SeriesFONST 5000 U60; FONST 5000 U40; FONST 5000 U30;

FONST 5000 U20; FONST 5000 U10

OTNM2000 FiberHome e-Fim OTNM2000 Element Management System

8TN1 8-Port 2.5G Normalization Service Card




4TN2 4-Port 10G Normalization Line Card





10TP2 10-Port 10GE Service Card

20TP2 20-Port 10GE Service Card

1TN3 1-Port 40G Normalization Service Card


1TO3 1-Port 40G OTN Service Card



4LN2 4-Port 10G Normalization Line Card





10IL2 10-Port 10G Integration Line Card

UXU2 Universal Switch Unit 2

MST2 8-Port Any Service Transponder Card

OTU2E Aggregation Optical Transponder Card with Enhanced FEC

OTU2S 10G Bidirectional Optical Transponder Card with Super FEC

2OTU2S2-Port 10G Bidirectional Optical Transponder Card with

Super FEC

OTU2F 10G Bidirectional Regenerator with Super FEC

V


OTU3E4-Port 10G Aggregation Optical Transponder Card With

Enhanced FEC

OTU3E (coherent)4-Port 10G Aggregation Optical Transponder Card With

Enhanced FEC (Coherent)

OTU3S 43G Bidirectional Transponder Card with Super FEC

OTU3S (coherent)43G Bidirectional Transponder Card with Super FEC

(Coherent)

OTU3F 43G Bidirectional Regenerator with Super FEC

OTU4S 100Gb/s Enhanced FEC Unit (PM-QPSK)

OTU4E100G Aggregation Optical Transponder Card with Enhanced

FEC (PM-QPSK,10×10G)

OTU4F 100G Regenerator with EFEC

BMD2 Band Multiplexer and Distribution Unit (2 Band)

BMD2P 2 Bands Multiplexer and Distribution Unit with Pre amplifiers

BMD2PP 2 Bands Multiplexer and Distribution Unit with 2 Preamplifiers

OMU48_E 48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C,E)

OMU40_E 40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C,E)

ODU48_E 48 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, E)

ODU40_E 40 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, E)

VMU48_E48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card with Variable Optical

Attenuator (C,E)

VMU40_E40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card with Variable Optical

Attenuator (C,E)

OMU48_O 48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C, O)

OMU40_O 40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C, O)

ODU48_O 48 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, O)

ODU40_O 40 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, O)

VMU48_O48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card with Variable Optical

Attenuator (C,O)

VMU40_O40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card with Variable Optical

Attenuator (C,O)

OMU8 8 Ch Optical Coupler Card

ODU8 8 Ch Optical Splitter Card




VI



ITL50 50GHz Grid Interleaved Multiplexer / Demultiplexer Card

OSCAD 1510 / 1550 Optical Multiplexer / Demultiplexer Card

WSS8MOptical Wavelength Selective Switch Multiplexer Card

(50GHz, 1×9)

WSS8DOptical Wavelength Selective Switch Demultiplexer Card

(50GHz, 1×9)

OA Optical amplification card

PA Pre-amplifier Card

OLP (1+1) Optical Line Protection Card (1+1)

OLP (1:1) Optical Line Protection Card (1:1)

OCP Optical Channel Protection Card

OMSP Optical Multiplex Section Protection Card

OSC Optical Supervisory Channel Card

EOSC Enhanced Optical Supervisory Channel Card

OPM4 4 Ch Optical Performance Monitor Card

OPM8 8 Ch Optical Performance Monitor Card

CCU Central Control Card

EMU NE Management Card

FCU Frame Control Unit Card

EFCU Enhanced Frame Control Unit Card

PWR Power Card

AIF/AIF1/AIF2 Auxiliary Interface Card

VII

Symbol Conventions

Symbol Meaning Description

Note Important features or operation guide.

CautionPossible injury to persons or systems, or cause traffic

interruption or loss.

Warning May cause severe bodily injuries.

➔ Jump Jumps to another step.

→Cascading

menuConnects multi-level menu options.

↔Bidirectional

serviceThe service signal is bidirectional.

→Unidirectional

serviceThe service signal is unidirectional.

VIII

Contents

Preface...................................................................................................................I

Related Documentation ...................................................................................I

Version ..........................................................................................................III

Intended Readers ..........................................................................................III

Conventions .................................................................................................. V

1 Overview .....................................................................................................1-1

1.1 Product Features ...........................................................................1-2

1.2 Product Positioning........................................................................1-3

1.3 Product Architecture ......................................................................1-4

1.4 Application Scenario ......................................................................1-6

2 Functions and Features ...............................................................................2-1

2.1 Functions of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products .......................2-2

2.2 Service Types and Access Capabilities ..........................................2-3

2.2.1 Service Type....................................................................2-3

2.2.2 Service Access Capability................................................2-4

2.3 Wavelength Tunability....................................................................2-5

2.4 Optical Power Management ...........................................................2-5

2.4.1 Automatic Equalization of Channel Optical Power ............2-5

2.4.2 Automatic Equalization of Line Power...............................2-6

2.4.3 APR Function ................................................................2-10

2.5 Data Features..............................................................................2-11

2.5.1 Service Types................................................................2-11

2.5.2 QoS Features ................................................................2-15

2.5.3 OAM Features ...............................................................2-17

2.6 Protection Capability ....................................................................2-19

2.7 Fault Isolation and Analysis..........................................................2-20

2.7.1 Integrated Maintenance .................................................2-20

2.7.2 Online EMS Help ...........................................................2-20

2.7.3 Flexible OTN Overhead Configuration............................2-20

2.7.4 Online Performance Monitoring......................................2-24

2.8 Clock Features ............................................................................2-26

2.8.1 Physical-Layer Clock .....................................................2-26

2.8.2 PTP Clock .....................................................................2-28

2.9 ASON Features ...........................................................................2-31

2.10 Intelligent Fan ..............................................................................2-31

2.11 PIC Features ...............................................................................2-32

2.11.1 System Model of the 100 Gbit/s Optical Fiber Bandwidth 2-32



2.12 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s and 100 Gbit/s Transmission Solutions ..........2-36

2.12.1 100 Gbit/s Transmission Technology ..............................2-36

2.12.2 40 Gbit/s Transmission Technology ................................2-38

2.12.3 10 Gbit/s Transmission Technology ................................2-39

2.12.4 Multi-rate Hybrid Transmission .......................................2-40

2.13 Card Self-Booting ........................................................................2-41

2.14 Remote Upgrade .........................................................................2-41

3 Product Structure.........................................................................................3-1

3.1 Hardware Structure........................................................................3-2

3.1.1 Cabinet (680 mm Deep) ...................................................3-2

3.1.2 Cabinet (340 mm Deep) ...................................................3-3

3.1.3 PDP (3000064)................................................................3-5

3.1.4 PDP (3000068)................................................................3-6

3.1.5 PDP (3000082)................................................................3-8

3.1.6 DCM..............................................................................3-10

3.1.7 Subrack.........................................................................3-11

3.1.8 Equipment Layout..........................................................3-40

3.1.9 Card Overview...............................................................3-47

3.1.10 Tributary Interface Unit...................................................3-57

3.1.11 Electrical Cross-connect Unit .........................................3-58

3.1.12 Line Interface Unit..........................................................3-58

3.1.13 PIC Unit.........................................................................3-58

3.1.14 Optical Transponder Unit ...............................................3-59

3.1.15 Optical Multiplexing and Demultiplexing Unit ..................3-60

3.1.16 Dynamic Optical Add / Drop Multiplexer Unit...................3-63

3.1.17 Optical Amplification Unit ...............................................3-63

3.1.18 Optical Protection Unit ...................................................3-64

3.1.19 Optical Spectrum Analysis Unit ......................................3-65

3.1.20 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit...................................3-65

3.1.21 System Connection and Management Unit.....................3-66

3.2 Software Architecture...................................................................3-69

3.2.1 Overview .......................................................................3-69

3.2.2 Communication Protocol and Interface ...........................3-69

3.2.3 BMU Software ...............................................................3-70

3.2.4 EMU Software ...............................................................3-70

3.2.5 EMS Software................................................................3-71

4 Configuration and Application.......................................................................4-1

4.1 OTM..............................................................................................4-2

4.1.1 Function ..........................................................................4-2

4.1.2 Related Functional Unit....................................................4-2

4.1.3 Common Configuration Principles ....................................4-3

4.1.4 Composition and Signal Flow...........................................4-7

4.2 FOADM .......................................................................................4-11

4.2.1 Function ........................................................................4-12

4.2.2 Related Functional Unit..................................................4-12

4.2.3 Common Configuration Principles ..................................4-12

4.2.4 Composition and Signal Flow.........................................4-14

4.3 ROADM.......................................................................................4-15

4.3.1 Function ........................................................................4-15




4.4 OLA.............................................................................................4-27

4.4.1 Function ........................................................................4-28




4.5 PIC..............................................................................................4-31

4.5.1 Function ........................................................................4-32




5 Protection Implementation ...........................................................................5-1

5.1 Equipment-level Protection ............................................................5-2

5.1.1 1+1 Protection for the NE Management Card ...................5-2

5.1.2 M+N Protection for the Cross-connect Card......................5-4

5.1.3 1+1 Protection for the Power Card....................................5-7

5.1.4 1+1 Protection for the Input Power Supply ......................5-11

5.2 Network-level protection...............................................................5-13

5.2.1 OCh 1+1 Protection .......................................................5-15

5.2.2 OCh m:n Protection .......................................................5-17

5.2.3 OCh Ring Protection ......................................................5-22

5.2.4 ODUk 1+1 Protection.....................................................5-26

5.2.5 ODUk m:n Protection .....................................................5-29

5.2.6 ODUk Ring Protection....................................................5-34

5.2.7 Optical Channel 1+1 Wavelength Protection...................5-38

5.2.8 Optical Channel 1+1 Route Protection............................5-41

5.2.9 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection.........................5-43

5.2.10 Optical Line 1:1 / 1+1 Protection.....................................5-45

5.2.11 Ethernet LAG Protection ................................................5-48

5.3 Network Management Information Protection ...............................5-49

6 Application of Service Grooming ..................................................................6-1

6.1 Optical Layer Grooming .................................................................6-2

6.1.1 Application of FOADM .....................................................6-2

6.1.2 Application of ROADM .....................................................6-6

6.2 Electrical Layer Grooming ............................................................6-11

6.2.1 Application of Electrical Layer Grooming ........................6-12

6.2.2 Examples of Electrical Grooming (OTN) .........................6-13

6.2.3 Examples of Electrical Grooming (PIC)...........................6-22

7 About ASON................................................................................................7-1

7.1 Background and Introduction of the ASON .....................................7-2

7.1.1 Background of the ASON.................................................7-2

7.1.2 Development of the ASON...............................................7-3

7.1.3 Introduction of the ASON .................................................7-3

7.2 Architecture of the ASON System ..................................................7-4

7.3 Basic Concepts of the ASON .........................................................7-5

7.4 ASON Solution ............................................................................7-12

7.4.1 Product System .............................................................7-12

7.4.2 Solution .........................................................................7-14

7.4.3 System Features ...........................................................7-15

7.4.4 Architecture of Intelligent Software SmartWeaver ...........7-17

7.5 ASON Functions..........................................................................7-18

7.5.1 Automatic Discovery of Link Resource ...........................7-18

7.5.2 Protection and Recovery Function..................................7-20

7.5.3 Differentiated Services...................................................7-21

7.5.4 End-to-End Service Configuration Function ....................7-22

7.5.5 Network Management Function......................................7-23

7.5.6 Network Maintenance Optimization Function..................7-23

8 Management and Maintenance ....................................................................8-1

8.1 Monitoring and Management Module .............................................8-2

8.2 Communication and Maintenance Interfaces ..................................8-3

8.3 Optical Supervisory Channel Management.....................................8-7

8.4 Electrical Supervisory Channel Management .................................8-9

8.5 Alarm and Performance Event Management ................................8-10

8.6 Network Performance Monitoring .................................................8-12

8.7 Safety Management.....................................................................8-13

8.8 TCM ............................................................................................8-14

9 Technical Specification.................................................................................9-1

9.1 Frequency and Wavelength ...........................................................9-2

9.2 Specifications of Tributary Interface Cards......................................9-4

9.2.1 Specifications of the xTN1 Cards .....................................9-4

9.2.2 Specifications of the xTN2 Cards .....................................9-5

9.2.3 Specifications of the 10TP2 / 20TP2 Card ........................9-7

9.2.4 Specifications of the 1TO3 Card.......................................9-8

9.2.5 Specifications of the 1TN3 / 2TN3 Card............................9-9

9.2.6 Specifications of the 1TN4 / 2TN4 Card..........................9-10

9.3 Specifications of Line Interface Cards...........................................9-12

9.3.1 Specifications of the xLN2 Cards....................................9-12

9.3.2 Specifications of the 1LN4 / 2LN4 Card ..........................9-13

9.4 Specifications of Cross-Connect Cards ........................................9-14

9.5 Specifications of PIC Cards..........................................................9-15

9.5.1 Specifications of the 10IL2 Card.....................................9-15

9.5.2 Specifications of the BMD2 Card....................................9-17

9.5.3 Specifications of the BMD2P Card..................................9-18

9.5.4 Specifications of the BMD2PP Card ...............................9-20

9.6 Specifications of the Optical Transponder Cards...........................9-21

9.6.1 Specifications of the MST2 Card ....................................9-22

9.6.2 Specifications of the OTU2S Card..................................9-24

9.6.3 Specification of the 2OTU2S Card..................................9-25

9.6.4 Specifications of the OTU2E Card..................................9-27

9.6.5 Specification of the OTU2F Card....................................9-28


9.6.7 Specification of the OTU3S Card (Coherent) ..................9-32


9.6.9 Specification of the OTU3E Card (Coherent) ..................9-36

9.6.10 Specification of the OTU3F Card....................................9-37



9.6.13 Specifications of the OTU4F Card ..................................9-43

9.7 Specifications of Optical Layer Cards ...........................................9-44

9.7.1 Specifications of the OMU Series Card...........................9-44

9.7.2 Specification of the VMU Series Card.............................9-45

9.7.3 Specifications of the ODU Series Card ...........................9-46

9.7.4 Specifications of the ITL50 Card.....................................9-48

9.7.5 Specifications of the OSCAD Card .................................9-49

9.7.6 Specifications of the WSS8M Card.................................9-50

9.7.7 Specifications of the WSS8D Card .................................9-51

9.7.8 Specifications of the OA Card ........................................9-52

9.7.9 Specifications of the PA Card .........................................9-53

9.7.10 Specifications of the OCP Card ......................................9-54

9.7.11 Specifications of the OMSP Card ...................................9-55

9.7.12 Specifications of the OLP (1+1) Card .............................9-55

9.7.13 Specifications of the OLP (1:1) Card...............................9-57

9.7.14 Specifications of the OSC / EOSC Card .........................9-58

9.7.15 Specifications of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card .......................9-61

9.8 Specifications of System Connection and Management Cards......9-62

9.8.1 Specifications of the CCU Card ......................................9-62

9.8.2 Specifications of the EMU/FCU/EFCU Card ...................9-63

9.8.3 Specifications of the PWR Card .....................................9-63

9.8.4 Specifications of the Auxiliary Terminal Card ..................9-64

9.9 DCM Specifications .....................................................................9-64

9.10 Power Consumption of Cards.......................................................9-65

9.11 Mechanical Dimensions ...............................................................9-68

10 Equipment Standards and Environmental Requirements ............................10-1

10.1 Optical Interface Performance Standards .....................................10-2

10.2 Power Supply Requirements........................................................10-2

10.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility ......................................................10-2

10.4 Environment Requirements..........................................................10-3

10.4.1 Storage Environment .....................................................10-3

10.4.2 Transportation Environment ...........................................10-5

10.4.3 Working Environment.....................................................10-7

11 Product Safety Standards ..........................................................................11-1

11.1 Relevant ITU-T Standards............................................................11-2

11.2 Relevant IEEE Standards ............................................................11-5

11.3 Laser Safety Standards................................................................11-6

11.4 Relevant Safety Standards...........................................................11-6

11.5 Relevant EMC Standards.............................................................11-7

11.6 Relevant Environment Standards.................................................11-7

11.7 Grounding Standards...................................................................11-9

11.8 Noise Standards ..........................................................................11-9

11.9 Fire Prevention Standards............................................................11-9

11.10 Relevant International Standards .................................................11-9

Appendix A Abbreviations .......................................................................... A-1

Figures

Figure 1-1 Network Positioning of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products ........1-3

Figure 1-2 Overall Subrack View of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products......1-4

Figure 1-3 Transport Plane Structure ..............................................................1-5

Figure 1-4 Application Scenarios of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products .....1-6

Figure 2-1 Flowchart of Power Equalization in Fixed Gain Mode......................2-7

Figure 2-2 APR Function ..............................................................................2-11

Figure 2-3 E-Line Service Instance ...............................................................2-12

Figure 2-4 E-LAN Service Instance...............................................................2-13

Figure 2-5 E-Tree Service Instance...............................................................2-14

Figure 2-6 Network Diagram of the SM and PM Planning and Configuration

Example ......................................................................................2-21

Figure 2-7 SM Configuration and Planning....................................................2-22

Figure 2-8 PM Configuration and Planning....................................................2-22

Figure 2-9 Network Diagram of TCMi Configuration and Planning..................2-23

Figure 2-10 TCMi Configuration and Planning.................................................2-23

Figure 2-11 PTP Master-slave Clock Hierarchy...............................................2-30

Figure 2-12 100G Optical Fiber Bandwidth System Model...............................2-33



Figure 2-15 Typical Application of the 100 Gbit/s Transport Solution ................2-36

Figure 2-16 Typical Application of the 40 Gbit/s Transport Solution..................2-38

Figure 2-17 Typical Application of the 10 Gbit/s Transport Solution..................2-39

Figure 2-18 Hybrid Transmission of 40 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s Signals in the Non-

coherent System..........................................................................2-40

Figure 2-19 Hybrid Transmission of 100 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 10 Gbit/s Signals in

the Coherent System ...................................................................2-41

Figure 3-1 Appearance of the Cabinet (680 mm Deep)....................................3-2

Figure 3-2 Appearance of the Cabinet (340 mm Deep)....................................3-4

Figure 3-3 Appearance of the PDP (3000064).................................................3-6

Figure 3-4 Appearance of the PDP (3000068).................................................3-8

Figure 3-5 Appearance of the PDP (3000082)...............................................3-10

Figure 3-6 The DCM Slide Rail .....................................................................3-11

Figure 3-7 Appearance of the FONST 5000 U60 Subrack .............................3-13

Figure 3-8 Slot Allocation of the FONST 5000 U60 Subrack ..........................3-15

Figure 3-9 Appearance of the FONST 5000 U60 2.0 Subrack........................3-18

Figure 3-10 Slot Allocation of the FONST 5000 U60 2.0 Subrack ....................3-19









Figure 3-19 Appearance of the COTP (3030036) Subrack...............................3-36

Figure 3-20 Slot Allocation of the COTP (3030036) Subrack ...........................3-37

Figure 3-21 Appearance of the COTP (3030105) Subrack...............................3-39

Figure 3-22 Equipment Layout of the FONST 5000 U60..................................3-41

Figure 3-23 Equipment Layout of the FONST 5000 U60 2.0 ............................3-42





Figure 3-28 Equipment Layout of the COTP....................................................3-47

Figure 3-29 Naming Rules of the Electrical Layer Cards..................................3-48

Figure 3-30 Example of Tributary Interface Card Names .................................3-48

Figure 3-31 Example of Line Interface Card Names ........................................3-48

Figure 3-32 Example of the 10IL2 Card Name.................................................3-49

Figure 3-33 Card Appearance ........................................................................3-50

Figure 3-34 Positioning of Common Cards in the OTN System........................3-56

Figure 3-35 Positioning of Common Cards in the PIC System .........................3-57

Figure 3-36 Multiplexing and Demultiplexing Architecture of a 96-channel

System ........................................................................................3-60

Figure 3-37 Application of the OA and PA Cards in the System........................3-64

Figure 3-38 System Software Architecture ......................................................3-69

Figure 3-39 OTNM2000 Software Architecture................................................3-72

Figure 4-1 Composition and Signal Flow of the 48-Channel OTM System........4-8

Figure 4-2 Composition and Signal Flow of the 96-Channel OTM System......4-10

Figure 4-3 Composition and Signal Flow of FOADM......................................4-14

Figure 4-4 2-dimensional ROADM Application (Wavelength Relevance &

Direction Relevance)....................................................................4-22


Direction Irrelevance)...................................................................4-23

Figure 4-6 2-dimensional ROADM Application (Wavelength Irrelevance &




Figure 4-8 9-dimensional ROADM Application (Wavelength Irrelevance &


Figure 4-9 Composition and Signal Flow of OLA ...........................................4-31

Figure 4-10 Composition and Signal Flow of PIC System ................................4-36

Figure 5-1 Active and Standby Protection of the Power Cards in the FONST 5000

U60 2.0 Subrack............................................................................5-7


U60 Subrack..................................................................................5-8


U40 Subrack..................................................................................5-8


U30 Subrack..................................................................................5-9


U20 Subrack................................................................................5-10


U10 Subrack................................................................................5-10

Figure 5-7 Active and Standby Protection of the Power Cards in the COTP

Subrack.......................................................................................5-11

Figure 5-8 PDP (3000064) Power Input Protection ........................................5-12



Figure 5-11 Composition and Signal Flow of OTM...........................................5-14

Figure 5-12 OCh 1+1 Protection .....................................................................5-17

Figure 5-13 OCh 1:2 Protection (Normal) ........................................................5-20

Figure 5-14 OCh 1:2 Protection (Switching) ....................................................5-21

Figure 5-15 OCh Ring Protection ....................................................................5-24

Figure 5-16 Near End Switching in OCh Ring Protection .................................5-25

Figure 5-17 Far End Switching in OCh Ring Protection....................................5-26

Figure 5-18 ODUk 1+1 Protection...................................................................5-29

Figure 5-19 ODUk 1:2 Protection (Normal)......................................................5-32

Figure 5-20 ODUk 1:2 Protection (Switching) ..................................................5-33

Figure 5-21 ODUk Ring Protection..................................................................5-36

Figure 5-22 Near End Switching in ODUk Ring Protection...............................5-37

Figure 5-23 Remote End Switching in ODUk Ring Protection ..........................5-38

Figure 5-24 Optical Channel 1+1 Wavelength Protection.................................5-40

Figure 5-25 Optical Channel 1+1 Route Protection..........................................5-42

Figure 5-26 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection.......................................5-45

Figure 5-27 Optical Line 1:1/1+1 Protection ....................................................5-47

Figure 5-28 Port Aggregation Protection .........................................................5-49

Figure 5-29 Network Management Information Protection in Ring Network

Mode...........................................................................................5-50

Figure 5-30 Working and Protection Supervisory Channels - Normal ...............5-51

Figure 5-31 Working and Protection Supervisory Channels - Faulty.................5-52

Figure 6-1 Application of FOADM – Network Diagram .....................................6-2

Figure 6-2 Application of FOADM – Service Demand ......................................6-3

Figure 6-3 Application of FOADM – Signal Flow at Station A ...........................6-4

Figure 6-4 Application of FOADM – Signal Flow at Station B ...........................6-5

Figure 6-5 Application of ROADM – Network Diagram.....................................6-6

Figure 6-6 Application of ROADM – Service Demand......................................6-7

Figure 6-7 Application of ROADM – Dropping Signal Flow at Station A ............6-8

Figure 6-8 Application of ROADM – Adding Signal Flow at Station A ...............6-9

Figure 6-9 Application of ROADM – Signal Flow at Station B.........................6-11

Figure 6-10 Pass-through of Client Side Services at Local Station...................6-12

Figure 6-11 Service Add/Drop Line on the Client Side .....................................6-13

Figure 6-12 Pass-Through of Line Side Services at Local Station ....................6-13

Figure 6-13 Network Diagram – Example of Electrical Layer Grooming Application

(OTN) ..........................................................................................6-14

Figure 6-14 Service Demand – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (OTN) ..6-15

Figure 6-15 Card Slot Configuration at Stations A and E – Electrical Layer

Grooming Application (OTN) ........................................................6-16

Figure 6-16 Card Slot Configuration at Stations B and D – Electrical Layer

Grooming Application (OTN) ........................................................6-17

Figure 6-17 Card Slot Configuration at Station C – Electrical Layer Grooming

Application (OTN) ........................................................................6-17

Figure 6-18 Signal Flow at Station A – Electrical Layer Grooming Application

(OTN) ..........................................................................................6-18

Figure 6-19 Signal Flow at Station B – Electrical Layer Grooming Application

(OTN) ..........................................................................................6-20

Figure 6-20 Signal Flow at Station C – Electrical Layer Grooming Application

(OTN) ..........................................................................................6-22

Figure 6-21 Network Diagram – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (PIC)...6-23

Figure 6-22 Service Requirement – Electrical Layer Grooming Application

(PIC)............................................................................................6-24

Figure 6-23 Card Slot Configuration at Stations A and C – Electrical Layer

Grooming Application (PIC)..........................................................6-24

Figure 6-24 Card Slot Configuration at Station B – Electrical Layer Grooming

Application (PIC)..........................................................................6-24

Figure 6-25 Signal Flow at Station A – Electrical Layer Grooming Application

(PIC)............................................................................................6-25

Figure 6-26 Signal Flow at Station B – Electrical Layer Grooming Application

(PIC)............................................................................................6-26

Figure 7-1 Structure of the ASON System.......................................................7-4

Figure 7-2 ASON Network Model....................................................................7-6

Figure 7-3 Positioning of the TE Link...............................................................7-7

Figure 7-4 LSP ...............................................................................................7-8

Figure 7-5 The Minimum Node Number ..........................................................7-9

Figure 7-6 The Lowest Link Cost ..................................................................7-10

Figure 7-7 Load Balancing............................................................................7-11

Figure 7-8 Product Relationships on Each Layer...........................................7-13

Figure 7-9 OTN ASON Solution ....................................................................7-15

Figure 7-10 Architecture of the Intelligent Software SmartWeaver ...................7-17

Figure 7-11 Misconnection of Optical Fibers....................................................7-20

Figure 7-12 Network Traffic Balancing ............................................................7-25

Figure 8-1 Monitoring and Management Module .............................................8-2

Figure 8-2 Signal Flow in the OSC for the Chain Network ................................8-8

Figure 8-3 Signal Flow in the ESC for the Chain Network ..............................8-10

Figure 8-4 The OTU Frame Structure............................................................8-15

Figure 8-5 TCM Function ..............................................................................8-15

Tables

Table 2-1 Functions of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products .......................2-2

Table 2-2 Service Types and Service Rates...................................................2-3

Table 2-3 Access Capabilities of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products ........2-4

Table 2-4 OAM Standards Supported by the FONST 5000 U Series of

Products ......................................................................................2-18

Table 2-5 Protection Types Supported by the FONST 5000 U Series of

Products ......................................................................................2-19

Table 2-6 Monitorable Performance Items of Services..................................2-24

Table 2-7 Monitorable Performance Items of Systems..................................2-25

Table 3-1 Specifications of Cabinet (680 mm Deep).......................................3-3

Table 3-2 Specifications of Cabinet (340 mm Deep).......................................3-4

Table 3-3 Mapping Relationship Between the Slots and Cards of the FONST

5000 U60 Subrack .......................................................................3-16


5000 U60 2.0 Subrack .................................................................3-20


5000 U40 Subrack .......................................................................3-25

Table 3-6 Mapping Relationship between the Slots and Cards of the FONST

5000 U30 Subrack .......................................................................3-29


5000 U20 Subrack .......................................................................3-32


5000 U10 Subrack .......................................................................3-35

Table 3-9 Mapping Relationship between the Slots and Cards of the COTP

(3030036) Subrack ......................................................................3-38

Table 3-10 Descriptions of Components of the COTP (3030105) Subrack ......3-39

Table 3-11 Card Appearance and Dimensions of the Service Cards...............3-51

Table 3-12 Card Classification.......................................................................3-55

Table 3-13 Main Functions of the PIC Unit .....................................................3-59

Table 3-14 Functions of OMU Series, VMU Series, ODU Series Cards...........3-61

Table 3-15 Functions of the WSS8M / WSS8D Cards ....................................3-63

Table 3-16 Functions of the Optical Protection Unit Cards..............................3-64

Table 3-17 Functions of the System Connection and Management Unit .........3-67

Table 4-1 OTM Related Functional Units .......................................................4-2

Table 4-2 List of Compulsory and Optional OTM Cards ..................................4-3

Table 4-3 ROADM Related Functional Units ................................................4-16

Table 4-4 Compulsory Cards for the ROADM...............................................4-18

Table 4-5 Basic Concepts of the ROADM ....................................................4-20

Table 4-6 List of Compulsory and Optional OLA Cards.................................4-28

Table 4-7 PIC Related Functional Units .......................................................4-32

Table 4-8 List of Compulsory and Optional PIC Cards..................................4-33

Table 5-1 1+1 Protection for the NE Management Cards of the FONST 5000 U

Series of Products .........................................................................5-2

Table 5-2 1+1 Protection Parameters of the NE Management Cards ..............5-3

Table 5-3 M+N Protection for the Cross-connect Cards of the FONST 5000 U

Series of Products .........................................................................5-5

Table 5-4 M+N Protection Parameters of the Cross-connect Cards of the

FONST 5000 U Series of Products.................................................5-5

Table 5-5 Parameters for the OCh 1+1 Protection........................................5-15

Table 5-6 Parameters for the OCh m:n Protection ........................................5-18

Table 5-7 Parameters for the OCh Ring Protection.......................................5-22

Table 5-8 Parameters for the ODUk 1+1 Protection......................................5-27

Table 5-9 Parameters for the ODUk m:n Protection......................................5-30

Table 5-10 Parameters for the ODUk Ring Protection ....................................5-34

Table 5-11 Parameters for Optical Channel 1+1 Wavelength Protection .........5-39

Table 5-12 Parameters for Optical Channel 1+1 Route Protection ..................5-41

Table 5-13 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection.......................................5-44

Table 5-14 Optical Line 1:1 / 1+1 Protection Parameters................................5-46

Table 5-15 Ethernet LAG Protection Parameters ...........................................5-48

Table 7-1 Calculation of Load Balance for Choosing a Route .......................7-11

Table 7-2 Modules and Functions of the Intelligent Software SmartWeaver ..7-18

Table 7-3 Protection and Recovery Functions of the ASON..........................7-20

Table 7-4 Differentiated Service Functions...................................................7-22

Table 8-1 List of Management and Maintenance Interfaces............................8-3

Table 8-2 Service Performance Monitoring on the Client Side ......................8-12

Table 8-3 Signal Performance Monitoring on the WDM Side ........................8-13

Table 9-1 Frequencies and Wavelengths at the CO and CE Bands..................9-2

Table 9-2 Optical Interface Specifications of the xTN1 Cards .........................9-4

Table 9-3 Mechanical Parameters of the xTN1 Cards.....................................9-5

Table 9-4 Power Consumption of the xTN1 Cards..........................................9-5

Table 9-5 Optical Interface Specifications of the xTN2 Cards .........................9-5

Table 9-6 Mechanical Parameters of the xTN2 Cards.....................................9-6

Table 9-7 Power Consumption of the xTN2 Cards..........................................9-6

Table 9-8 Optical Interface Specifications of the 10TP2 / 20TP2 Card ............9-7

Table 9-9 Mechanical Parameters of the 10TP2 / 20TP2 Card .......................9-7

Table 9-10 Power Consumption of the 10TP2 / 20TP2 Card.............................9-7

Table 9-11 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1TO3 Card...........................9-8

Table 9-12 Mechanical Parameters of the 1TO3 Card ......................................9-8

Table 9-13 Power Consumption of the 1TO3 Card ...........................................9-9

Table 9-14 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1TN3 / 2TN3 Card................9-9

Table 9-15 Mechanical Parameters of the 1TN3 / 2TN3 Card .........................9-10

Table 9-16 Power Consumption of the 1TN3 / 2TN3 Card ..............................9-10

Table 9-17 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1TN4 / 2TN4 Card..............9-10

Table 9-18 Mechanical Parameters of the 1TN4 / 2TN4 Card .........................9-11

Table 9-19 Power Consumption of the 1TN4 / 2TN4 Card ..............................9-12

Table 9-20 Optical Interface Specifications of the xLN2 Cards........................9-12

Table 9-21 Mechanical Parameters of the xLN2 Cards...................................9-13

Table 9-22 Power Consumption of the xLN2 Cards........................................9-13

Table 9-23 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1LN4 / 2LN4 Card on the WDM

Side.............................................................................................9-13

Table 9-24 Mechanical Parameters of the 1LN4 / 2LN4 Card .........................9-14

Table 9-25 Power Consumption of the 1LN4 / 2LN4 Card ..............................9-14

Table 9-26 Mechanical Parameters of the Cross-connect Cards ....................9-15

Table 9-27 Power Consumption of the Cross-connect Cards..........................9-15

Table 9-28 Optical Interface Specifications of the 10IL2 Card.........................9-15

Table 9-29 Mechanical Parameters of the 10IL2 Card ....................................9-17

Table 9-30 Power Consumption of the 10IL2 Card .........................................9-17

Table 9-31 Specifications of the BMD2 Card..................................................9-17

Table 9-32 Mechanical Parameters of the BMD2 Card ...................................9-18

Table 9-33 Power Consumption of the BMD2 Card ........................................9-18

Table 9-34 Specifications of the BMD2P Card................................................9-18

Table 9-35 Specifications of the BMD2P Card's Amplifier...............................9-19

Table 9-36 Mechanical Parameters of the BMD2P Card.................................9-19

Table 9-37 Power Consumption of the BMD2P Card......................................9-20

Table 9-38 Specifications of the BMD2PP Card .............................................9-20

Table 9-39 Specifications of the BMD2PP Card's Amplifier ............................9-20

Table 9-40 Mechanical Parameters of the BMD2PP Card ..............................9-21

Table 9-41 Power Consumption of the BMD2PP Card ...................................9-21

Table 9-42 Specifications of Client Side Interfaces on the MST2 Card (the STM-

16 / OTU1 Service) ......................................................................9-22

Table 9-43 Specifications of Client Side Interfaces on the MST2 Card (the GE

Service) .......................................................................................9-22

Table 9-44 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the MST2 Card 9-23

Table 9-45 Mechanical Parameters of the MST2 Card ...................................9-23

Table 9-46 Power Consumption of the MST2 Card.........................................9-23

Table 9-47 Specifications of Client Side Interfaces on the OTU2S Card..........9-24

Table 9-48 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2S

Card ............................................................................................9-24

Table 9-49 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU2S Card .................................9-25

Table 9-50 Power Consumption of the OTU2S Card ......................................9-25

Table 9-51 Specifications of Wavelength Division Side Optical Interfaces on the

2OTU2S Card..............................................................................9-25


2OTU2S Card..............................................................................9-26

Table 9-53 Mechanical Parameters of the 2OTU2S Card ...............................9-26

Table 9-54 Power Consumption of the 2OTU2S Card ....................................9-26

Table 9-55 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2E

Card ............................................................................................9-27

Table 9-56 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2E

Card ............................................................................................9-27

Table 9-57 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU2E Card .................................9-28

Table 9-58 Power Consumption of the OTU2E Card ......................................9-28


OTU2F Card................................................................................9-28

Table 9-60 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU2F Card .................................9-29

Table 9-61 Power Consumption of the OTU2F Card ......................................9-29

Table 9-62 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3S

Card ............................................................................................9-29


Card ............................................................................................9-30

Table 9-64 Specifications of the Built-in PA Module of the OTU3S Card..........9-30

Table 9-65 Specifications of the Built-in TDCM of the OTU3S Card ................9-31



Table 9-68 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3S Card

(Coherent) ...................................................................................9-32

Table 9-69 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3S Card

(Coherent) ...................................................................................9-32

Table 9-70 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU3S Card (Coherent)................9-33

Table 9-71 Power Consumption of the OTU3S Card (Coherent).....................9-33


Card ............................................................................................9-33


Card ............................................................................................9-34

Table 9-74 Specifications of the Built-in PA Module of the OTU3E Card..........9-35

Table 9-75 Specifications of the Built-in TDCM of the OTU3E Card ................9-35



Table 9-78 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3E Card

(Coherent) ...................................................................................9-36

Table 9-79 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3E Card

(Coherent) ...................................................................................9-36

Table 9-80 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU3E Card (Coherent)................9-37

Table 9-81 Power Consumption of the OTU3E Card (Coherent).....................9-37


OTU3F Card................................................................................9-37

Table 9-83 Specifications of the Built-in PA Module of the OTU3F Card..........9-38



Table 9-86 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU4S

Card ............................................................................................9-39


Card ............................................................................................9-40




Card ............................................................................................9-41


Card ............................................................................................9-42



Table 9-94 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU4F

Card ............................................................................................9-43



Table 9-97 Specifications of the OMU Series Cards .......................................9-44

Table 9-98 Mechanical Parameters of OMU Series Cards..............................9-45

Table 9-99 Power Consumption of the OMU Series Cards .............................9-45

Table 9-100 Specifications of the VMU Series Cards .......................................9-45

Table 9-101 Mechanical Parameters of VMU Series Cards ..............................9-46

Table 9-102 Power Consumption of the VMU Series Cards..............................9-46

Table 9-103 Specifications of the ODU Series Cards .......................................9-46

Table 9-104 Mechanical Parameters of ODU Series Cards ..............................9-47

Table 9-105 Power Consumption of the ODU Series Cards..............................9-47

Table 9-106 Specifications of the ITL50 Card...................................................9-48

Table 9-107 Mechanical Parameters of the ITL50 Card....................................9-48

Table 9-108 Power Consumption of the ITL50 Card.........................................9-48

Table 9-109 Specifications of the OSCAD Card ...............................................9-49

Table 9-110 Mechanical Parameters of the OSCAD Card ................................9-49

Table 9-111 Power Consumption of the OSCAD Card .....................................9-49

Table 9-112 Specifications of the WSS8M Card...............................................9-50

Table 9-113 Mechanical Parameters of the WSS8M Card................................9-50

Table 9-114 Power Consumption of the WSS8M Card .....................................9-50

Table 9-115 Specifications of the WSS8D Card ...............................................9-51

Table 9-116 Mechanical Parameters of the WSS8D Card ................................9-51

Table 9-117 Power Consumption of the WSS8D Card .....................................9-51

Table 9-118 Specifications of the OA Card ......................................................9-52

Table 9-119 Mechanical Parameters of the OA Card........................................9-52

Table 9-120 Power Consumption of the OA Card.............................................9-53

Table 9-121 Specifications of the PA Card .......................................................9-53

Table 9-122 Mechanical Parameters of the PA Card ........................................9-54

Table 9-123 Power Consumption of the PA Card .............................................9-54

Table 9-124 Specifications of the OCP Card ....................................................9-54

Table 9-125 Mechanical Parameters of the OCP Card .....................................9-54

Table 9-126 Power Consumption of the OCP card ...........................................9-54

Table 9-127 Specifications of the OMSP Card .................................................9-55

Table 9-128 Mechanical Parameters of the OMSP Card ..................................9-55

Table 9-129 Power Consumption of the OMSP card ........................................9-55

Table 9-130 Specifications of the OLP (1+1) Card ...........................................9-55

Table 9-131 Mechanical Parameters of the OLP (1+1) Card.............................9-56

Table 9-132 Power Consumption of the OLP (1+1) Card..................................9-56

Table 9-133 Specifications of the OLP (1:1) Card.............................................9-57

Table 9-134 Mechanical Parameters of the OLP (1:1) Card..............................9-57

Table 9-135 Power Consumption of the OLP (1:1) Card...................................9-58

Table 9-136 Optical Interface Specifications of the OSC / EOSC Card .............9-58

Table 9-137 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the OSC / EOSC Card (2048

kbit/s) ..........................................................................................9-58

Table 9-138 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the OSC / EOSC Card (2048

kHz) ............................................................................................9-59

Table 9-139 Clock Interface Specifications of the OSC (Electrical Layer) / EOSC

Card ............................................................................................9-60

Table 9-140 GE Optical Interface Specifications of the OSC (Electrical Layer) /

EOSC Card .................................................................................9-60

Table 9-141 Mechanical Parameters of the OSC / EOSC Card ........................9-61

Table 9-142 Power Consumption of the OSC / EOSC Card..............................9-61

Table 9-143 Specifications of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card .....................................9-61

Table 9-144 Mechanical Parameters of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card ......................9-62

Table 9-145 Power Consumption of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card ...........................9-62

Table 9-146 Mechanical Parameters of the CCU Card .....................................9-62

Table 9-147 Power Consumption of the CCU Card ..........................................9-62

Table 9-148 Mechanical Parameters of the EMU/FCU/EFCU Card ..................9-63

Table 9-149 Power Consumption of the EMU/FCU/EFCU Card........................9-63

Table 9-150 Mechanical Parameters of the PWR Card ....................................9-63

Table 9-151 Power Consumption of the PWR Card..........................................9-63

Table 9-152 Mechanical Parameters of the Auxiliary Terminal Card..................9-64

Table 9-153 Power Consumption of the Auxiliary Terminal Cards .....................9-64

Table 9-154 G.652 Optical Fiber–DCM Specifications......................................9-65

Table 9-155 G.655 Optical Fiber–DCM Specifications......................................9-65

Table 9-156 Mechanical Parameters of the DCM .............................................9-65

Table 9-157 Power Consumption of Cards.......................................................9-66

Table 9-158 Mechanical Dimensions of the Cabinets .......................................9-68

Table 9-159 Mechanical Dimensions of the Subracks ......................................9-69

Table 9-160 Mechanical Dimensions of the Cards ...........................................9-69

Table 10-1 Climate Requirements (Storage Environment)..............................10-3

Table 10-2 Concentration Requirements for Mechanically Active Substances

(Storage Environment) .................................................................10-4

Table 10-3 Concentration Requirements for Chemically Active Substances

(Storage Environment) .................................................................10-4

Table 10-4 Sinusoidal Vibration Requirements (Storage Environment) ...........10-4

Table 10-5 Climate Requirements (Transportation Environment)....................10-5


(Transportation Environment).......................................................10-5


(Transportation Environment).......................................................10-6

Table 10-8 Mechanical Requirements (Transportation Environment) ..............10-6

Table 10-9 Climate Requirements (Working Environment) .............................10-7


(Working Environment) ................................................................10-8


(Working Environment) ................................................................10-8

Table 10-12 Mechanical Requirements (Working Environment) .......................10-8

Table 11-1 Component Materials...................................................................11-8

1 Overview

The FONST 5000 U series of products are packet optical transport equipment

based on the unified switching system offered by FiberHome Telecommunication

Technologies Co., Ltd. (referred to as FiberHome hereinafter). The following

describes the product features, product positioning,product architecture and

application scenarios of the FONST 5000 U series of products.

Product Features

Product Positioning

Product Architecture

Application Scenario

Version: A 1-1

FONST 5000 U Series Packet Enhanced OTN Equipment Product Description

1.1 Product Features

The FONST 5000 U series of product provide the following features:

u Uses a unified switching platform to integrate the PTN and OTN functions, and

simultaneously supports the VC/Packet/ODUk switching in the same cross-

connect unit.

u Provides ultra-large capacity electrical cross-connect capability. A single

subrack supports a maximum of 12.8 Tbit/s cross-connect capacity, 25.6 Tbit/s

cross-connect capacity after upgrade, and supports free grooming of ultra-

capacity, multi-grained electrical cross-connect.

u Supports the access of services at any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 100 Gbit/s using

any protocol. Bandwidth is allocated based on the service requirements,

thereby maximizing the transmission bandwidth efficiency.

u Owns the flexibility of fine-grained services of the PTN equipment and mass

transmission capacity of the OTN equipment.

u Supports various OAM management functions, increases the network

transparency, provides quick fault isolation, and saves maintenance costs.

u Reduces the network delay and jitter to the maximum extent, and ensures the

quality of key services by properly allocating and monitoring network resources

based on QoS.

u Provides complete network-level and equipment-level protection mechanisms,

which ensures the service security to the maximum extent.

u Supports time synchronization and frequency clock synchronization for cards,

nodes, and networks.

u Uses ultra-energy-efficient technologies to increase power supply and

consumption efficiency while reducing energy consumption by adopting the

intelligent fan with a B-T type air duct and excellent chip and system designs.

u Seamlessly connects with the FONST 1000 / 3000 / 4000 / 5000 to uniformly

manage the network from end to end.

u Supports the packet and OTN hybrid service mode, achieves seamless

combination of rigid tunnels of the ODUk and flexible tunnels of the packet

equipment, so as to enhance the performance and transmission efficiency of

the equipment.

1-2 Version: A

1 Overview

1.2 Product Positioning

The FONST 5000 U series of products can internetwork together to form a packet

optical transport product hierarchy in the unified switching system, covering the

backbone layer, core layer, distribution layer, and access layer applications; and can

also internetwork with the OTN, PTN, and SDH equipment to provide complete

transport network solutions, as shown in Figure 1-1.

Figure 1-1 Network Positioning of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products

Version: A 1-3


1.3 Product Architecture

Figure 1-2 shows the overall product architecture of the FONST 5000 U series of

products.

Figure 1-2 Overall Subrack View of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products

As shown in Figure 1-2, the FONST 5000 U series of products consist of a transport

plane, a management plane, a control plane, and a network planning system. Three

planes cooperate with the network planning system to transport intelligent services.

u The transport plane is the principal subsystem of the products. The transport

plane performs end-to-end transport of services based on the calculated route.

The corresponding entity is the hardware components. Figure 1-3 shows the

structure of the transport plane.

1-4 Version: A

1 Overview

Figure 1-3 Transport Plane Structure

The transport plane contains an electrical layer (left dotted frame in Figure 1-3)

and an optical layer (right dotted frame in Figure 1-3). The electrical layer and

optical layer perform end-to-end transport of services together.

4 The electrical layer includes the service adaptation unit, cross-connect unit,

and line adaptation unit, which perform the cross-connect grooming of the

sub-wavelength services.

4 The optical layer includes the optical add / drop multiplexing unit, the

optical multiplexing / demultiplexing unit and the optical amplification unit to

implement the cross-connect grooming and transport of the wavelength

services.

u The management plane manages the transport plane and the control plane,

and provides users with a graphical service configuration interface. This plane

implements coordination and cooperation of all planes. The entity of the

management plane is the OTNM2000 / OTNM2100, which provides

management functions defined in ITU-T M.3010, including performance

management, fault management, configuration management, and security

management.

u The control plane collects route information and calculates specific routes of

services. The entity of the control plane is relevant cards that have the control

plane function.

Version: A 1-5


The FONST 5000 U series of products support the loading of the control plane.

By loading the control plane, the FONST 5000 U series of product can achieve

automatic resource discovery and automatic end-to-end service configuration,

provide QoS assurance at different levels, and facilitate the service setup.

1.4 Application Scenario

Convergence of multiple service network nodes: Ethernet services of the GE/XGE

are transmitted through the existing PTN network. When the growing bandwidth

demand reaches 40G or 100G, the services are transmitted to the FONST 5000 U

series product network by ODUk/ODUflex.

This networking mode has the following advantages:

u The service bearing mode is simple and easy for management and monitoring.

u The transmission layer is simple and the ODUk/ODUflex can achieve flexible

mapping and adaptation of all services.

Figure 1-4 Application Scenarios of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products

1-6 Version: A

2 Functions and Features

The following describes various functions and features of the FONST 5000 U series

of products.

Functions of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products

Service Types and Access Capabilities

Wavelength Tunability

Optical Power Management

Data Features

Protection Capability

Fault Isolation and Analysis

Clock Features

ASON Features

Intelligent Fan

PIC Features

10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s and 100 Gbit/s Transmission Solutions

Card Self-Booting

Remote Upgrade

Version: A 2-1


2.1 Functions of the FONST 5000 U Series ofProducts

The FONST 5000 U series of products include the FONST 5000 U60, the FONST

5000 U60 2.0, the FONST 5000 U40, the FONST 5000 U30, the FONST 5000 U20,

and the FONST 5000 U10. Table 2-1 describes the functions of each product.

Table 2-1 Functions of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products

Equipment NameFONST 5000

U60

FONST

5000 U60 2.

0

FONST

5000 U40

FONST 5000

U30

FONST 5000

U20

FONST 5000

U10

Dimensions

(H × W × D) (mm)

1447×563×5-

70

1575×563×-

570

1166×566×-

570

1677×566×-

295

1152×566×2-

95535×566×295

Number of Slots 88 92 80 58 42 18

Cross-connect

Capacity12.8T 12.8T 10.4T 8T 5.2T 2.4T

Maximum

Transmission

Capacity per Slot

200G

Maximum

Number of

Supported

Channels

48 / 96

Wavelength

Range1529.16nm to 1567.14nm

Type of

Supported

Service

SDH, SONET, Ethernet, SAN, OTN, and video services

Line Rate 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, 100 Gbit/s

Type of

Supported

Protection

u Equipment-level protection: NE management card 1+1 protection, cross-connect card M+N

protection, power supply card 1+1 protection, and input power 1+1 protection

u Network-level protection: OCh 1+1 protection, OCh m:n protection, OCh Ring protection,

ODUk 1+1 protection, ODUk m:n protection, ODUk Ring protection, optical channel 1+1

wavelength protection, optical channel 1+1 route protection, 1+1 optical multiplex section

protection, optical line 1:1/1+1 protection, Ethernet LAG protection

2-2 Version: A


2.2 Service Types and Access Capabilities

The following describes the service types and access capabilities of the FONST

5000 U series of products.

2.2.1 Service Type

The FONST 5000 U series of products support accessing various types of services.

The types and rates of the supported services are shown in Table 2-2.

Table 2-2 Service Types and Service Rates

Service Service Type Service RateReference

Standard

SDH services

STM-1 155.52 Mbit/s

ITU-T G.707

ITU-T G.691

ITU-T G.957

STM-4 622.08 Mbit/s

STM-16 2.5 Gbit/s

STM-64 9.95 Gbit/s

STM-256 39.81 Gbit/s

SONETservices

OC-3 155.52 Mbit/s

GR-253-CORE

GR-1377-CORE

ANSI T1.105

OC-12 622.08 Mbit/s

OC-48 2.5 Gbit/s

OC-192 9.95 Gbit/s

OC-768 39.81 Gbit/s

Ethernet services

FE 125 Mbit/s

IEEE 802.3z

IEEE 802.3a

IEEE 802.3u

GE 1.25 Gbit/s

10GE WAN 9.95 Gbit/s

10GE LAN 10.31 Gbit/s

40GE 41.25 Gbit/s

100GE 103.12 Gbit/s

SAN services

ESCON 200 Mbit/s

ANSI X3.296

ANSI X3.303

FICON 1.06 Gbit/s

FC100 1.06 Gbit/s

FC200 2.12 Gbit/s

FC400 4.25 Gbit/s

FC800 8.5 Gbit/s

FC1200 10.51 Gbit/s

OTN servicesOTU1 2.67 Gbit/s ITU-T G.709

ITU-T G.959.1OTU2 10.71 Gbit/s

Version: A 2-3


Table 2-2 Service Types and Service Rates (Continued)

Service Service Type Service RateReference

Standard

OTU2e 11.10 Gbit/s

OTU3 43.02 Gbit/s

OTU4 111.8 Gbit/s

Video and other

services

DVB 270 Mbit/s EN 50083-9

SMPTE 292M

SMPTE 259MHDTV 1.49 Gbit/s

2.2.2 Service Access Capability

The FONST 5000 U series of products include the FONST 5000 U60, the FONST

5000 U60 2.0, the FONST 5000 U40, the FONST 5000 U30, the FONST 5000 U20,

and the FONST 5000 U10. Table 2-3 describes the access capability of each

system.

Table 2-3 Access Capabilities of the FONST 5000 U Series of Products

Service Type

Maximum Quantity Accessible

CardU60

Subrack

U60 2.0

Subrack

U40

Subrack

U30

Subrack

U20

Subrack

U10

Subrack

100GE, OTU4 2 2×64 2×64 2×52 2×40 2×26 2×12

STM-256, OC768,

OTU3, OTU3e, 40GE2 2×64 2×64 2×52 2×40 2×26 2×12

10GE LAN, 10GE

WAN, STM-64,

OC192, OTU2,

OTU2e, FC800/1200

20 20×64 20×64 20×52 20×40 20×26 20×12

FC400 8 8×64 8×64 8×52 8×40 8×26 8×12

STM-16, OTU1,

FC20016 16×64 16×64 16×52 16×40 16×26 16×12

GE, STM-1/4, FC100 32 32×64 32×64 32×52 32×40 32×26 32×12

2-4 Version: A


2.3 Wavelength Tunability

The line interface card provides wavelength tuning function, and can use any of the

96 wavelengths with 50 GHz spacing in the C-band.

Overview

Wavelength-tunable cards help to avoid the fixed wavelength conversion mode of

traditional line interface cards. This type of cards can be used as normal cards to

make service provisioning and wavelength assignment easier. They can also be

used as spare cards to replace the faulty cards with different wavelengths, so as to

reduce the quantity and the cost of spare parts.

Function Implementation

The wavelength tunable modules are integrated on the line interface cards to

perform wavelength tuning.

2.4 Optical Power Management

The following describes the optical power management functions of the FONST

5000 U series of products, including automatic channel optical power equalization,

automatic line optical power equalization and APR.

2.4.1 Automatic Equalization of Channel Optical Power

The channel optical power automatic equalization function is designed to reduce

operational difficulty and complexity in the work of commissioning and subsequent

network maintenance.

Overview

Either the gain variation inherent in amplification cards or the application of

cascaded amplification cards may result in significant difference in channel power,

OSNR degradation and limited transmission distance of the DWDM system.

Version: A 2-5


The OPM (spectrum analysis) units are introduced on the transmit end, receive end,

and OLA station to ensure the qualified output power, OSNR and flatness of

cascaded amplification cards.


The OPM unit monitors the optical power of each wavelength output at the

amplification card. The VMU/WSS unit compares the optical power of each

wavelength with the reference value. If the optical power of a wavelength is greater

or smaller than the reference value, the VMU/WSS unit adjusts the EVOA

attenuation value of the single-wavelength signal where the deviation occurs,

implementing power equalization of various wavelengths.

2.4.2 Automatic Equalization of Line Power

The product performs line power automatic detection function. The gain control of

amplification cards and the built-in EVOA work in cooperation to reduce

maintenance difficulty and complexity, and to perform line power automatic

equalization function.

The product provides two line power automatic equalization modes, i.e. the fixed

gain mode and the line attenuation mode. A combined configuration may apply to

the omni-directional power equalization of a single station, a single span, and the

line.

2.4.2.1 Fixed Gain Mode

The fixed gain mode is specific to a single amplification card, and is not applicable

to network-level system adjustment.

Overview

Users only need to set the expected output power of an amplification card via the

network management system. The amplification card will adjust its built-in VOA

attenuation automatically to ensure that the actual output power is equal to the

expected output power. The expected output power of an amplification card can be

worked out according to the module type and the amplified channel number of this

card.

2-6 Version: A



Figure 2-1 shows the process of power equalization in fixed gain mode. Network

management operators can calculate the output expectation value and set this

value on the network management system according to the module type of the

amplification cards and the quantity of the amplified channels. The amplification

cards ascertain whether the actual value deviates from the expectation value,

whether EVOA is locked, and whether EVOA is adjusted to a value exceeding the

limit in sequence until the deviation of the expectation value and actual value is

within the required threshold range.

Figure 2-1 Flowchart of Power Equalization in Fixed Gain Mode

Note:

To perform the power equalization in the fixed gain mode, users need to

set the EVOA mode of the amplification card to Tracing. Otherwise, the

EVOA cannot be performed.

Version: A 2-7


2.4.2.2 Line Attenuation Mode

The system ascertains whether an abnormality of the line occurs and calculates the

abnormal attenuation value (not caused by channel increment or decrement).

Based on the attenuation value, the amplification card adjusts EVOA attenuation

volume to guarantee the optical power stability of the entire line.

Overview

The following are two algorithms used by the system:

u One is to compare the difference between the input optical power of the local

amplification card and the output optical power of the previous amplification

card with the reference attenuation of the line. If not equal, abnormal

attenuation of the line has occurred.

u In the other way, the local amplification card ascertains whether the actual

output power equals to the value calculated using the formula Ptotal (dBm) =

Psingle (dBm) + 10lgN (dB).

4 Ptotal: The total optical power of the system

4 Psingle: The input optical power of a wavelength of the system

4 N: The total number of commissioned waves

Note:

Either channel increment / decrement or line degradation can result in

line power changes. Power changes caused by channel increment /

decrement, however, do not influence the OSNR performance. Therefore,

line power equalization (optical power of the amplification card) is not

necessary.

2-8 Version: A



The line optical power equalization procedures corresponding to the two algorithms

are the same, both of which include single span adjustment and line adjustment.

When the line power is abnormal, the system starts single span adjustment first. If

the single span adjustment has reached its limit, or optical power equalization is

required by multiple nodes, the line adjustment will be started.

The process for adjusting the single span is as follows:

1. Ascertain whether abnormal attenuation occurs. See previous introduction to

the calculation methods.

2. Ascertain whether the abnormal attenuation value exceeds the threshold:

Compare the abnormal attenuation value obtained from the calculation in the

previous step with the set threshold value. If the value is smaller than the

threshold value, save the data for further adjustment; if the value is larger than

the threshold value, go to the next step.

3. Execute EVOA adjustment: The amplification card ascertains whether the

EVOA attenuation value can be achieved. If not, the amplification card will

implement the line adjustment; if yes, it will adjust the EVOA attenuation value

accordingly.

4. Save the current actual attenuation value of the line as the reference value for

the next adjustment.

Note:

The reference value refers to the actual attenuation value of single span

after project startup or the previous single span adjustment.

The process of attenuation adjustment for a line is described as follows:

1. Ascertain whether the line equalization should be performed: In the single span

equalization, when an abnormal power occurs on a succeeding node, the

system will report to the head node. If multiple nodes report the abnormal

power or a node reports an EVOA threshold crossing alarm (equalization

disabled), the system will start the line equalization.

Version: A 2-9


2. Make the EVOA adjustment for the amplification card at the head node

following the procedure of single span adjustment.

3. Upon completion of the head node adjustment, notify the succeeding nodes to

make adjustment in turn until the end node of the line.

4. Complete the adjustment: The end node delivers the equalization completion

report.

2.4.3 APR Function

The APR function refers to the automatic optical power reduction function of the

amplification card.

Overview

When fiber cables are cut off, strong output power signals of previous amplification

cards will be exposed. To prevent strong light from burning maintainers' eyes, the

system will reduce optical power of amplification cards in the influenced optical

transmission sections immediately and resume the normal work automatically after

fault elimination.


As shown in Figure 2-2, when fiber-cut occurs on lines between amplification card 1

and card 2, and at the same time card 2 at Station B detects an LOS alarm, Station

B will reduce the output power of amplification card 3 to a value within a safety

range (below 0 dBm). Consequently, the reduced output power of the amplification

card 3 will lead to an LOS alarm detected by amplification card 4 at Station A, and

Station A will reduce the output power of amplification card 1 to a value within a

safety range (below 0 dBm) as well.

After the fault is cleared, the optical amplification cards 1 and 3 can work properly.

2-10 Version: A


Figure 2-2 APR Function

2.5 Data Features

The following describes the data features of the FONST 5000 U series of products,

including the service types, QoS features, and OAM features.

2.5.1 Service Types

The FONST 5000 U series of products provide three patterns of Ethernet services.

u Ethernet private line service, i.e., the E-Line service.

u Ethernet private network service, i.e., the E-LAN service.

u Ethernet convergence service, i.e., the E-Tree service.

2.5.1.1 E-Line Service

The following describes the pattern of the E-Line service provided by the FONST

5000 U series of products with a service instance. Figure 2-3 shows the service

instance of the E-Line service provided by the FONST 5000 U series of products.

E-Line Service Scenario

Company X has branches in city A and city C, company Y has branches in city B

and city C, and company Z has branches in city A and city B. Branches of company

X, company Y, and company Z in different cities need to exchange data.

Version: A 2-11


Implementation of E-Line Service Pattern

The FONST 5000 U series of products can provide private line services for

company X, company Y, and company Z. Service data of different companies can

be identified based on ports. Therefore, the communication requirement is met and

service data can be completely isolated.

Figure 2-3 E-Line Service Instance

2.5.1.2 E-LAN Service

The following describes the pattern of the E-LAN service provided by the FONST


instance of the E-LAN service provided by the FONST 5000 U series of products.

E-LAN Service Scenario

The headquarters of company K are located in city C. Branch X of company K is set

in city A and city B, and branch Y is set in city A, city B, and city C. Branches X and

Y do not have business transaction and data isolation is required. The headquarters

and each branch have communication requirements and the headquarters need to

access the Internet.

2-12 Version: A


Implementation of E-LAN Service Pattern

The FONST 5000 U series of products can provide the E-LAN service for company

K. Different VLAN tags are used to identify service data of different branches,

thereby achieving data interconnection and data isolation between branches. The

network access data of the headquarters can also be isolated from the internal

service data by using the VLAN tags.

Figure 2-4 E-LAN Service Instance

2.5.1.3 E-Tree Service

The following describes the pattern of the E-Tree service provided by the FONST


instance of the E-Tree service provided by the FONST 5000 U series of products.

The E-Tree service is a multipoint-to-point, bidirectional convergence service.

E-Tree Service Scenario

A mobile carrier requires that services of each group users are aggregated and

transmitted to the 3G core network. Figure 2-5 shows the service scenario.

Version: A 2-13


Implementation of E-Tree Service Pattern

The FE services of the group users are accessed to nodes 1, 3, 5 and 9. The

FONST 5000 U series of products provide the E-Tree service to aggregate multiple

services between the group users and the RNCs to the 3G core network.

Figure 2-5 E-Tree Service Instance

2-14 Version: A


2.5.2 QoS Features

The following describes the QoS features of the FONST 5000 U series of products,

including the QoS overview, flow bandwidth control, service priority mapping, queue

buffer management, queue congestion scheduling, and ACL.

2.5.2.1 QoS Overview

The QoS refers to the performance when the data streams pass the network and is

used to provide end-to-end service quality assurance for users.

The QoS cannot improve the bandwidth. However, by properly allocating and

monitoring network resources, the QoS reduces the network delay and jitter to the

maximum extent, and ensures the quality of key services.

The indicators used for measuring the QoS are as follows:

u Service availability: the normal operating time of the services with quality

assured.

u Delay: the interval for sending and receiving of a data packet between two

reference points.

u Jitter: the variation in delay with which the packets from the same router reach

the Rx side.

u Throughput: the rate of sending data packets on the network and uses the

mean rate or peak rate.

u Packet loss rate: the highest rate of packet loss when the data packets are

transmitted on the network.

2.5.2.2 Flow Bandwidth Control

The FONST 5000 U series of products support the port-based flow bandwidth

control. By setting the PIR value, the user can limit the rate of input flow at a port on

the card panel.

For example, if the rate limit of a 10G port is set to 2G, the flow which is not larger

than 2G will pass through the port, whereas the flow which is greater than 2G will be

discarded.

Version: A 2-15


All tributary cards, except the 16TN1 and the 1TO3 cards, support the port-based

flow bandwidth control.

2.5.2.3 Service Priority Mapping

The FONST 5000 U series of products support the DiffServ and achieve the PHB

defined in the standard on the network, so that the network operators can assure

the QoS at different service quality levels for users.

When forwarding data, the FONST 5000 U series of products support the mapping

of the user priority and VLAN priority in the received packets to the PHB and the

mapping of the PHB in the sent packets to the VLAN priority.

The FONST 5000 U series of products support the PHB setting for the VPWS

channels and VPWS streams. An existing PHB and VLAN priority mapping table

can be used or a specific PHB service level can be appointed.

2.5.2.4 Queue Buffer Management

When network congestion occurs, the FONST 5000 U series of products use the

specific queue buffer management policies to ensure the QoS of high-priority

services.

The FONST 5000 U series of products support tail drop and WRED queue buffer

management policies.

u Trail drop

When the queue is filled to its maximum capacity, the newly arriving packets

are dropped until the queue has enough room to accept incoming traffic.

u WRED

Before the output buffer reaches the START threshold, no packet is dropped;

when the output buffer exceeds the END threshold, all packets are dropped;

when the output buffer is within two thresholds, the drop rate is a function of the

mean queue length.

2-16 Version: A


2.5.2.5 Queue Scheduling

When congestion occurs, the FONST 5000 U series of products use different queue

scheduling policies to ensure the QoS of high-level services.

The FONST 5000 U series of products support the following queue scheduling

modes:

u SP

Strict-priority queue scheduling: Packets in the queue are strictly scheduled

based on the priority. The packets in a queue with a lower priority can be sent

only after the queue with a higher priority is empty.

u WFQ

Weighted fair queue scheduling: The queues are scheduling fairly according to

the weight allocated to each queue. The queue with a higher priority is

allocated a larger weight and occupies higher bandwidth; the queue with a

lower priority is allocated a smaller weight and occupies lower bandwidth.

2.5.2.6 ACL

The ACL is used for stream recognition. A series of matching conditions are

configured to categorize packets, and therefore filtering the packets. The conditions

can be source addresses, destination addresses, and port numbers of the packets.

In the QoS policy, the ACL is only used to match packets. The actions (deny or permit)

in the ACL rules are ignored and not used as principles for discarding or forwarding

the packets.

2.5.3 OAM Features

The FONST 5000 U series of products support the access to the link OAM based on

the ITU-T Y.1731 Ethernet OAM and IEEE 802.3ah OAM to perform OAM on the

user side, perform quick fault detection to trigger protection switchover, and provide

carrier-level service QoS on the route switching network. Table 2-4 shows the OAM

standards supported by the FONST 5000 U series of products.

Version: A 2-17


Table 2-4 OAM Standards Supported by the FONST 5000 U Series of Products

Network Layer OAM Standard

Access link OAM IEEE 802.3ah

Ethernet OAM ITU-T Y.1731

2.5.3.1 OAM Overview

According to the network operation requirements, the network management is

classified into operation, administration, and maintenance, namely, OAM.

u Operation and administration: analyzing, predicting, planning, and configuring

network and services.

u Maintenance: testing the network and services, and performing fault

management.

The ITU-T defines the OAM function as follows:

u Monitoring performance and generating maintenance information, and

evaluating the network stability based on the information.

u Detecting the network fault by periodically querying and generating various

maintenance and alarm information.

u Ensuring normal network running by scheduling or switching to other entities to

bypass the failed entity.

u Transmitting the fault information to the management entity.

2.5.3.2 Access Link OAM

The access link OAM is an end-to-end OAM function specific to services and

supports the detection on Ethernet link quality across multiple NEs.

2.5.3.3 Ethernet OAM

The Ethernet OAM is a tool monitoring network problems and works on the data line

layer. The Ethernet OAM uses the OAM PDU periodically exchanged between

equipment sets to report the network status, so that the network manager can

effectively manage the network.

2-18 Version: A


The Ethernet OAM complies with the Y.1731 standard and supports the proactive

and on-demand fault management mechanisms, thereby achieving the Ethernet

continuity check, loopback detection, link tracing message, alarm indication alarm,

maintenance communication channel message, and remote defect indication.

2.6 Protection Capability

See Table 2-5 for the protection types supported by the FONST 5000 U series of

products.

Table 2-5 Protection Types Supported by the FONST 5000 U Series of Products

Protection Type Protection Name Description

Equipment-level

protection

1+1 protection for the NE

management cards

See 1+1 Protection for the NE

Management Card

M+N protection for the

cross-connect cards

See M+N Protection for the Cross-

connect Card

1+1 protection for the power

cardsSee 1+1 Protection for the Power Card

1+1 protection for the input

power supply

See 1+1 Protection for the Input Power

Supply

Network-level

protection

OCh 1+1 protection See OCh 1+1 Protection

OCh m:n protection See OCh m:n Protection

OCh Ring protection See OCh Ring Protection

ODUk 1+1 protection See ODUk 1+1 Protection

ODUk m:n protection See ODUk m:n Protection

ODUk Ring protection See ODUk Ring Protection

Optical channel 1+1

wavelength protection

See Optical Channel 1+1 Wavelength

Protection

Optical channel 1+1 route

protection

See Optical Channel 1+1 Route

Protection

1+1 optical multiplex section

protection

See 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section

Protection

Optical line 1:1 / 1+1

protectionSee Optical Line 1:1 / 1+1 Protection

Ethernet LAG protection See Ethernet LAG Protection

Network management information protectionSee Network Management Information

Protection

Version: A 2-19


2.7 Fault Isolation and Analysis

The following describes the fault isolation and analysis of the FONST 5000 U series

of products, including the integrated maintenance system, online EMS help, and

flexible OTN overhead configuration, which facilitates quick fault analysis and

isolation.

2.7.1 Integrated Maintenance

The IAMS is an intelligent maintenance system developed for the FONST 5000 U

series of products. The system is able to obtain alarm and performance data from

the OTNM2000, and implement the rapid and precise isolation of failure through a

certain algorithm, rule call and associative analysis. It can also make pre-warning

against the degradation trend of the system, so as to enhance the stability of

FONST 5000 U product network operations.

Based on the mechanism for generating FONST 5000 U product alarms and mutual

suppression between alarms, the system forms the alarm rule tree with source

alarm as the root and restrained alarms as nodes (or leaves). It can also flexibly add

or delete analysis rules to ensure the accuracy and effectiveness of alarm and

performance analysis.

2.7.2 Online EMS Help

The EMS provides an EMS help menu, with which users can make a quick search

of explanations, causes and troubleshooting procedures of each alarm and

performance code, and manage the alarms and performance events quickly and

accurately. In later versions, the help menu will provide associative analysis of each

alarm and performance event, management of common faults and case study to

make fault isolation and management simple and easy.

2.7.3 Flexible OTN Overhead Configuration

The FONST 5000 U series of products introduce abundant OTN overheads and are

equipped with a sound fault monitoring mechanism.

2-20 Version: A


Overview

Traditional WDM products can only depend on B1 and J0 bytes in SDH overheads

for segmented performance and fault monitoring. When a service channel is on

several WDM systems, it is difficult to isolate faults quickly and accurately. The

FONST 5000 U series of products introduce abundant OTN overheads and are

equipped with a sound fault monitoring mechanism.


u With the configuration of overheads of SM bytes (OTUk layer section

monitoring bytes), performance parameters and faults on electrical

regeneration sections can be monitored.

u With the configuration of overheads of PM bytes (ODUk layer channel

monitoring bytes), performance parameters and faults on end-to-end

wavelength channels can be monitored.

u The FONST 5000 U equipment provides six-level tandem connection

monitoring functions. Via reasonable planning and configuration of the TCMi (i

= 1 to 6) bytes at the ODUk layer, the FONST 5000 U equipment can realize

hierarchical and segmented management for multi-operator, multi-vendor,

multi-area and multi-subnetwork management systems.

Configuration and Application

u Examples of SM and PM overhead configurations

An engineering project involves three stations, that is, A, B, and C. Figure 2-6

shows the equipment type and service distribution of each station.

Figure 2-6 Network Diagram of the SM and PM Planning and Configuration Example

Version: A 2-21


Analyzing the service flow: Station B functions as the REG NE to implement the

feed-through between station A and station C. Therefore, the SM monitoring

connections between station A and station B and between station B and station

C are established for each wavelength service. See Figure 2-7 for the

configuration planning.

Figure 2-7 SM Configuration and Planning

In this example, 16 channels of services are added and dropped at stations A

and C. Therefore, PM connection for each wavelength service between

stations A and C needs to be set up. See Figure 2-8 for the configuration

planning.

Figure 2-8 PM Configuration and Planning

u Examples of TCMi overhead configurations

An engineering project involves six stations, which are A, B, C, D, E and F.

Figure 2-9 shows the equipment type, service distribution, location, and

equipment vendor of each station.

2-22 Version: A


Figure 2-9 Network Diagram of TCMi Configuration and Planning

Eight services from stations A to F pass the equipment from different operators

and vendors. With rational configuration of TCMi overheads, the hierarchical

and segmented fault management for eight channels of services can be

provided. Take the first channel of service as an example. The configuration

planning of its TCMi is shown in Figure 2-10. For the TCMi configuration

planning of other services, follow the instruction shown in this figure.

Figure 2-10 TCMi Configuration and Planning

Version: A 2-23


After the configuration shown in Figure 2-10 is completed, you can ascertain

whether faults occur in equipment of the same vendor (e.g., A, B or C, D or E, F)

according to the alarm and performance event indication of each TCM1, and

whether between equipment sets in the same area and of different vendors (e.

g., between stations B and C), or between equipment sets in different areas

and of different vendors (e.g., between stations D and E) according to the alarm

and performance event indication of each TCM2. In this way, the difficulties in

fault isolation when services cover multiple vendors / operators / areas can be

overcome.

2.7.4 Online Performance Monitoring

The FONST 5000 U series of products provide three types of online performance

monitoring modes, namely, EMS reading mode, built-in spectrum analysis unit mode,

and external analyzer mode.

Overview

The performance monitoring items under the aforesaid three modes based on

services and systems are shown in Table 2-6 and Table 2-7.

Table 2-6 Monitorable Performance Items of Services

ServiceMonitorable Performance

ItemService Remark

SDH/SONET B1 errorSTM-1/4/16/64/256 and

OC3/12/48/192/768

Can be

viewed via

the network

management

system

directly

OTN

SM-BIP8 errorOTU1, OTU2, OTU2e, OTU3

and OTU4TCMi-BIP8 error

PM-BIP8 error

Data

Statistics of various packets

received and transmitted

FE, GE, 10GE, 40GE and

100GE

SAN (Storage

Area Network)

ESCON, FICON, FC100/200/

400/800/1200

Video service DVB and HDTV

2-24 Version: A


Table 2-7 Monitorable Performance Items of Systems

Type Performance Item Remark

Optical transport

layer and optical

multiplex section

layer

Transmitting optical power

and receiving optical power

Can be viewed via the network

management system directly

Optical power, OSNR, and

wavelength value of each

wavelength

Obtained by using the built-in spectrum

analysis unit or the external meter

Performance

monitoring of

optical channel

layer signals

Input / output optical power,

laser temperature, bias

current, and cooling current

Obtained by checking the tributary

interface card and the line interface card

on the EMS

OTN electrical layer

signal detection

SM-BIP8 error code, TCMi-

BIP8 error code, PM-BIP8

error code, and FEC count

OTN electrical layer

signal detection

Transmitted / received flow,

total number of transmitted /

received packets, and

numbers of error and lost

transmitted / received

packets

SDH electrical layer

signal detection

Count of background errored

blocks, unavailable seconds

(UAS), errored second (ES),

severely errored second

(SES), and continuous

severely errored second


u EMS reading mode: The optical power of each key reference point of the

FONST 5000 U system, system performance, and service performance can be

directly read over the EMS. The query and statistics results are displayed in

tables and diagrams.

Version: A 2-25


u Built-in spectrum analysis unit mode: The built-in spectrum analysis unit

accesses the signals to be supervised of each key reference point of the

FONST 5000 U series of products. Meanwhile, the EMS monitors the spectrum

information of each signal in real time by using the built-in spectrum analysis

unit, including the input / output optical power per wavelength, optical signal-to-

noise ratio, and central wavelength value (or wavelength deviation), provides

graphical spectrum analysis function, and shows the service status of each

wavelength in real time.

u External spectrum analyzer mode: The product provides online monitoring

MON interface on the optical amplification card and the OSCAD card. Without

interrupting the services, the external spectrum analyzer obtains the

wavelength, optical signal-to-noise ratio, optical power, and channel flatness of

each optical channel.

2.8 Clock Features

The FONST 5000 U series of products support the physical-layer clock

synchronization mechanism, use the clock input/output interface to synchronize the

physical-layer clock, and support the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization protocol.

2.8.1 Physical-Layer Clock

The timing system of the FONST 5000 U series of products provides the SSM

processing function and can work in the locked, holdover and free running modes.

The timing source of the equipment can be an external synchronization timing

source, line timing source, and tributary timing source.

The tributary cards and line cards of the FONST 5000 U series of products both

support the clock extraction from the line.

2-26 Version: A


SSM Overview

The SSM is a key technology for the network to transmit the synchronous network

timing signal and is a necessary mean for ensuring a smooth timing link. In the

network, the network timing route can change at any time. The network unit is

required to use a higher intelligent system to determine whether the timing source is

applicable and whether to search for other appropriate timing sources to ensure that

low-level clocks only receive the timing from higher levels or the same level, and

avoid timing signal loop which may result in unstable synchronization.

Clock Working Mode

The clock has the following three working modes:

u Locked

This is the working mode in the normal state. In this mode, the equipment

automatically synchronizes with the selected clock source.

u Holdover

After the timing reference is invalid, the equipment enters the holdover mode,

uses the clock frequency stored before failure as the timing reference and

enables the oscillator to follow this stored value. This mode ensures a very

small frequency deviation between the clock frequency and the reference

frequency over a long period of time so as to keep the slip impairment within

the tolerance.

u Free running

When the clock reference is lost and the timing reference does not enter the

holdover mode, the internal oscillator of the equipment works in the free

running mode. This mode enables the internal oscillator to work with only a very

small deviation with the reference frequency over a long period of time and can

be used as the primary clock of the entire equipment. The corresponding clock

level standard is G.813.

Priority of the Synchronization Source

When the center control card works in the locked mode, it can select a

synchronization source according to the SSM value and priority to determine a

proper network synchronization signal.

Version: A 2-27


u When the QL enable is valid, the center control card processes the SSM

information and first selects the synchronization clock source according to the

sequence of the quality level (QL). When the QL values are the same, the clock

card then selects the synchronization clock source based on the priority.

u When the QL enable is disabled, the center control card does not process the

SSM information but selects the synchronization clock source only based on

the priority.

2.8.2 PTP Clock

The FONST 5000 U series of products support the IEEE 1588 V2 Ethernet clock

synchronization. The PTP clock complies with the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol. The

clocks of all nodes on the network are periodically synchronized by means of the

interaction of PTP protocol packets between clock nodes, so that the Ethernet-

based distributed system can reach the sub-microsecond level, and frequency

synchronization and time synchronization between network nodes are achieved.

In a distributed system, clocks and time are usually applied to the following

scenarios:

u Frequency-based application: It is mainly used in the scenario where multiple

control points of the distributed system need to be synchronized. Each control

point needs to adopt and execute control algorithm and control commands

simultaneously.

u Time stamp-based application: It is mainly used in the scenario where the

absolute time value needs to be measured. After time stamps are appended to

specific events, the sequence of the events can be determined.

The key technology to realize the preceding applications is time synchronization.

The purpose of time synchronization is to accurately and precisely transfer the

reference time to each control point.

A PTP clock system uses the master-slave hierarchy. The master clock sends the

PTP protocol messages to the slave clock, and the slave clock calculates its time

deviation from the master clock according to delay in receiving messages and other

relevant information. Afterwards, it adjusts itself to be synchronous with the master

clock.

2-28 Version: A


The highest-level clock GMC can exchange PTP protocol packets over each clock

node (ordinary clock, boundary clock and transparent clock) and transmit the clock

synchronization information to all clock nodes in the network.

PTP Clock Node

u Ordinary Clock (OC)

The OC clock node is an originating or a destination node in the network. Only

one PTP port of this clock node participates in time synchronization, and the

OC receives the synchronization time of the previous node via this port.

Besides, when the OC clock node works as the clock source, the

synchronization time can only be transmitted to the succeeding node via one

PTP port.

u Boundary Clock (BC)

The BC clock node has multiple PTP ports for time synchronization. One port

can receive the synchronization time from the previous node, and advertise the

synchronization clock to the succeeding node over the remaining ports. In

addition, when this clock node functions as a clock source, it can advertise the

synchronization time to the succeeding node over multiple PTP ports.

u Transparent Clock (TC)

The TC clock node has multiple PTP ports but it only forwards the PTP protocol

packets among the ports and performs forwarding delay rectification rather than

synchronizing the clock over any port. The TC includes the following two types:

4 E2ETC: directly forwards the non-P2P protocol packets in the network and

takes part in the calculation of the delay over the entire link.

4 P2PTC: directly forwards the Sync, Follow_Up, and Announce packets

only and terminates other PTP protocol packets, and takes part in the

calculation of delay on each segment of the link.

PTP Clock Port Status

Every port of the OC and BC maintains an independent PTP state machine that

defines the state allowed by ports and the conversion rules between states. A PTP

port may be at either of the following two states:

u MASTER: The port provides a clock source for the succeeding node.

Version: A 2-29


u SLAVE: The port is kept synchronized with the port in MASTER state on the

previous node.

PTP Master-slave Clock Hierarchy

The Master-Slave relationship between the clock nodes is relative. Every pair of

clock nodes that synchronize with each other has the following Master-Slave

relationship:

u The node which transmits the synchronization time is the master node, and the

node which receives the synchronization time is the slave node.

u The clock at the master node is the master clock, and the clock at the slave

node is the slave clock.

The optimum clock in the entire PTP system is GMC that has the best stability,

accuracy, and determinability. Each system has only one GMC and each subnet has

only one master clock. The slave clock is synchronous with the master clock. Each

system has only one GMC and each subnet has only one master clock. The slave

clock is synchronous with the master clock.

The optimum clock can be either specified manually in a static mode or be elected

by the clock algorithm BMC in a dynamic mode according to the clock precision,

level, and UTC on each node.

Figure 2-11 shows the process for establishing a master clock and a slave clock

between the OC and the BC in the PTP system.

Figure 2-11 PTP Master-slave Clock Hierarchy

2-30 Version: A


In Figure 2-11, OC1 is at the root of the hierarchy and is referred to as Grandmaster.

The Port 1 of BC1 is a SLAVE relative to the Grandmaster. All ports, except Port 1,

of BC1 are MASTERs relative to the clock equipment that is connected to the ports .

The Port 1 of BC2 is a SLAVE to the BC1. All ports except Port 1 of BC2 are

MASTERs relative to the clock equipment that is connected to these ports.

2.9 ASON Features

The product design fully considers the support of the ASON. By loading the control

plane, the ASON network based on the FONST 5000 U series of products can be

constructed, facilitating the smooth migration from the traditional wavelength

division network to the ASON network.

On setting up the ASON, FiberHome provides a full series of ASON products and

well-developed solutions. Please see ASON Solution for further information.

2.10 Intelligent Fan

The fan unit provides two working modes: intelligent and manual modes.

Overview

u Intelligent mode: The fan unit automatically adjusts the fan rotation speed

according to the change of the equipment temperature.

u Manual mode: The fan unit can work based on the rotational level set on the

EMS, including full speed, high speed, middle high speed, middle speed,

middle low speed, low speed, and ultra-low speed.

Warning:

The manual mode can be used to monitor the equipment temperature in

real time. Because the fan is fixed at a certain rotating speed choice, the

speed will not be not adjusted according to the feedback. In the normal

operations of the equipment, make sure that the fan unit is in the

intelligent mode.

Version: A 2-31



The fan unit adopts the soft-start mode to reduce the influence caused by the start

of the fan on the equipment. When the fan is in the intelligent mode, before the NE

management card controls the fan, the fan rotates at a medium rotational speed.

u After the NE management card controls the fan, the NE management card

periodically searches the temperature feedback information of each card,

compares the temperature feedback information with the preset fan rate control

parameters of each card, and determines the rotating speed choice information

of the fan.

u The fan unit controls the fan to rotate at the required rotating speed choice

according to the fan rotating speed choice information sent by the NE

management card, to ensure normal heat dissipation of the equipment.

u When the fan is faulty, the fan unit sends the fault information to the NE

management card and reports the alarm information about the fan fault to the

network management system.

2.11 PIC Features

The PIC cards of the FONST 5000 U series of products integrate ten 10 Gbit/s

electrical and optical transceiver functions and ten specific-wavelength optical

signal multiplexing and demultiplexing function and support the conversion from ten

10 Gbit/s electrical signals to one OTN multiplexing signal. Without the amplifier, the

transmission distance can also reach 40 km. The application scenarios of services

can be classified into 100 Gbit/s optical fiber system, 200 Gbit/s optical fiber system,

and 400 Gbit/s optical fiber system according to the optical fiber bandwidth.

2.11.1 System Model of the 100 Gbit/s Optical FiberBandwidth

Figure 2-12 is the system model of the 100 Gbit/s optical fiber bandwidth in the PIC

system.

2-32 Version: A


Figure 2-12 100G Optical Fiber Bandwidth System Model



system.

Version: A 2-33





system.

2-34 Version: A



Version: A 2-35


2.12 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s and 100 Gbit/sTransmission Solutions

The following describes the transmission solutions of the FONST 5000 U series of

products specific to different types and rates of services.

2.12.1 100 Gbit/s Transmission Technology

The FONST 5000 U series of products support the 48/96×100 Gbit/s transmission

solution. The FONST 5000 U series of products uses the advanced coherent

detection technology and does not require any dispersion compensation module for

CD and PMD compensation on a pure 100 Gbit/s coherent network. Figure 2-15

shows a typical application of the 100 Gbit/s transmission solution.

Figure 2-15 Typical Application of the 100 Gbit/s Transport Solution

The 100 Gbit/s coherent transmission solution of the FONST 5000 U series of

products provide unique technical benefits in terms of ultra-long-haul transmission,

network simplification, high-efficient bandwidth utilization, and smooth upgrade.

Ultra-long-haul Transmission

The ultra-long-haul transmission refers to the ultra-long distance transmission

without electrical regeneration (longer than 1000 km) and ultra-long single span

transmission (attenuation larger than 44 dB). The major factors limiting the ultra-long

distance and ultra-long span transmission include noise, dispersion, non-linear

effect, and PMD. The product uses the low-noise optical amplifying and PM-QPSK

technologies to achieve ultra-long-haul and ultra-long span transmission.

2-36 Version: A


u The large-gain and high-output power EDFA module can effectively increase

the transmit power per wavelength.

u The PM-QPSK new line code can decrease the limit on the 100 Gbit/s signal

transmission distance caused by the dispersion, PMD, and non-linear effect,

and achieve ultra-long-haul and ultra-long span transmission.

Network Simplification

The 100 Gbit/s coherent transmission solution adopted by the FONST 5000 U

series of products provides high PMD tolerance, which can simplify the network

structure and reduce network design and maintenance costs.

The PMD is an important factor limiting the 100 Gbit/s signal transmission distance.

Because the circular degree and internal stress of the optical fiber are not even, the

signal pulse spreading is distorted, resulting in the increase of error code rate with

continuous accumulation during the transmission.

Using the DP-QPSK coherent reception combined with the DSP technology

adopted by the FONST 5000 U series of products, the dispersion capacity can be

increased to ±55,000 ps/nm and the DGD tolerance can exceed 100 ps, which

completely eases the limits caused by the dispersion and PMD on the high-speed

transmission system.

High-Efficient Bandwidth Utilization


products supports the access of multiple services and rates. The ODUflex

technology ensures high-efficient utilization of the bandwidth and reduces the

transmission cost per bit.

u Multiple services and rates can be borne over the 100 Gbit/s transmission

channels.

u The ODUflex technology supports flexible bandwidth adjustment and

scheduling.

Version: A 2-37


Smooth Upgrade


products supports smooth upgrade from the traditional network to the coherent

network.

u The traditional network configured with DCM can be smoothly upgraded to the

100 Gbit/s coherent network without adjusting the DCM on the existing

network.

u The 100 Gbit/s coherent wavelength and the 10 Gbit/s or 40 Gbit/s wavelength

can be transmitted in a hybrid mode while satisfying the wavelength spacing

requirements.


The FONST 5000 U series of products support the 48 / 96 × 40 Gbit/s transmission

solution. Figure 2-16 shows a typical application of the 40 Gbit/s transmission

solution.


2-38 Version: A


The 40 Gbit/s transmission technology used by the FONST 5000 U series of

products has the following features:

u Two dispersion compensation modes:

4 Centralized dispersion compensation: The negative dispersion optical fiber

simultaneously compensates multiple channels, and a DCM is required.

4 Automatic dispersion compensation: The FEC count and line error code

rate on the receive end are collected to control the TDCM of each channel.

The dispersion compensation amount is automatically adjusted according

to the actual conditions of the optical fibers without extra DCM, thereby

greatly increasing the dispersion compensation precision and reducing the

maintenance work load and complexity.

u Coherent receiving and DSP technology: The dispersion tolerance capability is

increased to ±55000 ps/nm and the DGD tolerance exceeds 100 ps. In this way,

the optical fiber dispersion and PMD effect do not limit the high-speed, long-

haul transmission system.


The FONST 5000 U series of products support the 48 / 96 × 10 Gbit/s transmission

solution. Figure 2-17 shows a typical application of the 10 Gbit/s transmission

solution.


The 10 Gbit/s transmission technology adopted by the FONST 5000 U series of

products uses the centralized dispersion compensation. The negative dispersion

optical fiber simultaneously compensates multiple channels, and the DCM is

required.

Version: A 2-39


2.12.4 Multi-rate Hybrid Transmission

With increasing service requirements, the current 10 Gbit/s DWDM transport system

will be gradually upgraded to the 40 Gbit/s and the 100 Gbit/s transport system. The

40 Gbit/ s and 10 Gbit/s compatible hybrid transmission, coherent and incoherent

hybrid transmission are highly necessary. The FONST 5000 U series of products

support the 40 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s compatible hybrid transmission, coherent and

incoherent hybrid transmission, ensuring smooth system upgrade.

Incoherent Hybrid Transmission

The new and upgraded 40 Gbit/s wavelength can be accessed to the multiplexing

unit together with the 10 Gbit/s wavelength on the existing network and transmitted

over the same optical fiber, without affecting the existing and new services.

Figure 2-18 shows a typical application of the 40 Gbit/s and 100 Gbit/s compatible

hybrid transmission.

Figure 2-18 Hybrid Transmission of 40 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s Signals in the Non-coherent

System

Coherent Hybrid Transmission

The coherent wavelength can be accessed to the multiplexing unit together with the

incoherent wavelength on the existing network and transmitted over the same

optical fiber, without affecting the existing and new services.

Figure 2-19 shows an application of the incoherent and coherent wavelength hybrid

transmission.

2-40 Version: A


Figure 2-19 Hybrid Transmission of 100 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 10 Gbit/s Signals in the

Coherent System

2.13 Card Self-Booting

The self-booting refers to that the computer activates all components to complete

the operating system upload. The operating system performs more complex tasks

that cannot be performed by the self-booting code.

The FONST 5000 U series of products support the self-booting function. The

FONST 5000 U series of products support the self-booting function. When the NE

management card is in place and works properly and another card is inserted into

the equipment, the system can automatically detect the network block and NE to

which the new card belongs as well as the card name, and reports the information to

the OTNM2000, prompting the user to confirm the information and store the

detected configuration information. This function simplifies the management and

configuration process and facilitates the engineering activation commissioning and

subsequent maintenance.

2.14 Remote Upgrade

Remote login is one of the original services provided by the Internet to facilitate

remote computer operation by a user. The remote login has been widely applied to

the transport network such as SDH, MSTP, OTN, and PTN, and in particular, in

terms of large-scale engineering activation, equipment upgrade, and network

monitoring and maintenance.

Version: A 2-41


The FONST 5000 U series of products support the upgrade for hardware FPGA of

each card and BMU software over a remote computer, which facilitates the

engineering activation and maintenance, and meets the future system upgrade

requirements.

2-42 Version: A

3 Product Structure

The following describes the structure of the FONST 5000 U series of products,

including hardware structure and software architecture.

Hardware Structure

Software Architecture

Version: A 3-1


3.1 Hardware Structure

The hardware of the FONST 5000 U series of products includes the cabinet, the

PDP, the DCM, the subracks, and the cards. The following describes the

appearance, dimensions, and functions of each hardware component.

3.1.1 Cabinet (680 mm Deep)

Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of the cabinet (680 mm deep).

Figure 3-1 Appearance of the Cabinet (680 mm Deep)

3-2 Version: A

3 Product Structure

Table 3-1 shows the model of the cabinet (680 mm deep) used by the FONST 5000

U series of products.

Table 3-1 Specifications of Cabinet (680 mm Deep)

Cabinet Model Dimensions (H × W × D) (mm)

404000305 1600×600×680

404000306 2000×600×680

404000307 2200×600×680

404000308 2600×600×680

3.1.2 Cabinet (340 mm Deep)

Figure 3-2 shows the appearance of the cabinet (340 mm deep).

Version: A 3-3


Figure 3-2 Appearance of the Cabinet (340 mm Deep)

Table 3-2 shows the model of the cabinet (340 mm deep) used by the FONST 5000

U series of products.

Table 3-2 Specifications of Cabinet (340 mm Deep)

Cabinet Model Dimensions (H × W × D) (mm)

404000282 1600×600×340

404000283 2000×600×340

404000284 2200×600×340

404000285 2600×600×340

3-4 Version: A

3 Product Structure

3.1.3 PDP (3000064)

The following describes the appearance and functions of the PDP (3000064). The

PDP (3000064) model is 850A.

3.1.3.1 Function

The PDP (3000064) mainly performs the functions of power supply distribution,

alarm signal processing, lightning protection, and reverse polarity connection

protection. It inducts external power and distributes it among other electrified

equipment inside the cabinet. Meanwhile, the PDP receives the alarm signals from

other equipment inside the cabinet, and then displays and outputs the alarm signals.

The major functions of the PDP (3000064) are as follows:

u Power distribution: Inducts eight channels of -48V power (four active and four

standby) from the external (e.g., the power cabinet) and provides four sets of

redundant branch power rails (eight branch power rails total). The maximum

current of a branch power rail is 63A.

Note:

For details about the PDP (3000064) input and output current, refer to

PDP850A User Guide.

u Supports the reverse polarity connection protection function.

u Supports alarm signal processing: Receives alarm signals reported from the

corresponding equipment via the four alarm convergence connectors, provides

audio alarms for the signals, illuminates the cabinet-top indicator LEDs and

outputs alarm signals to the upper layer equipment (such as the head of row

cabinet).

u Supports the lightning protection module alarm report: When the lightning

protection module fails, the PDP outputs the lightning protection failure signals,

and reports them to the network management system via the equipment.

Version: A 3-5


u Supports the lightning protection: The PDP can effectively block the induced

lightning of 4 kV in the common mode (1.2/50 us to 8/20 us combination wave)

or of 2 kV in the differential mode (1.2/50 us to 8/20 us combination wave) on

the power cable.

3.1.3.2 Appearance

The PDP (3000064) is located on the top of the cabinet, and the appearance is as

shown in Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-3 Appearance of the PDP (3000064)

3.1.4 PDP (3000068)


PDP (3000068) model is 296B.

3-6 Version: A

3 Product Structure

3.1.4.1 Function

The PDP (3000068) mainly performs the functions of power supply distribution,

alarm signal processing, lightning protection, and reverse polarity connection

protection. It inducts external power and distributes it among other electrified

equipment inside the cabinet. Meanwhile, the PDP receives the alarm signals from

other equipment inside the cabinet, and then displays and outputs the alarm signals.

The major functions of the PDP are as follows:

u Power distribution: Inducts two channels of -48V power (one active and one

standby) from the external (e.g., the power cabinet) and provides three sets of

redundant branch power rails (six branch power rails total). The maximum


Note:


PDP296B User Guide.

u Supports the reverse polarity connection protection function.


corresponding equipment, provides audio alarms for the signals, illuminates the

cabinet-top indicator LEDs and outputs alarm signals to the upper layer

equipment (such as the head of row cabinet).

u Supports the lightning protection module alarm report function: When the

lightning protection module fails, the PDP outputs the lightning protection failure

signals, and reports them to the network management system via the

equipment.

u Performs the lightning protection function: The PDP can effectively block the

induced lightning of 4 kV in the common mode (1.2/50 us to 8/20 us

combination wave) or of 2 kV in the differential mode (1.2/50 us to 8/20 us

combination wave) on the power cable.

Version: A 3-7


3.1.4.2 Appearance




3.1.5 PDP (3000082)


PDP (3000082) model is 1063A.

3.1.5.1 Function

The PDP (3000082) mainly performs the functions of power supply distribution and

alarm signal processing. It inducts external power and distributes it among other

electrified equipment inside the cabinet. Meanwhile, the PDP receives the alarm

signals from other equipment inside the cabinet, and then displays and outputs the

alarm signals.

3-8 Version: A

3 Product Structure

The major functions of the PDP (3000082) are as follows:

u Power distribution: Inducts ten channels of -48V power (five active and five

standby) from the external (e.g., the power cabinet) and provides five sets of

redundant branch power rails (ten branch power rails total). The maximum


Note:


PDP1063A User Guide.


corresponding equipment via the five alarm convergence connectors, provides

audio alarms for the signals, illuminates the cabinet-top indicator LEDs and

outputs alarm signals to the upper layer equipment (such as the head of row

cabinet).

3.1.5.2 Appearance



Version: A 3-9



3.1.6 DCM

The DCM (Dispersion Compensation Module) can compensate the optical signal

dispersion accumulated during the transmission process in the fiber and compress

the optical pulse signal, so as to resume the optical signal. It is used together with

the optical amplification card to implement the long-haul optical regeneration

transmission.

The DCM is an external unit installed in the DCM slide rail. Each DCM slide rail can

house up to two DCMs, as shown in Figure 3-6.

3-10 Version: A

3 Product Structure

Figure 3-6 The DCM Slide Rail

The DCM slide rail is installed at the bottom of the cabinet.

3.1.7 Subrack

The subracks of the FONST 5000 U series of products include the FONST 5000

U60 / U60 2.0 / U40 / U30 / U20 / U10 subrack and the COTP subrack. The FONST

5000 U60 / U60 2.0 / U40 / U30 / U20 / U10 subracks provide the electrical-layer

cross-connect function and are used to accommodate various types of cards to

achieve signal exchange between cards over the subrack backplane. The COTP

subrack provides the optical layer cross-connect and WDM functions instead of

electrical layer cross-connect function.

3.1.7.1 FONST 5000 U60 Subrack

The following describes the appearance, slot distribution, and mapping relationship

between the slots and the cards of the FONST 5000 U60 subrack.

Version: A 3-11


Appearance

The FONST 5000 U60 subrack consists of the front part and the rear part of subrack

connected through the connection board. Figure 3-7 shows the appearance of the

FONST 5000 U60 subrack.

Note:

u Six fiber spools of the rear part of subrack are delivered with the

subrack as accessories. After the subrack is installed in the cabinet,

the six fiber spools should be installed on both sides of the rear part

of the subrack.

u Four handles are provided on both sides of the subrack as

accessories and are delivered with the subrack. The handles are

used to move and lift the subrack. After the subrack installation is

completed, the handles should be removed.

3-12 Version: A

3 Product Structure

Figure 3-7 Appearance of the FONST 5000 U60 Subrack

Components of the FONST 5000 U60 subrack are as follows:

Version: A 3-13


No. Name Main Function

(1) Card area

The card area is the principal part of the subrack and can house

all kinds of cards to implement various functions of the

equipment.

(2)Fiber passage

area

The fiber passage area is located below the card area of the

subrack. Each slot of the subrack corresponds to a wiring hole

in the fiber passage area. Optical fibers are led to the fiber

passage area through the corresponding wiring holes to keep

the equipment tidy and neat.

(3) Fan unitUsed for air cooling. Four fan units are configured for each

subrack.

(4) Anti-dust screen

Located at the bottom of the subrack, made up of a metal tray

and a low-density anti-dust screen. The anti-dust unit is secured

in the self latching mode and can be flexibly installed and

unplugged according to the requirements.

(5) Fiber spoolUsed to coil the redundant optical fibers and located at both

sides of the subrack.

(6)Subrack

handles

Used as the force bearing points of the subrack for moving or

lifting the subrack.

(7)Power cable

troughUsed to lay the power cables of the subrack.

(8)Connection

board

Used to connect the front part of subrack component with the

rear part of subrack component.

(9) Mounting ear Used to secure the subrack in the cabinet.

Slot Distribution

The FONST 5000 U60 subrack is a three-layer, double-sided subrack. Figure 3-8

shows the slot distribution.

3-14 Version: A

3 Product Structure

Figure 3-8 Slot Allocation of the FONST 5000 U60 Subrack

The types and quantity of cards supported by the slots in the subrack are as follows:

u Service card: 64

u Cross-connect card: 9

u Control card: 2

u Power card: 6

u Terminal board: 1

Mapping Relationships Between Cards and Slots

Table 3-3 shows the mapping relationship between the slots and cards of the


Version: A 3-15


Table 3-3 Mapping Relationship Between the Slots and Cards of the FONST 5000 U60

Subrack

Card Name Suitable Slot Remark

8TN1, 16TN1, 24TN1, 32TN1

4TN2, 8TN2, 10TN2, 12TN2, 20TN2,

10TP2, 20TP2

1TN3, 2TN3, 1TO3

1TN4, 2TN4

4LN2, 12LN2, 20LN2

1LN4 (single-slot)

10IL2

OSC

BMD2, BMD2P, BMD2PP

16 to 47

48 to 79Optional

1LN4 (double-slot), 2LN4

16 to 30

32 to 46

48 to 62

64 to 78

Optional. Each card occupies two slots.

UXU205 to 08

84 to 88Compulsory

CCU 01 to 02 Compulsory

PWR

00

11 to 12

80 to 81

91

Compulsory

Slots 11 and 12 are respectively responsible for

the active and standby power supply of the upper

part of the subrack.


the active and standby power supply of the

medium part of the subrack.


the active and standby power supply of the lower

part of the subrack.

AIF 03 Optional

3.1.7.2 FONST 5000 U60 2.0 Subrack


between the slots and the cards of the FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack.

3-16 Version: A

3 Product Structure

Appearance

The FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack consists of the front part and the rear part of

subrack connected through the connection board. Figure 3-9 shows the appearance

of the FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack.

Note:

u Four fiber spools of the rear part of subrack are delivered with the


the four fiber spools should be installed on both sides of the rear part

of the subrack.





Version: A 3-17


Figure 3-9 Appearance of the FONST 5000 U60 2.0 Subrack

Components of the FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack are as follows:


(1) Card area



equipment.

(2)Fiber passage

area






3-18 Version: A

3 Product Structure


(3) Fan unitUsed for air cooling. Eight fan units are configured for each

subrack.








(6)Subrack

handles



(7)Power cable

troughUsed to lay the power cables of the subrack.

(8)Connection

board




Slot Distribution

The FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack is a three-layer, double-sided subrack.

Figure 3-10 shows the slot distribution.

Figure 3-10 Slot Allocation of the FONST 5000 U60 2.0 Subrack

Version: A 3-19



u Service card: 64


u Control card: 2

u Power card: 16

u Terminal board: 1

Mapping Relationships Between Cards and Slots

Table 3-4 shows the mapping relationships between slots and cards.

Table 3-4 Mapping Relationship Between the Slots and Cards of the FONST 5000 U60 2.0

Subrack


8TN1, 16TN1, 24TN1, 32TN1

4TN2, 8TN2, 10TN2, 12TN2, 20TN2,

10TP2, 20TP2

1TN3, 2TN3, 1TO3

1TN4, 2TN4

4LN2, 12LN2, 20LN2

1LN4 (single-slot)

10IL2

OSC

BMD2, BMD2P, BMD2PP

16 to 47

48 to 79Optional


16 to 30

32 to 46

48 to 62

64 to 78


UXU205 to 08

84 to 88Compulsory


PWR1 to 8

9 to 16Compulsory

AIF 03 Optional

3-20 Version: A

3 Product Structure




Appearance

The FONST 5000 U40 subrack consists of the front part and the rear part of subrack

connected through the connection board. Figure 3-11 shows the appearance of the


Note:

u Four fiber spools of the rear part of subrack are delivered with the


the four fiber spools should be installed on both sides of the rear part

of the subrack.





Version: A 3-21





(1)Power supply

card area

The power supply card area is dedicated for the power supply

cards to supply power for the equipment.

(2) Card area



equipment.

3-22 Version: A

3 Product Structure


(3)Fiber passage

area






(4) Fan unitUsed for air cooling. Four fan units are configured for each

subrack.








(7)Subrack

handles



(8)Connection

board




Slot Distribution

The FONST 5000 U40 subrack is a double-layer, double-sided subrack and

provides 80 card slots. Figure 3-12 shows the slot distribution.

Version: A 3-23




u Service card: 52


u Control card: 2

u Power card: 16

u Terminal board: 2

Mapping Relationship Between Slots and Cards



3-24 Version: A

3 Product Structure

Table 3-5 Mapping Relationship Between the Slots and Cards of the FONST 5000 U40

Subrack


8TN1, 16TN1, 24TN1, 32TN1

4TN2, 8TN2, 10TN2, 12TN2, 20TN2,

10TP2, 20TP2

1TN3, 2TN3, 1TO3

1TN4, 2TN4

4LN2, 12LN2, 20LN2

1LN4 (single-slot)

10IL2

OSC

BMD2, BMD2P, BMD2PP

01 to 52 Optional


1 to 5

7 to 11

13 to 25

27 to 31

33 to 37

39 to 51


UXU2 57 to 64 Compulsory


AIF 53 to 54 Optional

PWRDedicated slot of

the power cardCompulsory




Appearance

Figure 3-13 shows the appearance of the FONST 5000 U30 subrack.

Version: A 3-25




3-26 Version: A

3 Product Structure


(1)Power supply

card area



(2) Card area



equipment.

(3)Fiber passage

area






(4) Fan unitUsed for air cooling. Three fan units are configured for each

subrack.








(7)Subrack

handles




Slot Distribution

The FONST 5000 U30 subrack is a three-layer, single-sided subrack and provides

56 card slots. Figure 3-14 shows the slot distribution.

Version: A 3-27



The types and quantity of cards supported by the slots in the FONST 5000 U30

subrack are as follows:

u Service card: 40


u Control card: 2

u Power card: 8

u Terminal board: 2




3-28 Version: A

3 Product Structure

Table 3-6 Mapping Relationship between the Slots and Cards of the FONST 5000 U30

Subrack


8TN1, 16TN1, 24TN1, 32TN1

4TN2, 8TN2, 10TN2, 12TN2, 20TN2,

10TP2, 20TP2

1TN3, 2TN3, 1TO3

1TN4, 2TN4

4LN2, 12LN2, 20LN2

1LN4 (single-slot)

10IL2

OSC

BMD2, BMD2P, BMD2PP

01 to 40 Optional


01 to 15

17 to 19

21 to 23

25 to 39






AIF1, AIF2Dedicated slot for

the terminal boardOptional




Appearance


Version: A 3-29





(1)Power supply

card area



(2) Card area



equipment.

(3)Fiber passage

area






3-30 Version: A

3 Product Structure


(4) Fan unitUsed for air cooling. Two fan units are configured for each

subrack.









Slot Distribution

The FONST 5000 U20 subrack is a double-layer, single-sided subrack and provides



The types and quantity of cards supported by the slots in the FONST 5000 U20

subrack are as follows:

u Service card: 26


u Control card: 2

Version: A 3-31


u Power card: 8

u Terminal board: 2





Subrack


8TN1, 16TN1, 24TN1, 32TN1

4TN2, 8TN2, 10TN2, 12TN2, 20TN2, 10TP2,

20TP2

1TN3, 2TN3, 1TO3

1TN4, 2TN4

4LN2, 12LN2, 20LN2

1LN4 (single-slot)

10IL2

OSC

BMD2, BMD2P, BMD2PP

01 to 26 Optional


01 to 05

07 to 11

13 to 25






AIF1, AIF2Dedicated slot for

the terminal boardOptional




Appearance


3-32 Version: A

3 Product Structure




(1) Card area



equipment.

(2)Fiber passage

area






(3) Fan unitUsed for air cooling. One fan unit is configured for each

subrack.









Version: A 3-33


Slot Distribution

The FONST 5000 U10 subrack is a single-layer, single-sided subrack and provides




u Service card: 12


u Control card: 2

u Power card: 2




3-34 Version: A

3 Product Structure


Subrack


8TN1, 16TN1, 24TN1, 32TN1

4TN2, 8TN2, 10TN2, 12TN2, 10TP2

1TN3, 2TN3, 1TO3

1TN4

4LN2, 12LN2, 20LN2

1LN4 (single-slot)

10IL2

OSC

BMD2, BMD2P, BMD2PP

01 to 12 Optional

1LN4 (double-slot)01 to 05

07 to 11Optional. Each card occupies two slots.





3.1.7.7 COTP (3030036) Subrack


between the slot and the card of the COTP (3030036) subrack.

Appearance

Figure 3-19 shows the appearance of the COTP (3030036) subrack.

Version: A 3-35


Figure 3-19 Appearance of the COTP (3030036) Subrack

Components of the COTP (3030036) subrack are as follows:

Number Name Main Function

(1) Fan unitUsed for air cooling of the equipment and is at the top part of

the subrack’s card area.



(3) Card area



equipment.

(4)Fiber passage

area







The anti-dust screen is at the bottom of the subrack and uses

the metal slide rail and low-density anti-dust screen. The anti-

dust unit is secured in the self latching mode and can be flexibly

installed and unplugged according to the requirements.


3-36 Version: A

3 Product Structure

Slot Distribution

The COTP (3030036) subrack is a single-layer, single-sided subrack and provides


Figure 3-20 Slot Allocation of the COTP (3030036) Subrack


u Optical service card: 13

u NE management card: 2

u Power card: 2


Table 3-9 shows the mapping relationship between the slots and cards of the COTP

(3030036) subrack.

Version: A 3-37


Table 3-9 Mapping Relationship between the Slots and Cards of the COTP (3030036)

Subrack


MST2, OTU2E, OTU2F, OTU2S,

2OTU2S

OMU2/4/8, ODU2/4/8, WDM2

PA, OA (with the saturated output

less than 21 dBm), OMSP, OCP,

ITL50, OSCAD, OPM4 and OPM8

01 to 14 Optional.

OTU3E, OTU3S, OTU3S

(coherent)

OTU4E, OTU4S

OMU40 / 48_O

OMU40 / 48_E

VMU40 / 48_O

VMU40 / 48_E

ODU40 / 48_O

ODU40 / 48_E

WSS8M, WSS8D

WSS8M, WSS8D, and OA (with

the saturated output 21 dBm and

above)

01 to 13 Optional. Each card occupies two slots.

OTU3F, OTU4F, OTU3E

(coherent)01 to 12

Optional. Each card occupies three

slots.

OLP 06, 07 Optional.

OSC, EOSC 02 Compulsory

EMU 00, 01

Each NE requires at least one EMU

card. The two slots back up each other.

Compulsory for the main subrack.

FCU 00 Compulsory for the extended subrack.

Select either the EFCU card or the FCU

card according to whether DCC

function is supported. The EFCU card

must be selected when the equipment

is equipped with the Control Plane unit.

EFCU 00, 01

PWR 15 Compulsory.

AIF 14 Optional.

3-38 Version: A

3 Product Structure

3.1.7.8 COTP (3030105) Subrack


between the slot and the card of the COTP (3030105) subrack.

Appearance

Figure 3-21 shows the appearance of the COTP (3030105) subrack.

(1) Fiber spool (2) Mounting ear (3) Fan unit

(4) Anti-dust screen (5) Fiber passage area (6) Card area

Figure 3-21 Appearance of the COTP (3030105) Subrack

Table 3-10 describes the components of the COTP (3030105) subrack.

Table 3-10 Descriptions of Components of the COTP (3030105) Subrack

No.Component

NameFunction

(1) Fiber spoolUsed to coil the redundant optical fibers and located at both sides

of the subrack.


Version: A 3-39


Table 3-10 Descriptions of Components of the COTP (3030105) Subrack (Continued)

No.Component

NameFunction

(3) Fan unitUsed for air cooling of the equipment and is at the top part of the

subrack’s card area.

(4)Anti-dust

screen

Located at the bottom of the subrack, made up of a metal tray and

a low-density anti-dust screen. It can be secured by self-locking

and be unplugged from the subrack along the slide rails.

(5)Fiber passage

area


subrack. Each slot of the subrack corresponds to a wiring hole in

the fiber passage area. Optical fibers are led to the fiber passage

area through the corresponding wiring holes to keep the equipment

tidy and neat.

(6) Card areaIt is the principal part of a subrack for containing various cards to

implement different functions of the equipment.

Slot Distribution

See COTP (3030036) Subrack for the slot distribution.


See COTP (3030036) Subrack for the mapping relationship between slots and

cards.

3.1.8 Equipment Layout

The following introduces the equipment layout of the FONST 5000 U series of

products.

3.1.8.1 FONST 5000 U60

When assembling subracks in a cabinet, comply with the following requirements

during layout planning.

u The empty parts in the figure below are reserved for air cooling, and should not

be occupied.

3-40 Version: A

3 Product Structure

u Ensure that the environment temperature is lower than 40℃ on a long term

basis, and should not exceed 45℃ in a short term.

u Install subracks from the top down.

Figure 3-22 Equipment Layout of the FONST 5000 U60

3.1.8.2 FONST 5000 U60 2.0




be occupied.




Version: A 3-41


Figure 3-23 Equipment Layout of the FONST 5000 U60 2.0

3.1.8.3 FONST 5000 U40




be occupied.




3-42 Version: A

3 Product Structure


3.1.8.4 FONST 5000 U30




be occupied.




Version: A 3-43



3.1.8.5 FONST 5000 U20




be occupied.




3-44 Version: A

3 Product Structure


3.1.8.6 FONST 5000 U10



u The Empty parts in the figure below are reserved for air cooling, and should not

be occupied.




u In the 2600 B layout, up to two 20A COTP (3030105) subracks can be

configured. Make sure that the ambient temperature should not exceed 40℃.

u When the 2200 mm cabinet is installed with a U10 subrack and one or two

COTP (3030105) subracks, refer to the 2200 A layout. If only one U10 is

installed, select position 1. If only one U10 and one COTP subrack are installed,

select position 1 and position 2. Make sure that the ambient temperature should

not exceed 40℃.

Version: A 3-45


u When the 2200 mm cabinet is installed with two or three U10 subracks, refer to

the 2200 B layout. Make sure that the ambient temperature should not exceed

40℃. If only two U10 subracks are installed, select position 2 and position 3.

u When the 2200 mm cabinet is installed with one U10 subrack and one or two

COTP (3030036) subracks, refer to the 2200 C layout. If only one U10 is

installed, select position 1. If only one U10 and one COTP subrack are installed,

select position 1 and position 2. Only one alarm cable is equipped for the

cabinet.


3.1.8.7 COTP




be occupied.




u Install COTP subracks according to sequence number.

3-46 Version: A

3 Product Structure

u In the 2600 B layout, when the COTP subrack-2 is configured with 100G cards,

make sure the ambient temperature should not exceed 40℃; when the COTP

subrack-1 is configured with 100G cards, make sure the ambient temperature

should not exceed 35℃.

Figure 3-28 Equipment Layout of the COTP

3.1.9 Card Overview

The following describes the naming rules, appearance, classification, and

positioning in the system of the service cards for the FONST 5000 U series of

products.

3.1.9.1 Naming Rules of the Service Cards

The electrical layer service cards for the FONST 5000 U series of products are

classified into the tributary interface cards and the line interface cards. These cards

vary from each other in interface quantities, interface rates and functions.

Figure 3-29 shows the naming rules of the electrical layer service cards.

Version: A 3-47


Figure 3-29 Naming Rules of the Electrical Layer Cards

Figure 3-30 shows an example name of a tributary interface card.

Figure 3-30 Example of Tributary Interface Card Names

Figure 3-31 shows an example name of a line interface card.

Figure 3-31 Example of Line Interface Card Names

The 10IL2 card is a PIC function card. The naming rules are slightly different, as


3-48 Version: A

3 Product Structure

Figure 3-32 Example of the 10IL2 Card Name

3.1.9.2 Card Appearance

Components of the cards are basically the same. Figure 3-33 shows the major

components and dimensions of the cards using the 10TP2 card as an example

(unit: mm). See the dimensions of the service cards, optical layer cards and the

management and auxiliary cards in the following tables.

Version: A 3-49


(1) Card bar code (2) Optical module (3) Card panel (4) Latch

(5) Circuit board (6) Connector (7) Indicator LED (8) Optical interface

(9) Laser class

identifier

(10) Card abbreviation

Figure 3-33 Card Appearance

See Table 3-11 for the card appearance and dimensions of the service cards.

3-50 Version: A

3 Product Structure

Table 3-11 Card Appearance and Dimensions of the Service Cards

Card Appearance Corresponding CardOccu-

pied Slot

Panel

Dimensions (H ×

W) (mm)

8TN1, 16TN1, 24TN1, 32TN1

4TN2, 8TN2, 10TN2, 12TN2,

20TN2, 10TP2, 20TP2

1TN3, 2TN3, 1TO3

1TN4, 2TN4

4LN2, 12LN2, 20LN2

1LN4 (single-slot)

10IL2

BMD2, BMD2P, BMD2PP

AIF1, AIF2 (U40)

OSC (U60/U60 2.

0/U40/U30/U20/U10)

1 407×30

1LN4 (double-slot), 2LN4 2 407×60

UXU2 (U40/U30/U20/U10) 1 352×30

Version: A 3-51


Table 3-11 Card Appearance and Dimensions of the Service Cards (Continued)


pied Slot

Panel

Dimensions (H ×

W) (mm)

UXU2 (U60/U60 2.0) 1 352×55

MST2, OTU2E, OTU2F, OTU2S,

2OTU2S

OMU2/4/8, ODU2/4/8, WDM2

OPM4, OPM8

OSC (036/105), EOSC

ITL50, OSCAD

OANote 1, PA

OCP, OMSP, OLP (1:1), OLP (1

+1)

EMU, FCU, EFCU

AIF (036/105)

1 368×30

OTU3E, OTU3S, OTU3S

(coherent)

OTU4E, OTU4S

OMU40 / 48_O

OMU40 / 48_E

VMU40 / 48_O

VMU40 / 48_E

ODU40 / 48_O

ODU40 / 48_E

WSS8M, WSS8D

OANote 1

2 368×60

3-52 Version: A

3 Product Structure



pied Slot

Panel

Dimensions (H ×

W) (mm)

OTU3F, OTU4F, OTU3E

(coherent)3 368×90

CCU

AIF (U60/U60 2.0)1 307×27.5

PWR (U60) 1 247×30

Version: A 3-53




pied Slot

Panel

Dimensions (H ×

W) (mm)

PWR (U60 2.0) 1 112×30

PWR (U40/U30/U20/U10) 1 90×30

PWR (036) 1 190×30

PWR (105) 1 164×30

3-54 Version: A

3 Product Structure



pied Slot

Panel

Dimensions (H ×

W) (mm)

AIF1, AIF2 (U30/U20) 1 90.5×30

Note 1: The OA card whose saturated output power is not higher than 21 dBm occupies one

slot. The OA card whose saturated output power is higher than 21dBm occupies two

slots.

3.1.9.3 Card Classification

Based on the functions, the cards are classified into electrical layer cards, optical

layer cards, PIC cards, and system connection and management cards. The

electrical layer cards and optical layer cards can also be further classified, as shown

in Table 3-12.

Table 3-12 Card Classification

Type Corresponding Card

Electrical

layer cards

Tributary interface unit

8TN1, 16TN1, 24TN1, 32TN1

4TN2, 8TN2, 10TN2, 12TN2, 20TN2,

10TP2, 20TP2

1TN3, 2TN3, 1TO3

1TN4, 2TN4

Electrical cross-connect unit UXU2

Line interface unit4LN2, 12LN2, 20LN2

1LN4, 2LN4

Optical transponder unit

MST2, OTU2E, OTU2S, 2OTU2S,

OTU2F, OTU3E, OTU3E(coherent),

TU3S, OTU3S (coherent), TU3F,

OTU4E, OTU4S, OTU4F

Optical layer

cards

Optical

multiplexing

/

demultiplex-

ing unit

OMU seriesOMU48_O, OMU48_E, OMU40_O,

OMU40_E, OMU2, OMU4, OMU8

VMU seriesVMU48_O, VMU48_E, VMU40_O,

VMU40_E

Version: A 3-55


Table 3-12 Card Classification (Continued)

Type Corresponding Card

ODU seriesODU48_O, ODU48_E, ODU40_O,

ODU40_E, ODU2, ODU4, ODU8

Others ITL50, OSCAD

Dynamic optical add / drop

multiplexing unitWSS8M, WSS8D

Optical amplification unit OA, PA

Optical protection unit OLP, OCP, OMSP

Optical spectrum analysis unit OPM4, OPM8

Optical supervisory channel unit OSC, EOSC

PIC cardsPIC electrical layer card 10IL2

PIC optical layer card BMD2, BMD2P, BMD2PP

System connection and management unitCCU, EMU, FCU, EFCU, AIF, AIF1,

AIF2, PWR

3.1.9.4 Positioning of Cards in the System

The following describes the positioning of common cards in the OTN and PIC

systems.

OTN System

Figure 3-34 shows the positioning of the common cards in the OTN system.

Figure 3-34 Positioning of Common Cards in the OTN System

3-56 Version: A

3 Product Structure

PIC System

Figure 3-35 shows the positioning of the common cards in the PIC system.

Figure 3-35 Positioning of Common Cards in the PIC System

3.1.10 Tributary Interface Unit

See Positioning of Cards in the System for the application and position in the

system of the line interface unit.

This card mainly performs O / E conversion on the signals from the client side and

sends the converted signals to the cross-connect card for cross-connecting.

Meanwhile, the process reverse to the aforesaid process is implemented.

Version: A 3-57


3.1.11 Electrical Cross-connect Unit

Positioning of Cards in the System shows the application and positioning of the

electrical cross-connect card in the system. The UXU2 card provides the following

functions:

u Supports the cross-connection of the ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and flex) signals

and the switching of the Ethernet data packets.

u Performs the signal cross-connection function between lines, between the line

and the tributary, and between tributaries.

u Supports the card protection function, automatic or manual switchover, and

configuration of a proper number of cross-connect cards according to service

capacity requirements.

3.1.12 Line Interface Unit

See Positioning of Cards in the System for the application and position in the

system of the line interface unit.

This card aggregates or converts multiple electrical signals from the cross-connect

card and outputs one or multiple OTU2, OTU2e, OTU3, OTU3e, and ODU4 optical

signal(s) with DWDM standard-compliant wavelength, and sends the optical signal(s)

to the optical multiplexing card or the optical add / drop and multiplexing card for

wavelength division multiplexing; meanwhile, the process reverse to the aforesaid

process is implemented.

3.1.13 PIC Unit

The PIC unit includes the PIC electrical layer cards and PIC optical layer cards. The

electrical layer cards include the 10IL2 cards, and the optical layer cards include the

BMD2, BMD2P, and BMD2PP cards. The PIC unit is applicable to stations with a

small amount of traffic. Positioning of Cards in the System shows the application

and positioning of the PIC unit in the system.

Table 3-13 describes the main functions of the PIC unit.

3-58 Version: A

3 Product Structure

Table 3-13 Main Functions of the PIC Unit

Card Type Card Name Function

Electrical layer

cards10IL2

u Supports encapsulation of electrical layer

service signals and multiplexing of ten signals

with specific wavelength.

u Supports the hybrid transmission of the OTU2 /

OTU2e services.

u Supports processing of the OTU2 / OTU2e

overheads and the ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, and flex)

overheads.

u Supports the loopback of the ODUk signal and

10GE signal at each level.

Optical layer

cards

BMD2 u Multiplexes two signals and implements the

reverse process of the conversion.

u Achieves the multiplexing and demultiplexing of

the main optical channel (1550 nm) and optical

supervisory channel (1510 nm) signals.

u Provides one built-in PA amplification module

through each BMD2P.

u Provides two built-in PA amplification modules

through each BMD2PP.

BMD2P

BMD2PP

3.1.14 Optical Transponder Unit

See Positioning of Cards in the System for the application of the optical transponder

cards and their positions in the system.

These cards access one or multiple client-side signals. After performing O / E

conversion, they aggregate or convert the signals to output OTU2, OTU3 or OTU4

signals of DWDM standard compliant wavelengths. In this way, they help the

multiplexing and the add / drop multiplexing cards to perform wavelength division

multiplexing (TXOTU) on signals of different wavelengths. And they can perform the

reverse process (RXOTU). In the whole process, the signals are transmitted

transparently.

Version: A 3-59


3.1.15 Optical Multiplexing and Demultiplexing Unit

The main function of the optical multiplexing / demultiplexing card is to multiplex or

demultiplex optical signals of different wavelengths. Before discussing the specific

functions of the cards, we should know the multiplexing / demultiplexing architecture

of the system.

Figure 3-36shows the unidirectional multiplexing / demultiplexing architecture of a

96-channel system. At the local end, multiplexing cards for CE and CO bands

multiplex the corresponding even channels and odd channels (48 channels in total)

of signals with 100 GHz channel-spacing, and signals outputted by multiplexing

cards for CE and CO bands are multiplexed by the ITL50 card and outputted as 96

multiplexed signals with 50 GHz channel-spacing. These signals, after being

amplified by the OA card, are multiplexed and transmitted to the opposite end by the

OSCAD card.

At the opposite end, the OSCAD card demultiplexes the main channel optical

signals and local supervisory signals, and transmits the latter to the OSC card for

processing. The main channel signals, i.e. 96 multiplexed signals of two bands with

50 GHz channel-spacing, are transmitted to the PA card for amplifying. After that,

they are demultiplexed into a CO band signal and a CE band signal by the ITL50

card. The two signals are transmitted to demultiplexing cards of the corresponding

bands for demultiplexing.

Figure 3-36 Multiplexing and Demultiplexing Architecture of a 96-channel System

The following is intended to introduce functions of this type of cards.

3-60 Version: A

3 Product Structure

OMU Series, VMU Series, and ODU Series

See Table 3-14 for cards included in OMU series, VMU series, and ODU series and

their functions.

Table 3-14 Functions of OMU Series, VMU Series, ODU Series Cards

Series Card Name FunctionOperating

Band

Channel

Spacing

OMU series

OMU48_O Multiplexes 48 wavelength-specific

optical signals into one multiple-

wavelength signal.

CO band

100GHz

OMU48_E CE band

OMU40_O Multiplexes 40 wavelength-specific

optical signals into a multiple-

wavelength signal.

CO band

OMU40_E CE band

OMU2

Multiplexes 2 single wavelength /

wavelength group optical signals

into a multiple-wavelength signal.

C band -OMU4




OMU8




VMU series

VMU48_O

Multiplexes 48 wavelength-specific


wavelength signal.

CO band

100GHz

VMU48_EPerforms the channel power

adjustment function.CE band

VMU40_O

Multiplexes 40 wavelength-specific


wavelength signal.

CO band

VMU40_EPerforms the channel power

adjustment function.CE band

ODU series

ODU48_O Demultiplexes a multiple-

wavelength optical signal into 48

wavelength-specific optical

signals.

CO band

100GHz

ODU48_E CE band

ODU40_O Demultiplexes a multiple-

wavelength optical signal into 40


signals.

CO band

ODU40_E CE band

Version: A 3-61


Table 3-14 Functions of OMU Series, VMU Series, ODU Series Cards (Continued)

Series Card Name FunctionOperating

Band

Channel

Spacing

ODU2

Demultiplexes one multiple-

wavelength optical signal into two


signals. (Only for optical splitting)

C band -ODU4


wavelength optical signal into four



ODU8


wavelength optical signal into eight



The ITL50 Card

When the FONST 5000 U Series is configured as an 80-channel or 96-channel

system, the ITL50 card should be applied to the channel spacing conversion

between 100 GHz and 50GHz as shown in Figure 3-36.

In the transmission direction, the comb filter multiplexes two signals (with 100 GHz

channel-spacing) output by the CO-band and CE-band multiplexing cards into a CO +

CE-band signal with 50 GHz channel-spacing, and sends the signal to the

amplification card.

In the receiving direction, the comb filter demultiplexes a CO + CE-band signal with

50 GHz channel spacing into CO and CE signals and sends them respectively to the

demultiplexing cards of the corresponding band.

The OSCAD Card

The OSCAD card mainly multiplexes and demultiplexes the main channel optical

signal and optical channel supervisory signal, and provides line input / output signal

monitoring ports. It can monitor the spectrum performance of the line input / output

optical signal without interrupting services. The application and position in the

system is shown in Figure 3-36.

3-62 Version: A

3 Product Structure

3.1.16 Dynamic Optical Add / Drop Multiplexer Unit

The WSS8M and the WSS8D cards provide the dynamic optical add and drop

multiplexing function and can add and drop any single-wavelength or wavelength

group signals from the multiplexed optical signals according to the configuration on

the EMS, and send the signals to the line card or the demultiplexing card.

Meanwhile, the cards can multiplex any single-wavelength or wavelength group

signals from the line card or the multiplexing card and support optical power

adjustment for each channel over the EMS.

Table 3-15 describes the functions of the cards.

Table 3-15 Functions of the WSS8M / WSS8D Cards

Card Name Function

WSS8M

Provides dynamic reconfigurable adding and fixed dropping functions:

Multiplexes signals of any wavelength or wavelength groups from nine

adding ports and outputs the multiplexed signal to the line; cooperates

with demultiplexer cards to drop locally line input signals; supports 50

GHz channel spacing.

WSS8D

Provides dynamic reconfigurable dropping and fixed adding functions:

Drops any single wavelength signal or wavelength group signal from the

line signal to any one of the nine dropping ports via the network

management system; cooperates with multiplexer cards to multiplex

signals from the local and other line directions and send the multiplexed

signal to the line; supports 50 GHz channel interval.

Note 1: See ROADM and Application of ROADM for specific application of each card listed in

the table.

3.1.17 Optical Amplification Unit

The optical amplification unit mainly amplifies the power of the line optical signals to

extend the transmission distance of the optical signals. The difference between the

OA and PA cards lies in the amplifier modules and application scenarios.

Figure 3-37 describes the applications of each card in the system.

Version: A 3-63


Figure 3-37 Application of the OA and PA Cards in the System

3.1.18 Optical Protection Unit

The optical protection unit mainly provides the network self-healing protection

function at the optical layer, as shown in Table 3-16.

Table 3-16 Functions of the Optical Protection Unit Cards

Card Name Function Protection Layer

OCP

Supports two optical channel 1+1

protection groups, and provides

optical channel wavelength and

optical channel route protection

based on the card position; the

protection mode is dual-feeding

and selectively-receiving.

Channel layer

OMSP

Mainly applied to the optical lines

with high reliability requirement,

provides 1+1 protection for the

optical multiplex section layer, and

uses the dual-feeding and

selectively-receiving protection

mode.

Multiplex section layer (between

the multiplexing card of the local

NE and the demultiplexing card of

the opposite end NE)

OLP

The OLP (1+1) card provides the 1

+1 protection for the optical lines

and implements the protection by

using the protection switchover

protocol.

Line section (between the optical

amplification cards of two NEs)

3-64 Version: A

3 Product Structure

Table 3-16 Functions of the Optical Protection Unit Cards (Continued)

Card Name Function Protection Layer

The OLP (1:1) card provides the

1:1 protection for the optical lines

and implements the protection by

using the protection switchover

protocol.

Note 1: For details, see Optical Channel 1+1 Wavelength Protection, Optical Channel 1+1

Route Protection, 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection, and Optical Line 1:1 / 1+1

Protection.

3.1.19 Optical Spectrum Analysis Unit

The optical spectrum analysis unit includes the OPM4 and OPM8 cards, which have

the basically same functions. The OPM4 and OPM8 cards can receive the signals to

be supervised and monitor the wavelength quantity, central wavelength, optical

power, and optical signal-to-noise ratio of each signal over the EMS in the online

mode. The two cards can also cooperate with the VMU series of cards to achieve

the automatic optical channel power equalization function.

The difference between the OPM4 and OPM8 cards lies in the number of the

channels to be supervised. The OPM4 card can analyze the spectrum of four optical

signals, while the OPM8 card can analyze the spectrum of eight optical signals; and

each signal may contain 96-channel signal in compliance with the ITU-Tstandard.

3.1.20 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

Positioning of Cards in the System shows the positioning and application of the

OSC card.

u Provides overhead multiplexing and transmission in two directions. In the Tx

direction, the overhead information of the local MCC/SCC, E1, E2, F1, K1, K2

and APR are multiplexed, and converted to the 1510 nm optical signals (25.344

Mbit/s). The converted signals are finally sent to the OSCAD card or the OLP

card. In the Rx direction, the reverse process is implemented.

u Supports the input and output of external clocks that can be synchronized with

the system clock.

Version: A 3-65


u Provides a 1588 clock interface to facilitate the input and output of the user

1588 clock. This clock is used for time synchronization.

u Outputs the PTP clock signals to the corresponding Ethernet equipment or

receives the PTP clock signals from the Ethernet equipment, so that the OTN

equipment can transmit the 1588 clock signals of the Ethernet equipment.

u Supports receiving sensitivity sufficient for ultra-long-haul line transmission. In

addition, the failure of the line amplification card does not affect the

performance of the optical supervisory channel.

3.1.21 System Connection and Management Unit

The system connection and management units provide power supply, NE

management, clock processing and auxiliary interfaces for the equipment. Each

card and its functions are listed in Table 3-17.

3-66 Version: A

3 Product Structure

Table 3-17 Functions of the System Connection and Management Unit

Card Name Card Name Function

CCU Center control card

u Provides the clock input and output functions, supports the IEEE

1588v2 time synchronization, and supports SSM information in

64×32 directions (provides 64 service card slots, each of which

supports up to 32 channels).

u Supports the control plane software and performs various

functions required by the ASON control plane.

u Forwards the SCC signals, processes a maximum of 1280 SCC

signals, and supports fast route switching.

u Performs the configuration management, fault management,

performance management and security management of the NE,

and saves the NE management information on behalf of the

management system.

u Provides the management extension interface, integrates the

management of the equipment inside the cabinet and on the

neighboring rack into a unified management platform, and

processes a maximum of 1280 MCC signals.

u Monitors ambient temperature, and performs dual power supply

supervision, intelligent fan control, and card-present hardware

detection in the subrack accommodating the card.

u Supports 1+1 active / standby protection.

u Supports the remote SN configuration of IP addresses.

EMUNE management

card

u Performs the configuration management, fault management,

performance management and security management of the NE,

and saves the NE management information on behalf of the

management system.

u Processes ESC and OSC overheads to implement management

plane information interconnection between the subracks

accommodating the card and other NEs. The card can process

overheads of up to 56 GCCs and two OSCs.

u Provides the management extension interface, integrates the

management of the equipment inside the cabinet and on the

neighboring rack into a unified management platform.

u Monitors ambient temperature, and performs dual power supply

supervision, intelligent fan control, and card-present hardware


u Supports 1+1 hot standby.

Version: A 3-67


Table 3-17 Functions of the System Connection and Management Unit (Continued)

Card Name Card Name Function

FCUNE management

card Note 1

u Performs outbound communication extension functions in the

subrack accommodating the card.

u Performs dual power supply supervision, ambient temperature

detection, intelligent fan control, and card-present hardware


EFCUNE management

card Note 2

u Processes the overheads of 56 GCCs from the line interface card

and the optical transponder card, and overheads from two DCCs

from the OSCs (hereinafter referred to as the DCCs).

u Provides the monitoring and software commissioning interface (f

interface), alarm interface, external monitoring interface, F

interface, and program download interface, and performs dual

power supply supervision, ambient temperature detection,

intelligent fan control, and card-present hardware detection in the

subrack accommodating the card.

u Provides the management extension interface, and integrates the

management of equipment of the same NE in different subracks

into a unified management platform using network cables.

u Monitors the temperature and power supply voltage in the

equipment room and generates alarms on over high temperature

and over low current.

u Supports 1+1 hot standby protection.

PWR Power supply cardAccesses the -48V power for the subrack, provides centralized power

supply for other cards in the subrack, and supports hot backup.

AIF Terminal board

Provides the alarm output interfaces (ALM, AOR and AOC interfaces).

Provides the management or auxiliary interfaces, such as COM, F,

ETH and SIG.

Provides external clock input and output interfaces.

Note 1: When the extension subrack is a COTP subrack and does not process DCCs, choose FCU card as the

management card of the extension subrack.

Note 2: When the extension subrack is a COTP subrack and does not process DCCs, choose EFCU card as the

enhanced management card of the extension subrack.

3-68 Version: A

3 Product Structure

3.2 Software Architecture

The FONST 5000 U series of products uses the modular software architecture

which comprises the BMU software (card management), the EMU software (NE

management), and the OTNM2000 software (network management system). The

software is run on the function cards, NE management cards, and the network

management host to perform equipment configuration, management, and

monitoring.

3.2.1 Overview

The system software architecture is shown in Figure 3-38.

Figure 3-38 System Software Architecture

3.2.2 Communication Protocol and Interface

The communication protocols and interfaces between various software modules are

as follows:

Version: A 3-69


u The NE management card interconnects with the EMS over the F interface.

The F interface uses FiberHome private protocol. The OTNM2000

interconnects with the third-party upper-level management system over the

CORBA interface.

u The physical channel between NEs (that is, the NE management cards) is the

OSC or the ESC that uses the IP protocol.

u The NE management card and the BMU of each card are interconnected over

the LAN using the IP protocol

3.2.3 BMU Software

The BMU software is embedded in each card, directly controls each function circuit,

and supports the card management by the NE management card.

The BMU software collects and processes various instant alarms, performance, and

status information in real time.

u When the card is being powered on, the BMU software applies for the

configuration from the NE management card, and initializes the card based on

the configuration, so that the card enters the preconfigured state after being

powered on.

u During the running of the card, the BMU software receives various control

commands issued by the NE management card and performs the specified

operations; meanwhile, the BMU software receives various queries from the NE

management card.

3.2.4 EMU Software

The EMU software uses an embedded real-time multi-task operating system. Based

on manager/agent model, the EMU software performs management on all cards in

an NE via a unified Ethernet bus.

3-70 Version: A

3 Product Structure

Management / Agent Application Module

The manager / agent application module includes the manager (M) and the agent

(A). On the NE layer, the management unit (EMU) of an NE can be designated as

an agent (A) or a manager/agent (M/A), that is, an agent with the management

function.

u When designated as an M/A, the NE not only serves as the agent of itself but

also manages other NE objects. The management functions of an M/A NE

focus on maintenance of remote objects.

u When designated as an A, the NE collects and processes performance data,

alarm or fault data, and status data of its BMUs, and receives and responds to

related commands issued by the manager. Similarly, the NE management layer

(EML) provides the manager function to the NE layer (NEL).

Network Communication Protocol Stack Software

The network communication protocol stack software performs management

information exchanges between the EMS and the NE and between various NEs.

Real-time Operating System

The EMU software uses the built-in real-time operating system, manages the

resources in the NE management card, and supports the execution of the

application programs, thereby performing basic functions such as task scheduling,

storage management, peripheral product management, and inter-process

communication.

3.2.5 EMS Software

The OTNM2000 comprises the data collection module, the data processing module,

the graphical user interface (GUI) management module, and the database. The

software architecture of the OTNM2000 is shown in Figure 3-39.

Version: A 3-71


Figure 3-39 OTNM2000 Software Architecture

The relationships between the modules shown in the figure and the functions of

these modules are described as follows:

u The OTNM2000 collects alarm and performance data of the managed objects

via the data collection module. The data collected are then analyzed and

processed by the data processing module and saved in the database.

u The data processing module provides fault management, performance

management, configuration management and security management for the

GUI management module.

u The GUI management module consists of the configuration management

module (Devcfg) and management interface module (OTNM2000).

3-72 Version: A

3 Product Structure

4 The configuration management module (Devcfg) is the EMS configuration

program for the operating environment of the equipment and the system. It

is used in equipment configuration (including equipment types, NE types,

IP addresses, etc.), manager configuration (including manager IP

addresses and protocol types), database setting, data checking, and other

related configurations.

4 The management interface module (the OTNM2000) is the main operating

interface program of the OTNM2000. It is used mainly in configuration

management, alarm management, performance management, and

security management.

Version: A 3-73

4 Configuration and Application

The FONST 5000 U series of products use the modular design and are configured

as various equipment types by means of multiple card combinations, so as to satisfy

different application requirements. The FONST 5000 U series of products can be

configured as the OTM, FOADM, ROADM, OLA, and PIC equipment types. The

following describes the functions, related function units, common configuration

principles, compositions, and signal flow of each equipment type.

OTM

FOADM

ROADM

OLA

PIC

Version: A 4-1


4.1 OTM

The following describes the functions, related function units, common configuration

principles, compositions, and signal flow of the OTM equipment.

4.1.1 Function

The OTM equipment is applicable to the terminal station and implements the adding

and dropping of all 96 services in the C-band. The OTM equipment comprises the

Rx part and the Tx part logically. In the Tx direction, the OTM amplifies the

aggregated / converted signals on the client side, multiplexes these signals with the

signals over the supervisory channel, and then sends the multiplexed signals to the

line for transmission. Simultaneously, the reverse process is performed in the Rx

direction.

The OTM equipment is applicable to the end points requiring the adding and

dropping of traffic in large amount in point-to-point, chain, and ring-with-chain

networks. The FONST 5000 U series of products support 48-channel and 96-

channel OTM equipment.

4.1.2 Related Functional Unit

See Table 4-1 for OTM related functional units and their configuration guidelines.

Table 4-1 OTM Related Functional Units

Type Configuration Description

Electrical layer


Compulsory –Electrical cross-connect

unit

Line interface unit

Optical layer

Optical multiplexing and

demultiplexing cardCompulsory –

Optical amplification unit Compulsory –

4-2 Version: A


Table 4-1 OTM Related Functional Units (Continued)


Optical protection unit Optional

This card is

configured for the

station with the

protection

requirement.

Optical spectrum analysis

unitOptional –

Optical supervisory channel

unitOptional

If the ESC mode is

used, the optical

supervisory channel

unit is not required.

System connection and management unit Compulsory –

4.1.3 Common Configuration Principles

The following describes common configuration principles of the OTM station,

including the subrack selection, card selection, and slot arrangement.

Subrack Configuration

The subrack quantity is determined based on the service type and quantity.

Card Configuration

Table 4-2 describes the configuration principles for the compulsory and optional

OTM cards.

Table 4-2 List of Compulsory and Optional OTM Cards

Compulsory and Optional Card Quantity Remark

Elec-

trical

layer

Tributary

interface

card

8TN1, 16TN1, 24TN1,

32TN1

4TN2, 8TN2, 10TN2,

12TN2, 20TN2, 10TP2,

20TP2

1TN3, 2TN3, 1TO3

1TN4, 2TN4

Depending on service type and

quantity.

Compul-

sory

Version: A 4-3


Table 4-2 List of Compulsory and Optional OTM Cards (Continued)


Electrical

cross-

connect

card

UXU2

Nine cards can be configured in

each U60 subrack to work in M:N

protection mode.


each U60 2.0 subrack to work in

M:N protection mode.

Eight cards can be configured in


protection mode.

Six cards can be configured in


protection mode.

Four cards can be configured in


protection mode.

Two cards can be configured in

each U10 subrack to work in

active-standby protection mode.

Line

interface

card

4LN2, 12LN2, 20LN2

1LN4, 2LN4


quantity.

Opti-

cal

layer

Optical

multiplex-

ing and

demulti-

plexing

card

OMU series, VMU

series , and ODU series

of cards

One OMU (or VMU) series card

and one ODU series card are

configured.

Optional

VMU series of cards are

configured when optical channel

power automatic equalization is

required.

ITL50One ITL50 card is configured for

the 96-channel system.

OSCAD

Generally, one OSCAD card is

compulsory. If the OLP card is

configured in the corresponding

line direction, the OSCAD card is

not required.

Optional

Optical

amplifica-

tion card

OA and PA

It is configured based on the line

attenuation. Generally, the

configuration is single OA, PA +

OA, or PA + DCM + OA.

Optional

4-4 Version: A




Optical

protection

card

OLPIf the line protection is required,

one OLP card is configured.

OptionalOCP

The quantity depends on the

number of channels to be

protected. Each card can

implement two protection

groups.

OMSP

If the multiplex section protection

is required, one OMSP card is

configured.

Optical

supervi-

sory card

OSC, EOSC

This card is configured when the

processing on the optical

supervisory channel is required.

Optional

OPM4, OPM8

This card is configured based on

the number of signals to be

supervised. For four or less

signals to be supervised, the

OPM4 card is configured; for

eight or less signals to be

supervised, the OPM8 card is

configured.

Optional

System

connection and

management card

CCU, EMU


each subrack to work in active /

standby protection mode.

Compul-

sory

FCU, EFCU

Two EFCU cards can be

configured in each subrack to

work in active / standby

protection mode.

One FCU card can be configured

in each subrack.

Optional

AIF cardNote 1

One AIF card can be configured

for each U60 / U60 2.0 / COTP

subrack.

Two AIF cards can be configured

for each U40 / U30 / U20

subrack.

Optional

Version: A 4-5




Power supply card PWR card



active-standby protection.

Sixteen cards can be configured

in each U60 2.0 subrack to work

in active-standby protection.


in each U40 subrack to work in









each U10 / COTP subrack to

work in active-standby

protection.

Compul-

sory

Dispersion

compensation

module

DCM module


dispersion compensation

requirement.

Optional

Note 1: The AIF card is not configured in the FONST 5000 U10 subrack.

Card Slot Arrangement

Besides the mapping relationships between the cards and the slots in each subrack

described in Subrack, you need to comply with the following arrangement principles

for easy operation and maintenance:

u Cards installed in fixed slots

4 The slots accommodating the NE management card, the power supply

card, the cross-connect card, and the AIF card are fixed and are selected

based on the mapping relationships between the cards and the slots in

each subrack described in Subrack.

4 The DCM unit is externally configured.

u Line interface card

4-6 Version: A


This type of cards should be installed from small wavelength to large

wavelength (from left to right), and from the lower part to the upper part of the

subrack. When the services only involve some wavelengths, the service cards

should be installed from small to large in terms of wavelength successively with

no intermediate empty slots.

u Optical multiplexing and demultiplexing card

To make fiber coiling easier, the OMU, VMU, and ODU series of cards are

generally installed in the same subrack with the line interface cards, close to

the two sides of the subrack.

Generally, the ITL50 card and the OSCAD card are installed in the same

subrack with the amplification card.

u OA card and PA card

Generally, the optical amplification card in the Rx direction on the line side is

installed on the left and the optical amplification card in the Tx direction on the

line side is installed on the right.

To implement the APR, the amplification cards and the OSC cards must be

installed in the same subrack, and communication configurations must be

implemented for the amplification cards and the OSC cards.

4.1.4 Composition and Signal Flow

The following describes the composition and signal flow of the 48-channel and 96-

channel OTM systems.

48-Channel OTM System

Figure 4-1 shows the composition of the 48-channel OTM system.

Version: A 4-7


Figure 4-1 Composition and Signal Flow of the 48-Channel OTM System

The signal flow of the 48-channel OTM system can be divided into the Tx and the

Rx directions.

u The signal flow in the Tx direction is described as follows:

4 The tributary interface unit receives the client signal. The client signal is

forwarded by the cross-connect card to the corresponding line interface

unit and is aggregated / converted by the line interface card into the signals

with specific wavelengths, and the signals are finally sent to the OMU.

4 All wavelength-specific signals are multiplexed into the 1550 nm main

channel optical signal via the OMU. After being amplified by the OA, the

main channel signal is multiplexed by the OSCAD card with the 1510 nm

local optical supervisory signal from the OSC card. The multiplexed signal

is then sent to the line for transmission.

u The signal flow in the Rx direction is described as follows:

4 The OSCAD card receives the line signal and demultiplexes it into the

1510 nm local optical supervisory signal and the 1550 nm main channel

optical signals.

4-8 Version: A


4 The optical supervisory signal is sent to the OSC card for processing. The

main channel optical signal, after being amplified by the PA, is sent to the

ODU card and demultiplexed into multiple-wavelength optical signals.

4 The wavelength signals are demultiplexed by the line interface unit, sent to

the cross-connect card and the tributary interface card for processing, and

finally sent to the corresponding client side equipment.

96-Channel OTM System

Figure 4-2 shows the composition of the 96-channel OTM system.

The 96-channel OTM is basically the same as the 48-channel OTM in composition,

except that the 96-channel OTM needs the ITL50 card to implement the conversion

between 100 GHz signals and 50GHz signals.

Version: A 4-9


Figure 4-2 Composition and Signal Flow of the 96-Channel OTM System

The signal flow of the 96-channel OTM system can be divided into the Tx and the

Rx directions.


4-10 Version: A


4 The tributary interface unit receives the client signal. The client signal is

forwarded by the cross-connect card to the corresponding line interface

unit and is aggregated / converted by the line interface card into the signals

with specific wavelengths; and the signals are finally sent to the OMU-O

and OMU-E accordingly.

4 All the wavelength-specific signals in the CO band and the CE band are

multiplexed into two 1550 nm main channel signals with a channel spacing

of 100GHz through the OMU-O and the OMU-E respectively. The two

signals are then multiplexed into one main channel signal with a channel

spacing of 50 GHz via the ITL50 card and sent to the OA respectively.

After being amplified by the OA, the main channel signal is multiplexed by

the OSCAD card with the 1510 nm local optical supervisory signal from the

OSC card.


4 The OSCAD card receives the line signal and demultiplexes it into the

1510 nm local optical supervisory signal and the 1550 nm main channel

optical signals.

4 The optical supervisory signal is sent to the OSC card for processing. The

main channel optical signal, after being amplified by the PA, is sent to the

ITL50 card and demultiplexed into two main channel optical signals in the

CO-band and the CE-band respectively via the ITL50 card.

4 The two main channel optical signals are sent respectively to the ODU-O

and ODU-E, and demultiplexed into multiple wavelength optical signals.

4 The wavelength signals are demultiplexed by the line interface unit and are

sent to the cross-connect card. After being processed by the tributary

interface card, the signals are sent to the corresponding client side

equipment.

4.2 FOADM


principles, compositions, and signal flow of the FOADM equipment.

Version: A 4-11


4.2.1 Function

The FOADM provides the fixed adding / dropping and multiplexing function for all

single-wavelength signals in the C-band. Generally, the FOADM is applied to the

intermediate station in a chain or a ring network.


The components of the FOADM are basically the same as those of the OTM. The

only difference is that the FOADM implements bidirectional service adding /

dropping.


The following describes common configuration principles of the FOADM station,

including the subrack configuration, card configuration, and slot arrangement.


Principles for configuring the FOADM subracks are described as follows:

u The FONST 5000 U60 / U60 2.0 / U40 / U30 / U20 / U10 subrack is required for

the electrical cross-connect function. The COTP subrack is required for the

optical layer transmission function.

u The quantity of subracks depends on the service type and quantity. Normally

the service cards in west and east directions are installed in the same subrack.

Card Configuration

The components of the FOADM are basically the same as those of the OTM. The

card configuration principles are basically the same, see Common Configuration

Principles. As the FOADM has two line directions, you need to pay attention to the

following in card configuration:

u The configuration of service cards should be based on service types and

quantities in both line directions.

4-12 Version: A


u As the FOADM has two line directions, the number of line-related cards is a

double of that of the OTM (such as the optical multiplexing and demultiplexing

cards, and optical amplification cards). The optical protection cards and the

DCM are configured based on the line requirements.





















Generally, the ITL50 cards and the OSCAD cards are installed in the same

subrack with the amplification cards.





Version: A 4-13






Figure 4-3 shows the composition of the FOADM and the signal flow direction.

Figure 4-3 Composition and Signal Flow of FOADM

The FOADM processes the optical signals in two transmit directions, that is, west

receiving and east transmitting, and east receiving and west transmitting. As the

signal flow is the same in both directions, the following only describes the signal flow

in the direction of west receiving and east transmitting.

u The signal from the west line is demultiplexed by the west OSCAD card into the

1510 nm optical supervisory signal and the 1550 nm main channel optical

signal.

u The optical supervisory signal is sent to the OSC card for processing. The main

channel optical signal, after being amplified by the PA, is sent to the west ODU

4-14 Version: A


card and demultiplexed by the ODU card into multiple optical signals in specific

wavelength.

4 The wavelength signals terminated locally (such as the signals in

Channels 3 to n in Figure 4-3) are forwarded to the client side equipment in

the west over the line card, the cross-connect card, and the tributary card.

4 Wavelength signals to pass through transparently (e.g., the signal in

Channel 1 in Figure 4-3) are connected to the east OMU via fiber jumpers

inside the station.

4 Due to long transmission distance or the power unequalized with that of

the local add wavelength signals, some through-connected wavelength

signals (such as the signal in Channel 2 in Figure 4-3) requires the

regeneration function of the line card for transmission.

u After being uplinked by the east client equipment to the east tributary card,

cross-connect card, and line card, the client signal from the local station to the

east are input to the east OMU and multiplexed with the through-connected

signals by the east OMU. Then, the output multiplexed signals are amplified by

the OA card and input to the OSCAD card together with the supervisory signal

from the OSC card. After these signals are multiplexed, the signals are finally

sent to the east line for transmission.

4.3 ROADM


principles, compositions, and signal flow of the ROADM equipment.

4.3.1 Function

The ROADM is applied to the intermediate stations in the chain or ring networks and

performs dynamic configurable add/drop multiplexing. The ROADM is

recommended for intermediate stations where multi-dimensional optical grooming,

flexible service wavelengths, dynamic allocation are required.

Version: A 4-15


Working in cooperation with the WSSM, WSSD, optical multiplexing and

demultiplexing cards, the ROADM performs dynamic all-wavelength adding /

dropping, provides multi-dimensional inter-ring expansion, and supports up to 9-

dimensional optical wavelength grooming.


See Table 4-3 for ROADM related functional units and their configuration guidelines.

Table 4-3 ROADM Related Functional Units


Electrical

layer


Compulsory

This card is configured for the

ROADM station with the electric

cross-connect requirement.

Electrical cross-connect

unit

Line interface unit

Optical layer

Optical multiplexing and

demultiplexing cardCompulsory

Required when a wavelength

group is added / dropped at a

port.

Dynamic optical add / drop

multiplexing unitCompulsory –

Optical amplification unit Compulsory –



station with the protection

requirement.

Optical spectrum analysis

unitOptional –

Optical supervisory

channel unitOptional

For a 2-dimensional ROADM,

only one OSC unit is configured.

For a multi-dimensional

ROADM (dimension quantity

greater than 2), one OSC unit is

configured for each direction. If

the ESC (Electrical Supervisory

Channel) is used, the optical

supervisory channel is not

required.


4-16 Version: A



The following describes common configuration principles of the ROADM station,



Principles for configuring the ROADM subracks are described as follows:

u The FONST 5000 U60 / U60 2.0 / U40 / U30 / U20 / U10 subrack is required for

the electrical cross-connect function. The COTP subrack is required for the

optical layer transmission function.

u Service cards in all directions can be arranged in the same subrack or separate

subracks. The number of subracks depends on the quantity of services to be

terminated in each direction.

u For the ROADM with dimension n (greater than 2), n OSC cards need to be

configured. Therefore, an n-dimensional ROADM requires at least n subracks.

Card Configuration

The components of the ROADM are basically the same as those of the OTM. The

card configuration principles are basically the same, see Common Configuration

Principles. The only difference is that the dynamic optical add / drop multiplexing

cards are configured for the ROADM. Table 4-4 lists the configuration principles.

The configuration guidelines for other cards are described as follows:

u The configuration of service cards should be based on service types and

quantities in all dimensions (line directions).

u When the ROADM has multiple dimensions, the number of line-related cards is

increased based on the OTM accordingly (such as the optical multiplexing and

demultiplexing cards, and the optical amplification cards). The optical protection

cards and the DCM are configured based on the line requirements.

u The OMU, VMU, and ODU series cards are configured only when wavelength

groups are added / dropped at a port of the ROADM.

u One OSC card is configured for a 2-dimension ROADM. n OSC cards is

configured for an n-dimension (greater than 2) ROADM.

Version: A 4-17


Table 4-4 Compulsory Cards for the ROADM

Compulsory

CardQuantity Remark

Dynamic optical

add / drop

multiplexing

card

WSSM

WSSD

In the WSSM card mode, one

WSSM card is configured for each

line direction.

Compulsory

In the WSSD card mode, one

WSSD card is configured for each

line direction.

In the WSS group mode (WSSM

card + WSSD card), one WSSM

and one WSSD are configured in

each line direction.


The slot arrangement principles for each ROADM mode are basically the same.




















4-18 Version: A


Generally, the ITL50 cards and the OSCAD cards are installed in the same

subrack with the amplification cards.









The following introduces basic concepts, the composition and the signal flow using

2-dimensional and 9-dimensional ROADM models.

4.3.4.1 Basic Concept

The ROADM scenarios include wavelength dependence, wavelength independence

(colorless), direction dependence and direction independence (directionless).

Table 4-5 introduces these concepts respectively.

Version: A 4-19


Table 4-5 Basic Concepts of the ROADM

Concept Explanation Application

Wavelength

dependence

The OMU48_E, VMU48_E, ODU48_E,

OMU48_O, VMU48_O and ODU48_O

ports are used for adding / dropping.

Only fixed wavelength can be added or

dropped at each adding or dropping port.

Wavelength dependence:

Adding / dropping port (fixed

wavelength)

u Low insertion loss and

low cost.

u If a new wavelength is to

be used instead of an

existing one, the fiber

connection of the line

card and the adding /

dropping port of the

multiplexing and

demultiplexing card must

be adjusted at the station.

Wavelength

independence

(colorless)

The WSS8M+WSS8D, WSS8M+ODU or

WSS8D +OMU/VMU is used for adding /

dropping. Any wavelength can be added or

dropped at any port of the ROADM unit.Wavelength independence:

Adding / dropping port

(tunable wavelength)

u The ROADM can be

reconfigured via the

network management

system.

u The line cards required

by new services should

have been installed in the

subrack. If not, install

them at the station.

4-20 Version: A


Table 4-5 Basic Concepts of the ROADM (Continued)

Concept Explanation Application

Direction

dependence

The wavelength carrying the local service

can be transmitted in the fixed direction.

The current path cannot be

adjusted flexibly.

When it is required to adjust

the current path, the fiber

connection of the network

must be adjusted at the

station.

Direction

independence

(directionless)

The wavelength carrying the local service

can be transmitted in the any direction. The current path can be

adjusted flexibly.

If service adjustment is

required, or the protection

path is required in case of

working path failure, the

optical cross-connect can be

configured manually to

perform flexible service cross-

connect.

4.3.4.2 2-Dimensional ROADM Application

The 2-dimensional ROADM network supports service transmission in two directions.

For a smooth upgrade to a network of four or more dimensions, the ports can be

reserved and the ODU+WSS8M, WSS8D+WSS8M or OMU/VMU+WSS8D can be

configured.

Note:

In the following diagrams the WSS8M+WSS8D can also be replaced with

WSS8M+ODU or OMU/VMU+WSS8D.

Version: A 4-21


Wavelength Relevance & Direction Relevance Scenario

Figure 4-4 2-dimensional ROADM Application (Wavelength Relevance & Direction Relevance)

4-22 Version: A


Wavelength Relevance & Direction Irrelevance Scenario

Figure 4-5 2-dimensional ROADM Application (Wavelength Relevance & Direction

Irrelevance)

Version: A 4-23


Wavelength Irrelevance & Direction Irrelevance Scenario

Figure 4-6 2-dimensional ROADM Application (Wavelength Irrelevance & Direction

Irrelevance)

4.3.4.3 9-Dimensional ROADM Application

The 9-dimensional ROADM network supports service transmission in nine

directions. For a smooth upgrade to a network of four or more dimensions, the ports

can be reserved and the ODU+WSS8M, WSS8D+WSS8M or OMU/VMU+WSS8D

can be configured.

Note:

In the following diagrams the WSS8M+WSS8D can also be replaced with

WSS8M+ODU or OMU/VMU+WSS8D.

4-24 Version: A


Wavelength Relevance & Direction Irrelevance Scenario

The services of NE1 can be transmitted in paths of nine directions.

u If the current path needs adjustment (such as service adjustment, or service

taken over to the protection path in case of the working path failure), the optical

cross-connect can be configured manually to perform flexible service cross-

connect.

u In the ASON, the re-routing function supports selecting a path automatically

and creating optical cross-connect automatically, so that the service

transmission of NE1 can be assured. n the wavelength relevance scenario,

only the same wavelength can be used for re-routing.

In this scenario, take NE1 as an example, only a group of OMU+ODU is required for

local service cross-connect in nine directions.

Version: A 4-25


Figure 4-7 9-dimensional ROADM Application (Wavelength Relevance & Direction

Irrelevance)

Wavelength Irrelevance & Direction Irrelevance Scenario

The services of NE1 can be transmitted in paths of nine directions.

u If the current path needs adjustment (such as service adjustment, or service

taken over to the protection path in case of the working path failure), the optical

cross-connect can be configured manually to perform flexible service cross-

connect.

u In the ASON, the re-routing function supports selecting a path automatically

and creating optical cross-connect automatically, so that the service

transmission of NE1 can be assured.

4-26 Version: A


u If the multiplexing and demultiplexing cards with tunable wavelengths are also

used, in the wavelength irrelevance scenario, the service wavelengths can be

flexible adjusted so as to avoid wavelength congestion during re-routing.

Figure 4-8 9-dimensional ROADM Application (Wavelength Irrelevance & Direction

Irrelevance)

4.4 OLA


principles, compositions, and signal flow of the OLA equipment.

Version: A 4-27


4.4.1 Function

The OLA is used at the optical amplification station without add and drop services.

The OLA amplifies the optical signals transmitted in two directions.


The OLA has the following functional units:

u Optical amplification unit

u Optical supervisory channel unit

u System connection and management unit


The following describes common configuration principles of the OLA station,



Generally, the COTP subrack is configured at the OLA station.

Card Configuration

Table 4-6 describes the optional and compulsory card configuration for the OLA.

Table 4-6 List of Compulsory and Optional OLA Cards


Optical

layer

Optical

amplification

card

PA and OA

Depends on the line

attenuation in each

direction.

Optional

Optical

multiplexing

and

demultiplexing

card

OSCAD

Two cards are

configured for each

station.

Compulsory

4-28 Version: A


Table 4-6 List of Compulsory and Optional OLA Cards (Continued)


Optical

supervisory

card

OSC

One OSC card is

configured for each

station.

Compulsory

OPM4, OPM8

This card is

configured based

on the number of

signals to be

supervised. For four

or less signals to be

supervised, the

OPM4 card is

configured; for eight

or less signals to be

supervised, the

OPM8 card is

configured.

Optional

System connection and

management card

EMU card

Two cards can be

configured in each

subrack to work in

active / standby

protection.

Compulsory

FCU, EFCU

Two EFCU cards

can be configured

in each subrack to

work in active /

standby protection

mode.

One FCU card can

be configured in

each subrack.

Optional

AIF

One card can be

configured in each

COTP subrack.

Optional

Version: A 4-29


Table 4-6 List of Compulsory and Optional OLA Cards (Continued)



Two cards can be

configured in each

subrack to work in

active / standby

protection.

Compulsory

Dispersion compensation

moduleDCM

It is configured

based on the

dispersion

compensation

requirement in each

direction.

Optional





u The slots accommodating the NE management card, the power supply card,

and the AIF card are fixed and are selected based on the mapping relationships

between the cards and the slots in each subrack described in Subrack.

u The DCM unit is externally configured.

u OA card and PA card: Generally, the optical amplification card in the Rx

direction on the line side is installed on the left and the optical amplification card

in the Tx direction on the line side is installed on the right. To implement the

APR, the amplification card and the OSC card must be installed in the same

subrack, and communication configurations must be implemented for the

amplification card and the OSC card.


Figure 4-9 shows the composition of the OLA and the signal flow direction.

4-30 Version: A


Figure 4-9 Composition and Signal Flow of OLA

The signal from the west line is demultiplexed by the OSCAD card into the 1510 nm

optical supervisory signal and the 1550 nm main channel optical signal. The optical

supervisory signal is sent to the OSC card for processing. The main channel signal,

after being amplified by the OA card through the DCM, is multiplexed by the east

OSCAD card, together with the processed optical supervisory signals and finally

sent to the east line for transmission.

The signal from the east line is demultiplexed by the OSCAD card into the 1510 nm

optical supervisory signal and the 1550 nm main channel optical signal. The optical

supervisory signal is sent to the OSC card for processing. The main channel signal,

after being amplified by the PA card primarily and then by the DCM via the OA card

secondarily, is multiplexed together with the processed optical supervisory signals

by the west OSCAD card and finally sent to the west line for transmission.

4.5 PIC


principles, compositions, and signal flow of the PIC equipment.

Version: A 4-31


4.5.1 Function

The PIC station can implement the conversion from multiple 10 Gbit/s electrical

signals to one OTN multiplexing signal. Without an amplifier, the transmission

distance can reach up to 40 km.


See Table 4-7 for PIC related functional units and their configuration guidelines.

Table 4-7 PIC Related Functional Units


Electrical

layer


CompulsoryThe PIC electrical layer unit

includes the 10IL2 card.

Electrical cross-connect

unit

PIC electrical layer unit

Optical layer

PIC optical layer cards Optional

The PIC optical multiplexing

and demultiplexing unit includes

the BMD card. The card is

configured based on the service

quantity and optical power

amplification requirement.



station with the protection

requirement.

Optical supervisory

channel unitOptional

If the ESC mode is used, the

optical supervisory channel unit

is not required.



The following describes common configuration principles of the PIC station,



The subrack quantity is determined based on the service type and quantity.

4-32 Version: A


Card Configuration

Table 4-8 describes the configuration principles for the compulsory and optional

PIC cards.

Table 4-8 List of Compulsory and Optional PIC Cards


Elec-

trical

layer

Tributary

interface

card

8TN1, 16TN1, 24TN1,

32TN1

4TN2, 8TN2, 10TN2,

12TN2, 20TN2, 10TP2,

20TP2


quantity.

Compul-

sory

Electrical

cross-

connect

card

UXU2



protection mode.


each U60 2.0 subrack to work in

M:N protection mode.



protection mode.



protection mode.

Four cards can be configured in


protection mode.



active-standby protection mode.

PIC

electrical

layer unit

10IL2Depending on service type and

quantity.

Opti-

cal

layer

PIC

optical

layer

cards

BMD2, BMD2P,

BMD2PP

The card is selected based on

the amplification module

required by the line.

Compul-

sory

Optical

protection

card

OLPIf the line protection is required,

one OLP card is configured.Optional

Version: A 4-33


Table 4-8 List of Compulsory and Optional PIC Cards (Continued)


OCP

The quantity depends on the

number of channels to be

protected. Each card can

implement two protection

groups.

OMSP

If the multiplex section protection

is required, one OMSP card is

configured.

Optical

supervi-

sory card

OSC

This card is configured when the

processing on the optical

supervisory channel is required.

Optional

System

connection and

management card

CCU, EMU


each subrack to work in active /

standby protection mode.

Compul-

sory

FCU, EFCU

Two EFCU cards can be

configured in each subrack to

work in active / standby

protection mode.

One FCU card can be configured

in each subrack.

Optional

AIF cardNote 1

One AIF card can be configured

for each U60 / U60 2.0 / COTP

subrack.

Two AIF cards can be configured

for each U40 / U30 / U20

subrack.

Optional

4-34 Version: A


Table 4-8 List of Compulsory and Optional PIC Cards (Continued)







in each U60 2.0 subrack to work

in active-standby protection.


in each U40 subrack to work in









each U10 / COTP subrack to

work in active-standby

protection.

Compul-

sory

Dispersion

compensation

module

DCM module


dispersion compensation

requirement.

Optional

Note 1: The AIF card is not configured in the FONST 5000 U10 subrack.


When installing the cards, follow the mapping relationships between the cards and

the slots in each subrack described in Subrack for easy operation and maintenance.


Generally, the PIC system is applied in the stations in low traffic volume. Using an

OTM-type PIC station as an example, Figure 4-10 shows the composition of the PIC

system.

Version: A 4-35


Figure 4-10 Composition and Signal Flow of PIC System

The signal flow of the OTM-type PIC station comprises that in the Tx direction and

that in the Rx direction.


4 The client side signals connected to the tributary interface card are

forwarded by the cross-connect card to the corresponding 10IL2 card (PIC

electrical layer unit), aggregated or converted by the 10IL2 card to signals

with specific wavelength, and sent to the BMD2PP card (PIC optical layer

card).

4 All signals with specific wavelengths output by the10IL2 card are

multiplexed by the BMD2PP card as 1550 nm main channel optical signals.

The signals are amplified by the internal amplifier, multiplexed with the

1510 nm local optical supervisory signals from the OSC card, and sent to

the line for transmission.


4 The BMD2PP card receives the line signal and splits it into 1510 nm

optical supervisory signals and the 1550 nm main channel optical signals.

4-36 Version: A


4 The optical supervisory signals are sent to the OSC card for processing.

After being amplified by the internal amplifier, the main channel optical

signals are split by the BMD2PP card into multi-wavelength group optical

signals.

4 The optical signals of each wavelength group are demultiplexed by the

corresponding 10IL2 card and are sent to the cross-connect card. After

being forwarded by the cross-connect card to the corresponding tributary

interface unit, the signals are processed by the tributary interface unit and

sent to the client side equipment.

Version: A 4-37

5 Protection Implementation

The following describes the overview, protection parameters, function

implementation, and switching trigger conditions of various protection types of the

FONST 5000 U series of products.

Equipment-level Protection

Network-level protection

Network Management Information Protection

Version: A 5-1


5.1 Equipment-level Protection

The FONST 5000 U series of products provide the equipment-level protection,

including 1+1 protection for the NE management cards, M+N protection for the

cross-connect cards, 1+1 protection for the power supply cards, and 1+1 protection

for the input power supply.

5.1.1 1+1 Protection for the NE Management Card


implementation, and switching trigger conditions of the 1+1 protection for the NE

management cards of the FONST 5000 U series of products.

Overview

The FONST 5000 series of products include the FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack, the

FONST 5000 U60 subrack, the FONST 5000 U40 subrack, the FONST 5000 U30

subrack, the FONST 5000 U20 subrack, the FONST 5000 U10 subrack, and the

COTP subrack. Table 5-1 describes the 1+1 protection for the NE management

cards of the subracks.

Table 5-1 1+1 Protection for the NE Management Cards of the FONST 5000 U Series of

Products

Subrack Name

Suitable Slot for

NE Management

Card

Compulsory Slot

for NE

Management

Card

Protection

Implementation

Mode

FONST 5000 U60 subrack 01, 02 01 The NE

management cards

are configured in two

slots to achieve 1+1

protection. When the

active card is faulty,

the standby card

takes over services

of the active card.

FONST 5000 U60 2.0

subrack01, 02 01

FONST 5000 U40 subrack 55, 56 55




COTP subrack 00, 01 00

Note 1: The NE management card is the core card of the equipment. It is recommended that

the network management cards should be configured in both slots.

5-2 Version: A


Protection Parameters

Table 5-2 describes the 1+1 protection for the NE management card.

Table 5-2 1+1 Protection Parameters of the NE Management Cards

Parameter Description

Switching type 1+1 protection of the NE management cards

Revert mode Non-revertive

Switching time (ms) ≤ 50


The power-on network management cards are in the activated state. The active

card performs NE management. The active and standby NE management cards

exchange status information over the inter-card monitoring line, thereby achieving

active-standby switchover.

u Protection switchover process of the active and standby NE management

cards

When the active card is not present, fails, or receives the active / standby

switchover command from the EMS, the standby card is notified over the

monitoring line between the active and standby monitoring cards. At this time,

the standby card takes over the services of original active card.

After the fault of the original active card is cleared, the original active card will

work in the standby state and will not recover the working state until the current

active card is faulty or is manually switched over.

u Data synchronization between the active and standby NE management cards

The configuration data on the standby card must be synchronized with that on

the active card in real time to enable the standby card to work properly after

switchover. The active and standby cards support the following synchronization

modes:

4 The NE management card configuration: The standby card periodically

sends the configuration check information to the active card. The active

card compares the check information. If the check information is

inconsistent between the active and standby cards, the active card will

send the configuration information to the standby card for synchronization.

Version: A 5-3


4 Service data configuration (including overhead, protection, NE merge, and

wavelength configuration) on the EMS:

¡ During incremental configuration of service data configuration on the

EMS, the active card proactively sends the incremental configuration

to the standby card.

¡ The active and standby cards periodically send the check information

of service data configuration to each other.

After receiving the check information, the standby card compares the

information. The standby card will send the request of synchronizing

full service data configuration to the active card as soon as any

inconsistency is detected. After receiving the request, the active card

will send the full configuration to the standby card.

Note:

Full configuration of service data configuration refers to the collection of

all incremental configuration.

Switching Trigger Conditions

The following trigger conditions are supported:

u Automatic switching: When the standby card receives a message that the

active card is not present or fails, the switching will be implemented

automatically without manual operations.

u Manual switching: When the NE management card needs to be tested whether

it can be switched over normally, you can perform the switchover by manually

plugging the card, or issuing a command over the EMS.

5.1.2 M+N Protection for the Cross-connect Card


implementation, and switching trigger conditions of the M+N protection of the cross-

connect cards for the FONST 5000 U series of products.

5-4 Version: A


Overview

The subracks of the FONST 5000 U series of products which can accommodate the

cross-connect cards include the FONST 5000 U60 subrack, FONST 5000 U60 2.0

subrack, the FONST 5000 U40 subrack, the FONST 5000 U30 subrack, the FONST

5000 U20 subrack, and the FONST 5000 U10 subrack. Table 5-3 describes the M

+N protection of the cross-connect cards in each subrack.

Table 5-3 M+N Protection for the Cross-connect Cards of the FONST 5000 U Series of

Products

Subrack NameSuitable Slot for Cross-

connect Card

Protection Implementation

Mode

FONST 5000 U60 subrack05, 06, 07, 08, 84, 85, 86,

87, 88

The slots for the cross-

connect cards are in a parallel

relationship rather than

active-standby relationship.

The EMS and hardware can

be used to control the

activation state of the cross-

connect cards. The activated

cross-connect cards work in

load balancing mode.

FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack05, 06, 07, 08, 84, 85, 86,

87, 88

FONST 5000 U40 subrack 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64

FONST 5000 U30 subrack 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48

FONST 5000 U20 subrack 29, 30, 31, 32

FONST 5000 U10 subrack 15, 16


Table 5-4 describes the M+N protection parameters of the cross-connect cards of

the FONST 5000 U series of products

Table 5-4 M+N Protection Parameters of the Cross-connect Cards of the FONST 5000 U

Series of Products


Switching type M+NNote 1 protection for the UXU2 card

Revert mode Non-revertive

Version: A 5-5


Table 5-4 M+N Protection Parameters of the Cross-connect Cards of the FONST 5000 U

Series of Products (Continued)



Note 1: M indicates the minimum number of the used cross-connect cards, and N indicates the

number of the protection cross-connect cards and is determined based on the traffic

carried by the equipment.

u When the cross-connect capacity per slot is smaller than or equal to 100 G, the M

values of the U60, U60 2.0, U40, U30, U20, and U10 subracks are 4, 4, 4, 3, 2,

and 1 respectively.

u When the cross-connect capacity per slot is smaller than or equal to 200 G, the M

values of the U60, U60 2.0, U40, U30, U20, and U10 subracks are 7, 7, 7, 5, 4,

and 2 respectively.


In the M+N protection for the cross-connect cards, the cross-connect cards are not

in the active-standby mode. The activated cross-connect cards take charge of the

service circuits between the tributary cards and line cards together. Each cross-

connect card exchanges the state information over the inter-card monitoring line as

follows:

u When a cross-connect card is not present, fails, or receives the inactive

command from the EMS, the remaining cross-connect cards take over the

cross-connect service of the original cross-connect card.

u After the original cross-connect card recovers, it is switched to the activated

state manually and resumes the working status. The remaining cross-connect

cards take charge of the cross-connect service together with the original cross-

connect card.


The trigger conditions for the protection switchover of the cross-connect cards are

as follows:

u Automatic switching: When the standby card receives a message indicating

that the active card is not present or fails, the switching occurs automatically

without manual operations.

5-6 Version: A


u Manual switching: When the cross-connect card needs to be tested whether it

can be switched over normally, you can perform the switchover by manually

plugging the card, using the hardware button, or issuing a command over the

EMS.

5.1.3 1+1 Protection for the Power Card

The following describes the 1+1 protection for the power cards of the FONST 5000

U series of products and the switchover trigger conditions.

Overview

The FONST 5000 series of products include the FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack, the

FONST 5000 U60 subrack, the FONST 5000 U40 subrack, the FONST 5000 U30

subrack, the FONST 5000 U20 subrack, the FONST 5000 U10 subrack, and the

COTP subrack. The 1+1 protection of the power cards in each subrack is as follows:

u The FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack can accommodate 16 power cards, as

shown in Figure 5-1. The power cards in the same color work in the active /

standby mode.

Figure 5-1 Active and Standby Protection of the Power Cards in the FONST 5000 U60 2.0

Subrack

Version: A 5-7


u The FONST 5000 U60 subrack can accommodate six power cards, as shown

in Figure 5-2. The power cards in the same color work in the active / standby

mode, and they power the area having the same color with them.

Figure 5-2 Active and Standby Protection of the Power Cards in the FONST 5000 U60

Subrack

u The FONST 5000 U40 subrack can accommodate 16 power cards, as shown in

Figure 5-3. The power cards in the same color work in the active / standby

mode, and they power the area having the same color with them.


Subrack

5-8 Version: A


u The FONST 5000 U30 subrack can accommodate eight power cards, as


standby mode, and they power the area having the same color with them.


Subrack

u The FONST 5000 U20 subrack can accommodate eight power cards, as


standby mode, and they power the area having the same color with them.

Version: A 5-9



Subrack

u The two power cards in the FONST 5000 U10 subrack work in the active /

standby mode, as shown in Figure 5-6.


Subrack

u The two power cards of the COTP subrack work in the active / standby mode,

as shown in Figure 5-7.

5-10 Version: A


Figure 5-7 Active and Standby Protection of the Power Cards in the COTP Subrack


The active and standby power cards work in hot standby mode. No extra trigger

condition is required.

5.1.4 1+1 Protection for the Input Power Supply

The subrack and the cabinet both support the active / standby power supply input,

and the normal power supply of the equipment will not be influenced if any power

supply fails. The PDP used by the FONST 5000 U series of products includes

3000064, 3000068 and 3000082 models.

PDP (3000064)

The active and standby input power supplies of the cabinet are from four active and

four standby input terminals of the PDP (3000064) module, as shown in Figure 5-8.

Version: A 5-11


(1) External power supply -48 V input terminal

(A)


(B)

Figure 5-8 PDP (3000064) Power Input Protection

PDP (3000068)

The active and standby input power supplies of the cabinet are from three active

and three standby input terminals of the PDP (3000068) module, as shown in

Figure 5-9.


(A)


(B)


5-12 Version: A


PDP (3000082)

The active and standby input power supplies of the cabinet are from five active and

five standby input terminals of the PDP (3000082) module, as shown in Figure 5-10.


(A)


(B)


5.2 Network-level protection

The FONST 5000 U series of products provide network-level protection, including

the OTN electrical-layer protection, OTN optical-layer protection, and PTN

protection.

OTN Electrical-layer Protection

The FONST 5000 U series of products provide six types of electrical-layer OTN

network-level protection. The protection switchover of each type is implemented

among the electrical-layer tributary interface unit, the central control unit, and the

line interface unit.

To focus on the electrical protection, all protection diagrams in this section indicate

the unidirectional signal flow in the direction of local transmitting and the opposite

station receiving only, and the OMU, ODU, OA, and supervisory signal flow direction

corresponding to the optical channel are omitted. See Figure 5-11 for information

about the omitted part.

Version: A 5-13


Figure 5-11 Composition and Signal Flow of OTM

OTN Optical-Layer Protection

The OTN optical-layer protection includes optical channel 1+1 wavelength / route

protection, 1+1 optical multiplex section protection, and optical line 1:1 / 1+1

protection. The OTN optical-layer protection provides protection functions on the

optical layer using extra cards and lines by adding optical protection cards with the

splitting function, thereby avoiding service interruption caused by optical fiber line

deterioration or interruption.

PTN Protection

The PTN protection includes the Ethernet LAG protection in a way that binds a

group of physical Ethernet interfaces with the same rate into a logical interface to

increase bandwidth and protect links. The FONST 5000 U series of products can

achieve intra-card LAG protection. When any port is faulty, service packets are

distributed to other ports for transmission.

5-14 Version: A


5.2.1 OCh 1+1 Protection


implementation, and switching trigger conditions of the OCh 1+1 protection of the


Overview

The OCh 1+1 protection is based on the 1+1 protection of a single optical channel

and achieves dual-feeding and selective-receiving of the optical channel signals

controlled by the CCU card. The switchover duration is shorter than 50 ms.


Table 5-5 describes the parameters for the OCh 1+1 protection.

Table 5-5 Parameters for the OCh 1+1 Protection


Protection Type OCh 1+1 protection

Wait to Restore Time

(WRT)

The WRT indicates the time that the services need to wait for

switching back to the original work channel after a fault of the work

channel is rectified.

Return mode

It can be set to Revertive or Non-revertive.

u Revertive: After the work channel is faulty and services are

switched over to the protection channel, the services are

automatically switched back to the work channel if the work

channel resumes.

u Non-revertive: After the work channel is faulty and services are

switched over to the protection channel, the services still work

on the protection channel if the work channel resumes.

Alarm monitoring type

The monitoring type includes SNCP/I, SNCP/N, SNCP/S, OCH and

Not Configured.

The switchover triggering alarms corresponding to the protection

vary with the monitoring types.

Version: A 5-15


Table 5-5 Parameters for the OCh 1+1 Protection (Continued)


Hold-off time

The hold-off time indicates the delay duration for the protection

switchover.

u If the original line recovers (the original alarm is cleared) within

the hold-off time, switchover is not performed.

u If the alarm persists, after the hold-off time is reached, the

switchover is performed based on the alarm.

Mode

It can be set to unidirectional protection or bidirectional protection.

u Unidirectional protection: When the working channel is faulty,

the receive end of the local NE is switched over to the interface

card of the protection line, and the opposite end NE does not

perform any action.

u Bidirectional protection: When the working channel is faulty, the

receive and the transmit ends of the local NE are switched over

to the protection line interface card, and the transmit and the

receive ends of the opposite NE are also switched over to the

protection line interface card.


Figure 5-12 describes the OCh 1+1 protection.

u In normal conditions, the cross-connect card cross-connects the signal from the

main line card to the corresponding tributary card.

u The signals of the working and protection channels are dual-fed. If the main

channel is faulty and the standby channel works properly, the main line

interface card feeds back the SF/SD information to the CCU card according to

the monitoring type and trigger conditions configured on the EMS. After the

CCU card receives the information, the cross-connect card cross-connects the

signals from the standby line card to the corresponding tributary card, namely,

achieves dual-fed and selectively-feeding.

u When the working channel restores, the service signals can be restored to the

working channel or not according to the revert type configured on the EMS.

5-16 Version: A


Figure 5-12 OCh 1+1 Protection


The OCh 1+1 protection includes four monitoring types: SNCP/I, SNCP/N, SNCP/S,

and OCH. They differ from each other in switching trigger conditions.

u SNCP/I (Inherent monitoring): In addition to the generally used alarms such as

the card failure alarm and LOS alarm, the trigger conditions also include the SM

section overhead alarms.

u SNCP/S (Sub-layer monitoring): In addition to the generally used alarms such

as the card failure alarm and LOS alarm, the trigger conditions also include the

SM and TCM section overhead alarms.

u SNCP/N (Non-intrusive monitoring): In addition to the generally used alarms

such as the card failure alarm and LOS alarm, the trigger conditions also

include the SM, TCM and PM section overhead alarms.

u OCH: In addition to the generally used alarms such as the card failure alarm

and LOS alarm, the trigger conditions also include the SM and PM section

overhead alarms.

5.2.2 OCh m:n Protection


implementation, and switching trigger conditions of the OCh m:n protection of the


Version: A 5-17


Overview

The OCh m:n protection is based on the m:n protection of the optical channel,

where m indicates the number of protection channels and n indicates the number of

working channels.

This protection is implemented by the CCU card using the APS protocol and is a

dual-end switchover. The transmit end and receive ends perform protection

switchover simultaneously. The switchover of each channel is independent from that

of another channel, and the switchover duration is shorter than 50 ms.


Table 5-6 describes the parameters for the OCh m:n protection.

Table 5-6 Parameters for the OCh m:n Protection


Protection Type OCh m:n protection


(WRT)




Return mode





channel resumes.






Not Configured.



5-18 Version: A


Table 5-6 Parameters for the OCh m:n Protection (Continued)


Hold-off time


switchover.





Mode



the receive / transmit end of the local NE is switched over to the

protection line interface card, and the transmit / receive end of

the opposite NE is switched over to the protection line interface

card.

u Bidirectional protection: When the working channel is faulty, the

receive and the transmit ends of the local NE are switched over

to the protection line interface card, and the transmit and the

receive ends of the opposite NE are also switched over to the

protection line interface card.


Here the OCh 1:2 protection is used as an example to describe the protection

principles.

The normal conditions are shown in Figure 5-13. At the local end, multiple signals

from the tributary cards are cross-connected by the cross-connect cards to the

working line cards 1 and 2. The signals, after being multiplexed by line cards, are

sent to the corresponding optical channel.

At the far end, the working line cards 1 and 2 demultiplex the corresponding optical

channel signals and send them to the cross-connect cards. After being cross-

connected by the cross-connect cards, the signals are sent to the corresponding

tributary cards.

Under this condition, no services are transported via the protection line cards and

the protection optical channels. In other words, the working channel is single-

feeding and single-receiving.

Version: A 5-19


Figure 5-13 OCh 1:2 Protection (Normal)

Figure 5-14 shows the fault conditions. For example, upon detecting the trigger

condition, the opposite end working line card 2 feeds back the SF/SD information to

the CCU card according to the monitoring type configured for the protection.

The opposite end equipment sends back the APS information to the local end. The

local CCU card controls the line card to perform bridging according to the APS

protocol. The cross-connect card cross-connects the ODUk signal to be protected of

the working line card 2 to the protection line card.

The opposite end CCU card controls the line card to perform the switchover

according to the APS protocol. The cross-connect card cross-connects the ODUk

signal from the protection line card to the corresponding tributary card, and services

over the working optical channel 2 are transmitted over the protection optical

channel. That is, switchover is required on both the local and far ends when a fault

occurs.

After the fault is rectified and the original working optical channel 2 works stably for

several minutes (flexibly configured on the EMS), the service signal is recovered to

the original working optical channel 2.

5-20 Version: A


Figure 5-14 OCh 1:2 Protection (Switching)


The OCh m:n protection includes four monitoring types: SNCP/I, SNCP/N, SNCP/S,

and OCH. They differ from each other in switching trigger conditions.










u OCH: In addition to the generally used alarms such as the card failure alarm

and LOS alarm, the trigger conditions also include the SM and PM section

overhead alarms.

Version: A 5-21


5.2.3 OCh Ring Protection


implementation, and switching trigger conditions of the OCh Ring protection of the


Overview

The OCh Ring protection is the ring network protection based on the optical channel.

This protection type is applicable to the distributed service network. Only two

wavelength channels are required within the ring to protect the distributed services

between nodes.

When no extra services exist in the protection channels, all nodes are available, and

the length of the fiber is less than 1200 km, the protection switching can be

implemented within 50 ms once a switching event is detected.


Table 5-7 describes the parameters for the OCh Ring protection.

Table 5-7 Parameters for the OCh Ring Protection


Protection Type OCh Ring protection


(WRT)




Return mode





channel resumes.




5-22 Version: A


Table 5-7 Parameters for the OCh Ring Protection (Continued)




Not Configured.



Hold-off time


switchover.






As shown in Figure 5-15, the ring network is composed of six nodes. From outside

to inside, the four rings are respectively defined as ring 1 to ring 4. The wavelength

corresponding to ring 1 and ring 2 is λ1, and the wavelength corresponding to ring 3

and ring 4 is λ2. The solid lines in the figure indicate the Tx and Rx of the working

channel, and the dotted lines indicate the Tx and Rx of the protection channel.

The protection requires four line interface cards at each station, where two line

interface cards are used as east working and protection line interface cards and two

line interface cards are used as west working and protection line interface cards.

East line interface card 1 processes the signals transmitted over the east working

channel and received by the protection channel, as shown in the amplified diagram

of node 1 in Figure 5-15.

Assume that one service exists between nodes 1 and 3, and between nodes 5 and

6 respectively. Under normal conditions, the service route between nodes 1 and 3 is

the working channel of nodes 1↔2↔3, and the service route between nodes 5 and

6 is the working channel of nodes 5↔6.

Version: A 5-23


Figure 5-15 OCh Ring Protection

When a fault occurs in the working channel of nodes 1↔2 in Figure 5-15, the

service between nodes 5 and 6 will not be influenced, but the service between

nodes 1 and 3 will be influenced.

When nodes 1 and 2 detect that the switchover condition is met, they send the APS

information to node 3. Meanwhile, node 1 and node 3 check whether the protection

channel between nodes 1↔2↔3 is normal. If the channel is normal, nodes 1, 2, and

3 perform bridging and switchover. At this time, the service route between node 1

and node 3 is changed to the protection channel between nodes 1↔2↔3. The

protection route is in the same direction as the original service route and is a near

end switchover route, as shown in Figure 5-16.

5-24 Version: A


Figure 5-16 Near End Switching in OCh Ring Protection

If both the working channel and protection channel between nodes 1↔2 are faulty,

services between nodes 5 and 6 are not affected while services between nodes 1

and 3 are affected. At this time, the service route between nodes 1 and 3 is changed

to the remote protection route. The protection channel between nodes

1↔6↔5↔4↔3 is adopted. See Figure 5-17.

Version: A 5-25


Figure 5-17 Far End Switching in OCh Ring Protection


SF (signal failure) conditions: line optical signal loss (LOS) and SF conditions of the

OTUk layer and ODUk layer, such as alarms OTU_LOF, ODU_AIS, ODU_OCI,

ODU_LCK, PM_AIS, and TCMi_AIS.

SD (signal deterioration) condition: error degradation based on OTUk section

monitoring such as PM_BIP8_SD, TCMi_BIP8_SD, and FEC_D_SD alarms.

5.2.4 ODUk 1+1 Protection


implementation, and switching trigger conditions of the ODUk 1+1 protection of the


5-26 Version: A


Overview

For the ODUk 1+1 protection, the dual-feeding and selective-receiving is

implemented via the electrical layer cross-connect within a switching time less than

50 ms.

The principles for the ODUk 1+1 protection are similar to those for the OCh 1+1

Protection. The difference is that the OCh 1+1 Protection is based on a single

optical channel, while the ODUk 1+1 protection is based on the ODUk timeslot in

the optical channel. The protected granularity of the ODUk 1+1 protection is smaller

than that of the former.


Table 5-8 describes the parameters for the ODUk 1+1 protection.

Table 5-8 Parameters for the ODUk 1+1 Protection


Protection Type ODUk 1+1 protection


(WRT)




Return mode





channel resumes.

u Non-revertive: After the work channel is faulty and services

are switched over to the protection channel, the services still

work on the protection channel if the work channel resumes.


The monitoring type includes SNCP/I, SNCP/N, SNCP/S, and Not

Configured.


vary with the monitoring types. For details about the triggering

alarms corresponding to the monitoring types, see

Troubleshooting Guide.

Version: A 5-27


Table 5-8 Parameters for the ODUk 1+1 Protection (Continued)


Hold-off time


switchover.

u If the original line recovers (the original alarm is cleared)

within the hold-off time, switchover is not performed.



Mode



the receive end of the local NE is switched over to the

interface card of the protection line, and the opposite end NE

does not perform any action.

u Bidirectional protection: When the working channel is faulty,

the receive and the transmit ends of the local NE are switched

over to the protection line interface card, and the transmit and

the receive ends of the opposite NE are also switched over to

the protection line interface card.


On the local end, one signal to be protected from the local tributary card is dual-fed

by the cross-connect card and is cross-connected to the active and standby line

cards by the cross-connect card. The line card multiplexes the signal to be

protected and other signals and forwards the signals to the corresponding optical

channel, as shown in Figure 5-18.

The signal to be protected is demultiplexed from the optical channel signals

corresponding to the active and standby line cards at the opposite end and is sent to

the cross-connect card.

u In normal conditions, the cross-connect card cross-connects the to-be-

protected signal from the main line card to the corresponding tributary card.

u If the working ODUk channel is faulty, the main line card feeds back the SF /

SD information to the CCU card according to the monitoring type, and the

cross-connect card cross-connects the signal from the standby line card to the

corresponding tributary card.

5-28 Version: A


u When the working ODUk channel restores, the service signals can be restored

to the working ODUk channel or not according to the revert type configured on

the EMS.

Figure 5-18 ODUk 1+1 Protection


The ODUk 1+1 protection includes three monitoring types: SNCP/I, SNCP/N, and

SNCP/S. The three modes differ from each other in switching trigger conditions.










5.2.5 ODUk m:n Protection


implementation, and switching trigger conditions of the ODUk m:n protection of the


Version: A 5-29


Overview

The ODUk m:n protection is achieved by using the electrical layer cross-connect

and APS protocol. The protection switchover is shorter than 50 ms. m indicates the

number of protection ODUks and n indicates the number of working ODUks.

The principles for the ODUk m:n protection are similar to those for the OCh m:n

Protection. The difference is that the OCh m:n Protection is based on a single

optical channel, while the ODUk m:n protection is based on the ODUk timeslot in the

optical channel. The protected granularity of the ODUk m:n protection is smaller



Table 5-9 describes the parameters for the ODUk m:n protection.

Table 5-9 Parameters for the ODUk m:n Protection


Protection Type ODUk m:n protection


(WRT)




Return mode





channel resumes.






Configured.



5-30 Version: A


Table 5-9 Parameters for the ODUk m:n Protection (Continued)


Hold-off time


switchover.





Mode



the receive / transmit end of the local NE is switched over to

the protection line interface card, and the transmit / receive

end of the opposite NE is switched over to the protection line

interface card.

u Bidirectional protection: When the working channel is faulty,

the receive and the transmit ends of the local NE are switched

over to the protection line interface card, and the transmit and

the receive ends of the opposite NE are also switched over to

the protection line interface card.


Here the ODUk 1:2 protection is used as an example to describe the protection

principles.

Assume that two ODUk signals to be protected are transmitted to the far end via the

working line card 1 and card 2 respectively. In practical application, the two ODUk

signals to be protected can also be transmitted to the far end via the same working

line card.

Under normal conditions, at the local end, the to-be-protected signals from the

tributary card are cross-connected via the cross-connect card and sent to the

working line card 1 and card 2. After being multiplexed with other signals by the

working line cards, the signals are forwarded to the corresponding optical channel,

as shown in Figure 5-19.

Version: A 5-31


At the far end, the working line cards 1 and 2 demultiplex the corresponding optical

channel signals into the signals which are to be protected, and send them to the

cross-connect cards. After being cross-connected by the cross-connect cards, the

signals are sent to the corresponding tributary cards. This process is single-feeding

and single-receiving of the working channel.

Figure 5-19 ODUk 1:2 Protection (Normal)

Figure 5-20 shows the fault conditions. For example, upon detection of the trigger

condition, the opposite end working line card 2 feeds back the SF/SD information to

the CCU card according to the monitoring type configured for the protection.

u The opposite end equipment sends back the APS information to the local end.

The local CCU card controls the line card to perform bridging according to the

APS protocol. The cross-connect card cross-connects the to-be-protected

signal of the working line card 2 to the specified channel of the protection line

card.

u The opposite end CCU card controls the line card to perform switchover

according to the APS protocol, and the cross-connect card cross-connects the

signal from the protection line card to the corresponding tributary card.

u The ODUk signals to be protected on the working optical channel 2 are

transmitted over the protection optical channel. In other words, switchover is

required on both the local and far ends when a fault occurs.

5-32 Version: A


u When the working ODUk channel restores, the service signals can be restored

to the working ODUk channel or not according to the revert type configured on

the EMS.

Figure 5-20 ODUk 1:2 Protection (Switching)


The ODUk m:n protection includes three monitoring types: SNCP/I, SNCP/N, and

SNCP/S. The three modes differ from each other in switching trigger conditions.










Version: A 5-33


5.2.6 ODUk Ring Protection


implementation, and switching trigger conditions of the ODUk Ring protection of the


Overview

The ODUk Ring protection is the ring network protection based on the ODUk optical

channel. This protection is more applicable to networks with distributed services.

When no extra services exist in the protection channel, all nodes are available, and

the length of fiber is less than 1200 km, the protection switching can be

implemented within 50 ms once a switching event is detected.

The principles for the ODUk Ring protection are similar to those for the OCh Ring

Protection. The differences is that OCh Ring Protection is based on a single optical

channel, while the ODUk Ring protection is based on the ODUk timeslot in the

optical channel. The protected granularity of the ODUk Ring protection is smaller



Table 5-10 describes the parameters for the ODUk Ring protection.

Table 5-10 Parameters for the ODUk Ring Protection


Protection Type ODUk Ring protection


(WRT)




Return mode





channel resumes.




5-34 Version: A


Table 5-10 Parameters for the ODUk Ring Protection (Continued)




Configured.



Hold-off time


switchover.






An ODUk Ring consists of nodes 1 to 6; in this figure, the solid lines are the working

channels, and the dotted lines are protection channels.

The protection requires four line interface cards on each station, where two line

interface cards are used as east working and protection line interface cards and two

line interface cards are used as west working and protection line interface cards. An

ODUk timeslot is specified in each line interface card to form an ODUk ring.

As Figure 5-21 shows, an ODUk service exists between Nodes 1 and 2 as well as

between Nodes 4 and 6 respectively. Under normal conditions, the service route

between node 1 and node 2 is the working channel of nodes 1↔2, and the service

route between node 4 and node 6 is the working channel of nodes 4↔5↔6.

Version: A 5-35


Figure 5-21 ODUk Ring Protection

When a fault occurs in the working channel of nodes 1↔2, the service between

nodes 4 and 6 will not be influenced, but the service between nodes 1 and 2 will be

influenced.

When nodes 1 and 2 detect that the fault meets the switchover condition, they

mutually transmit the APS information and perform bridging and switchover. The

service route between nodes 1 and 2 is the protection channel between node

1↔node 2. The protection route is in the same direction as the original service route

and is the near end route, as shown in Figure 5-22.

5-36 Version: A


Figure 5-22 Near End Switching in ODUk Ring Protection

When faults occur in both the working channel and protection channel of nodes

1↔2, the service between nodes 4 and 6 will not be influenced, but the service

between nodes 1 and 2 will be influenced. At this time, services of nodes 1 and 2

are carried over the remote end protection route (in the reverse direction of the

original service route) according to APS protocol, and the protection channel of

nodes 1↔6↔5↔4↔3↔2 is used, as shown in Figure 5-23.

Version: A 5-37


Figure 5-23 Remote End Switching in ODUk Ring Protection


The conditions for triggering the protection switchover are mainly the ODUk layer

alarms, for example, RS_LOF, RS_SD, OTU_LOF, ODU_AIS, ODU_OCI,

ODU_LCK, and PM_BIP8_SD.

5.2.7 Optical Channel 1+1 Wavelength Protection

The optical channel 1+1 protection is implemented via the OCP card. Each OCP

card supports two optical channel 1+1 protection groups. The principles and

methods of the two protection groups are the same. One group is used as an

example to describe the overview, protection parameters, function implementation,

and switchover trigger conditions of optical channel 1+1 wavelength protection.

5-38 Version: A


Overview

In the optical channel 1+1 wavelength protection, the OCP card is located between

the client side equipment and the tributary card, as shown in Figure 5-24. Through

the dual-feeding and selective-receiving function of the OCP card, the client signal

is sent to different service cards, that is, the service data is dual-fed to channels with

different wavelengths, thereby avoiding service interruption due to single service

card failure.


Table 5-11 lists the parameters for optical channel 1+1 wavelength protection.

Table 5-11 Parameters for Optical Channel 1+1 Wavelength Protection


Switching type Optical channel 1+1 wavelength protection

Revert mode Revertive or non-revertive Note 1


Note 1: The revert mode is determined by the actual configuration on the EMS.


As shown in Figure 5-24, in the service Tx direction, the OCP card dual feeds the

client signal to different service cards for processing. Two processed signals are

respectively sent to the local active and standby line OMUs and are then sent to the

opposite end over different optical lines after being multiplexed and amplified.

In the service Rx direction, the OCP card monitors the signal quality of the working

and protection channels according to the monitoring mode and alarm thresholds set

on the EMS, and determines whether to perform switching based on the alarms

such as ILS, SF (signal failure), and SD (signal deterioration).

Version: A 5-39


In normal situations, the OCP card sends the signals output by the corresponding

active line service card to the client. When detecting that the active wavelength

channel is faulty and the standby wavelength channel is normal (generally due to

the fault, the laser at the client side may be closed by the tributary card, thereby

triggering the switching of the OCP card), the OCP card sends the signals output by

the corresponding standby line service card to the client. When the active channel

recovers, the service signals can be determined whether to restore to the active

channel according to the revert type preconfigured on the EMS.

Figure 5-24 Optical Channel 1+1 Wavelength Protection


The conditions for triggering the optical channel wavelength protection are as

follows:

u ILS alarm: By default, the ILS alarm threshold is set to –25 dBm (the ILS alarm

threshold can be set on the EMS). In actual applications, the ILS threshold is

generally 5 dBm lower than the normal receiving optical power of the active /

standby optical interface of the protection card.

u Channel failure alarm, including the SF and SD:

5-40 Version: A


4 The SF alarms include OTUk layer alarms and ODUk T (TCMi) layer

alarms, such as OTN_LOF, ODUk_AIS, ODUk_OCI, ODUk_LCK, PM_AIS,

and TCMi_AIS.

4 The SD alarms include the alarms generated by monitoring the OTUk layer

and ODUk P/T layer errors, such as PM_BIP8_SD, TCMi_BIP8_SD, and

FEC_D_SD.

5.2.8 Optical Channel 1+1 Route Protection

The optical channel 1+1 protection is implemented via the OCP card. Each OCP

card supports two optical channel 1+1 protection groups. The principles and

methods of the two protection groups are the same. One group is used as an

example to describe the overview, protection parameters, function implementation,

and switching trigger conditions of the optical channel 1+1 route protection.

Overview

In this mode, the OCP cards are installed between the OTU cards and the ODU/

OMU cards. With the dual-feeding and selective-receiving function of the OCP

cards, the signals of specific wavelength from the service cards are sent to different

OMUs, i.e., the services are sent to different cable routes to implement the complete

service protection between the service cards at the local and opposite ends.


Table 5-12 shows parameters for optical channel 1+1 route protection.

Table 5-12 Parameters for Optical Channel 1+1 Route Protection


Switching type Optical channel 1+1 route protection




Version: A 5-41



As Figure 5-25 shows, in the service Tx direction, the OCP card sends the signals,

which have gone through wavelength conversion via the OTU cards, to OMUs of the

active and standby lines respectively. After being multiplexed and amplified, the

signals are transmitted to the far end via different optical lines.

In the service Rx direction, the OCP card monitors the signal quality of the working

and protection channels according to the monitoring mode and alarm thresholds set

on the EMS, and determines whether to perform switching based on the alarms

such as ILS, SF (signal failure), and SD (signal deterioration).

In normal situations, the OCP card sends the wavelength signals output by the

corresponding active line ODUs to the service card. When detecting that the active

wavelength channel is faulty and the standby wavelength channel is normal, the

OCP card sends the wavelength signals output by the corresponding standby line

ODUs to the client. When the active channel recovers, the service signals can be

determined whether to be restored to the active channel according to the revert type

preconfigured on the EMS.

Figure 5-25 Optical Channel 1+1 Route Protection

5-42 Version: A



The conditions for triggering the optical channel wavelength protection are as

follows:

u ILS alarm: By default, the ILS alarm threshold is set to –25 dBm (the ILS alarm

threshold can be set on the EMS). In actual applications, the ILS threshold is

generally 5 dBm lower than the normal receiving optical power of the active /

standby optical interface of the protection card.

u Channel failure alarm, including the SF and SD:

4 The SF alarms include OTUk layer alarms and ODUk T (TCMi) layer

alarms, such as OTN_LOF, ODUk_AIS, ODUk_OCI, ODUk_LCK, PM_AIS,

and TCMi_AIS.

4 The SD alarms include the alarms generated by monitoring the OTUk layer

and ODUk P/T layer errors, such as PM_BIP8_SD, TCMi_BIP8_SD, and

FEC_D_SD.

5.2.9 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection

The following describes the overview, parameters, function implementation, and

switching trigger conditions of the 1+1 optical multiplex section protection.

Overview

The FONST 5000 U series of products provide OMSP card-based 1+1 optical

multiplex section protection and the protection switching time is less than 50 ms.

This protection covers an area between the local OMUs and ODUs in the far end or

between the local and far end optical add and drop multiplexing units to avoid

service interruption caused by the optical amplification unit failure, optical fiber line

degradation, or fiber interruption.

Version: A 5-43


Note:

The 1+1 optical multiplex section protection is implemented depending

on the received optical power. When only a few channels (fewer than four

channels) exist in the line, the optical power will be influenced

significantly. Therefore, the optical channel protection, rather than 1+1

optical multiplex section protection, is recommended.


Table 5-13 shows parameters for the 1+1 optical multiplex section protection.

Table 5-13 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection


Switching type 1+1 optical multiplex section protection





Figure 5-26 illustrates the 1+1 optical multiplex section protection.

In the service transmitting direction, the multiplexed signals are dual fed by the

OMSP card to the active and standby optical lines.

In the service receiving direction, the OMSP card ascertains the output signal power

from the PA card of the active and standby lines. In normal situations, the OMSP

card sends the output signals from the active line PA card to the ODU. When

detecting an ILS alarm (the ILS alarm threshold can be set on the EMS) generated

on the active line while the standby line is normal, the OMSP card sends the output

signals from the standby line PA card to the ODU. When the active channel

recovers, the service signals can be chosen whether to be restored to the active

channel according to the revert type preconfigured on the EMS.

5-44 Version: A


Figure 5-26 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection


The ILS alarm (the ILS alarm threshold can be set on the EMS). By default, the ILS

alarm threshold is +3 dBm. In actual applications, the ILS threshold is 5 dBm lower

than the normal received optical power of the active / standby optical interface of the

protection card.

5.2.10 Optical Line 1:1 / 1+1 Protection


implementation, and switching trigger conditions of the optical line 1:1 / 1+1

protection of the FONST 5000 U series of products.

Version: A 5-45


Overview

The FONST 5000 U series of products provide OLP card-based optical line

protection. The OLP card is in the optical line segment, multiplexes and

demultiplexes the OSC signal and main optical signal, and monitors the received

optical signals. The OLP card provides 1:1 / 1+1 protection for the optical fibers in

the segment according to the monitoring results and 1:1 / 1+1 protection and

switching protocols, thereby avoiding service interruption due to optical fiber line

deterioration or interruption.


Table 5-14 describes the parameters for the line 1:1 / 1+1 protection.

Table 5-14 Optical Line 1:1 / 1+1 Protection Parameters


Protection function Note 1Unidirectional protection

Bidirectional protection

Hold-off time (one hundred

milliseconds)0 (default)

Recovery type Note 2 3 minutes (default)


Note 1: The protection functions are determined by the actual configuration on the EMS.

Note 2: When the revert type is set to No recovery, the protection is in the non-revertive mode.

1:1 Protection Function Implementation

Figure 5-27 shows the line 1:1 protection.

u In Tx direction: The OLP card multiplexes the optical supervisory signal of the

OSC card and the main channel optical signal of the OA card, and sends the

multiplexed signal to the active line or standby line over the intra-card optical

switch according to the 1:1 protection switching protocol.

u In Rx direction: The OLP card makes decisions on the power of the active and

standby line signals.

5-46 Version: A


In normal situations, the OLP card receives the active line signals. When

detecting the ILS alarm for the active line, the OLP card switches the

transmitting and receiving to the standby line by using the APS protocol.

Meanwhile, the OLP card splits the received signals to obtain the main channel

optical signal and optical supervisory signal, sends the main channel optical

signal to the PA card, and outputs the optical supervisory signal to the OSC

card.

1+1 Protection Function Implementation

Figure 5-27 shows the line 1+1 protection.

u In Tx direction: The OLP card multiplexes the optical supervisory signal of the

OSC card and the main channel optical signal of the OA card, and sends the

multiplexed signal to the active and standby line optical fibers.

u In Rx direction: The OLP card makes decisions on the power of the active and

standby line signals.

In normal situations, the OLP card receives the active line signal. When

detecting the ILS alarm for the active line, the OLP card receives the line signal

from the standby line. Meanwhile, the OLP card splits the received signals to

obtain the main channel optical signal and optical supervisory signal, sends the

main channel optical signal to the PA card, and outputs the optical supervisory

signal to the OSC card.

Figure 5-27 Optical Line 1:1/1+1 Protection

Version: A 5-47



ILS alarm for the OLP card (the receiving no light threshold can be set on the EMS).

By default, the receiving no light threshold is set to -30 dBm. In actual applications,

the receiving no light threshold is set to normal receiving optical power - 5 dBm.

5.2.11 Ethernet LAG Protection


implementation, and switching trigger conditions of the Ethernet LAG protection of

the FONST 5000 U series of products.

Overview

The LAG is a method for binding a group of physical Ethernet interfaces with the

same rate as a logical interface to increase bandwidth and protect links. The

FONST 5000 U series of products support the UNILAG protection.

The Ethernet LAG protection can achieve the load balancing of ports. The ports of

the aggregation members are not in the active / standby mode. The FONST 5000 U

series of products can achieve intra-card LAG protection. When any port is faulty,

service packets are distributed to other ports for transmission.


Table 5-15 describes the parameters for the Ethernet LAG protection.

Table 5-15 Ethernet LAG Protection Parameters


Aggregation modeSource MAC-based, destination MAC-based, and source and

destination MAC-based

Revert mode Revertive


The LAG can achieve the following functions:

5-48 Version: A


u Improving the link availability: In the port aggregation group, members back up

each other dynamically. When a port is faulty, other members can immediately

take over its services. The process for enabling the backup for port aggregation

is only associated with the ports in the aggregation group.

u Increasing link capacity: The port aggregation group can provide an economic

method for improving the link transmission rate. By binding multiple physical

ports, the user can obtain higher bandwidth without upgrading the existing

equipment. The capacity is the sum of the capacities of all physical links.

Figure 5-28 shows the Ethernet LAG protection supported by the FONST 5000 U

series of products.

Figure 5-28 Port Aggregation Protection

Switching Trigger Condition

Any link is faulty.

5.3 Network Management Information Protection

On the transport network, the network management information is transmitted over

the supervisory channel. Generally, the supervisory channel and service channel

use the unified physical channel. When the physical channel fails, the supervisory

channel will also fail, which causes out-of-management of partial NEs.

The FONST 5000 U series of products support the following network management

information protection modes.

Version: A 5-49


Network Management Information Protection in Ring Network Mode

When a certain optical path fails (such as the optical cable is damaged), the network

management information can automatically be transmitted over the supervisory

channel in another direction of ring network, so as to avoid affecting the entire

network management. This protection mode is included in the ring network

protection, and users do not need to add equipment sets or lines, as shown in

Figure 5-29.

Figure 5-29 Network Management Information Protection in Ring Network Mode

The ring network protection cannot avoid the NE out-of-management caused by the

failure of multiple optical paths in the ring network.

Standby Network Management Channel Protection

In an optical fiber ring network, if multiple optical paths fail, or a certain optical path

in the point-to-point or chain network fails, partial NEs will be out of management.

The network administrator, however, cannot obtain the supervisory information of

the failed stations or operate these stations. To avoid this condition, the network

administrator should set up the standby network management channel.

The FONST 5000 U series of products can provide the standby network

management information channel over the data communication network. Access

the NE needing the network management information protection in the data

communication network via a router, and set up the standby network management

information channel.

5-50 Version: A


When the network operates normally, the network management information is

transmitted via the active management channel. When the active management

channel fails, the network management information of the failed NE will be

automatically switched to the standby network management information channel for

transmission, as shown in Figure 5-30 and Figure 5-31.

Figure 5-30 Working and Protection Supervisory Channels - Normal

Version: A 5-51


Figure 5-31 Working and Protection Supervisory Channels - Faulty

5-52 Version: A

6 Application of Service Grooming

The following uses typical examples to introduce the application of FONST 5000 U

series of products in optical layer wavelength and electrical layer sub-wavelength

service grooming.

Optical Layer Grooming

Electrical Layer Grooming

Version: A 6-1


6.1 Optical Layer Grooming

The following describes the optical layer grooming of the FONST 5000 U series of

products, including the FOADM and ROADM applications.

6.1.1 Application of FOADM

The following uses a ring network as an example to describe the application of the

FOADM.


Generally, the FOADM is applied on the intermediate station in a chain or ring

network to implement the termination of local services and pass-through of signals

in the east and west directions.

Network Diagram

As shown in Figure 6-1, a ring network is composed of four stations (A, B, C and D)

in a project.

Figure 6-1 Application of FOADM – Network Diagram

6-2 Version: A


Service Demand

In this example, eight OTU2 services and eight OTU3 services are required

between station A and station B and between station A and station C respectively.

The eight OTU3 services are both required between station A and station D and

between station B and station C. The 1+1 backup is required in both directions for

each wavelength service.

Based on the previous analysis, the wavelength assignment between stations in this

example is shown in Figure 6-2.

Figure 6-2 Application of FOADM – Service Demand

Signal Flow

u Station A

See Figure 6-3 for the signal flow corresponding to Station A.

Version: A 6-3


Figure 6-3 Application of FOADM – Signal Flow at Station A

u Station B

See Figure 6-4 for the signal flow corresponding to Station B.

6-4 Version: A


Figure 6-4 Application of FOADM – Signal Flow at Station B

u Station C and Station D

The signal flow of Station C and Station D is similar to that of Station B, only

different in adding / dropping and pass-through wavelength. Station C requires

adding / dropping of Channels 17 to 32 and Channels 41 to 48 as well as pass-

through of Channels 1 to 16 and Channels 33 to 40. Station D requires adding /

dropping of the Channels 33 to 40 as well as pass-through of Channels 1 to 32

and Channels 41 to 48.

Version: A 6-5


6.1.2 Application of ROADM

In the following, the service grooming in four directions is used as an example to

describe the application of the ROADM.


It is advisable to use N WSS8D and N WSS8M cards for the station that requires

dynamic wavelength grooming in N directions (N≤8) and configure one WSS8D

card and one WSS8M card in each direction for service adding / dropping and

multiplexing in the corresponding direction.

As shown in Figure 6-5, service grooming is required between west 2 and either of

east 2, east 1, and west 1. After learning the service grooming direction of this case,

you can understand the service grooming method between east 2, east 1 or west 1

and other direction.

Network Diagram

As shown in Figure 6-5, a star network is formed by Stations A, B, C, D, and E in a

project. Station A is an ROADM with four WSS8D cards and four WSS8M cards,

and the other stations are OTMs.

Figure 6-5 Application of ROADM – Network Diagram

6-6 Version: A


Service Demand

In this example, eight services are to be established between Station A and other

stations, and four services are to be established between Station E and Stations B,

C and D respectively. See Figure 6-6 for the wavelength assignment between

stations.

Figure 6-6 Application of ROADM – Service Demand

Signal Flow

u Station A

The signal flows of dropping and adding services corresponding to Station A

are shown in Figure 6-7 and Figure 6-8 respectively. The optical transponder

unit corresponding to the 1st to the 44th services and the OSC and OSCAD

units in each direction are omitted in the figure. See Application of FOADM for

information about the signal flow of the omitted part.

Version: A 6-7


Figure 6-7 Application of ROADM – Dropping Signal Flow at Station A

6-8 Version: A


Figure 6-8 Application of ROADM – Adding Signal Flow at Station A

The following describes the signal flow in the W2 and E2 directions. The signal

flow in the W1 and E1 directions is similar to that in the E2 direction.

4 In the Rx end of W2 direction

Services from the W2 line are input via the LI port of the WSS8D card (W2),

including services of Stations E→ A as well as through-connected

services of Stations E→ B, Stations E→ C, and Stations E→ D at Station

A.

The eight services from Station E to Station A pass through the D1 port of

the local card, the ODU, the line card (Rx), the cross-connect card, and the

interface card (Tx) in sequence and are terminated at the local station.

Version: A 6-9


Services of the 33rd to 36th channels from Station E to Station B, the 37th

to 40th channels from Station E to Station C, and the 41st to 44th channels

from Station E to Station D pass transparently through Station A and are

sent to the “MI” ports of the WSS8M (W1), WSS8M (E1) and WSS8M (E2)

cards respectively via the ports "D7", "D6", and "D8" of the WSS8D (W2)

card, as indicated by the bold lines in Figure 6-7.

4 In the Tx end of W2 direction

Services transmitted in the W2 direction include services of Stations A→ E,

Stations B→ E, Stations C→ E, and Stations D→ E. Services of the 25th

to the 32nd channels from Station A to Station E, after being multiplexed

by the OMU, are sent to the A1 port on the WSS8M (W2) card.

Services of the 33rd to 36th channels from Station B to Station E, the 37th

to 40th channels from Station C to Station E, and the 41st to 44th channels

from Station D to Station E pass transparently through Station A, and are

sent to the ports A7, A6 and A8 of the WSS8M (W2) card via the MO ports

of the WSS8D (W1), WSS8D (E1) and WSS8D (E2) cards respectively, as

indicated by the bold lines in Figure 6-8.

The aforesaid services are multiplexed by the WSS8M (W2) card, and

outputted via the LO port on the card to the line.

4 In the E2 direction

The services of channels 17 to 24 from Station D to Station A and services

of channels 41 to 44 from Station D to Station E are input from the LI

interface of the WSS8D (E2) card. The services from Station D to Station A

are demultiplexed on the WSS8D card and are output via the D1 to D8

interfaces and terminated at the local station after passing the line card Rx

→ the cross-connect card→ the tributary card Tx. The services from

Station D to Station E are directly sent to the A8 interface of the WSS8M

(W2) card via the MO interface.

The services of channels 17 to 24 from Station A to Station D are input

from interfaces A1 to A8 of the WSS8M (E2) card, and are multiplexed with

the services, input from the MI interface, of channels 41 to 44 from Station

E to Station D. Then, the WSS8M (E2) card outputs the multiplexed

signals to the line via the LO interface.

u Station B

6-10 Version: A


The signal flow of Station B is shown in Figure 6-9.

Figure 6-9 Application of ROADM – Signal Flow at Station B

In the Tx direction, the signals over channels 1 to 8 from Station B to Station A

and the signals over channels 33 to 36 from Station B to Station E are

multiplexed by the OMU, amplified by the OA, and then output to the line; in the

Rx direction, the signals over channels 1 to 8 from Station A to Station B and

the signals over channels 33 to 36 from Station E to Station B are

demultiplexed by the ODU, transmitted over the line card Rx, the cross-connect

card, and the tributary card Tx, and finally output to the equipment on the client

side.

u Stations C, D and E

The signal flow of Stations C, D and E is basically the same as that of Station B,

only different in the adding / dropping wavelengths, and we will not go further

on this issue here.

6.2 Electrical Layer Grooming

The following describes the centralized electrical layer grooming of the FONST


Version: A 6-11


6.2.1 Application of Electrical Layer Grooming

The following describes the electrical grooming application scenarios.

Pass-through of Client Side Services at Local Station

Services are input from a client side port of the local station and are output to

another client side port. The service transmission does not involve the optical fiber

lines, as shown in Figure 6-10.

Figure 6-10 Pass-through of Client Side Services at Local Station

Service Add/Drop Line on the Client Side

This is the most common mode of electrical layer grooming. In this mode, services

from other stations are transmitted to the local station via the optical fiber line and

then output. Or, the client services are input at the local station, and then transmitted

to other stations via the optical fiber line, as shown in Figure 6-11.

6-12 Version: A


Figure 6-11 Service Add/Drop Line on the Client Side

Pass-Through of Line Side Services at Local Station

The services are not added / dropped at the local station. The local station serves

as a regeneration station to transmit the services from the optical fiber line on one

side to the optical fiber line on the other side, as shown in Figure 6-12.

Figure 6-12 Pass-Through of Line Side Services at Local Station

6.2.2 Examples of Electrical Grooming (OTN)

The following describes the electrical grooming and configuration methods of OTN

application of the FONST 5000 U series of products using examples.

Version: A 6-13


Network Diagram

In a project, stations A, B, C, D, and E form a chain network, as shown in

Figure 6-13.

Figure 6-13 Network Diagram – Example of Electrical Layer Grooming Application (OTN)

Service Demand

u 320 GE services are provisioned between stations A and B.

u Six OTU3 services are provisioned between stations A and E.

u Eight OTU4 services are provisioned between stations A and E.

u Forty 10GE services are provisioned between stations B and D.

u Six OTU3 services are provisioned between stations B and D.

u 320 GE services are provisioned between stations D and E.

Demand Analysis

The analysis of the electrical layer service wavelength distribution for stations A and

E is as follows:

u 320 GE services require twenty 16TN1 cards and four 1LN4 cards and occupy

four 100 Gbit/s channels.

u Six OTU3 services require six 1TO3 cards and three 1LN4 cards and occupy

three 100 Gbit/s channels.

u Eight OTU4 services require eight 1TN4 cards and eight 1LN4 cards and

occupy eight 100 Gbit/s channels.

6-14 Version: A


The analysis of the electrical layer service wavelength distribution for stations B and

D is as follows:

u 320 GE services require twenty 16TN1 cards and four 1LN4 cards and occupy


u Forty 10GE services require two 20TP2 cards and four 1LN4 cards and occupy


u Six OTU3 services require six 1TO3 cards and three 1LN4 cards and occupy

three 100 Gbit/s channels.

Figure 6-14 shows the wavelength distribution between stations.

Figure 6-14 Service Demand – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (OTN)

Card Configuration

Station A and station E use the FONST 5000 U60 subrack and the COTP subrack.

Figure 6-15 shows the card configuration.

Version: A 6-15


Figure 6-15 Card Slot Configuration at Stations A and E – Electrical Layer Grooming

Application (OTN)

Station B and station D use the FONST 5000 U40 subrack and the COTP subrack.

Figure 6-16 shows the card configuration.

6-16 Version: A


Figure 6-16 Card Slot Configuration at Stations B and D – Electrical Layer Grooming

Application (OTN)

Station C uses the COTP subrack. Figure 6-17 shows the card configuration.

Figure 6-17 Card Slot Configuration at Station C – Electrical Layer Grooming Application

(OTN)

Version: A 6-17


Signal Flow

u Station A

The signal flow of Station A is shown in Figure 6-18. According to the service

requirements, station A adds and drops 15 services from stations B and E. The

wavelength services of the ODU48-O card are not highlighted. The signal flow

of the ODU48-O card is similar to that of the VMU48-O card but is in a reverse

direction.

Figure 6-18 Signal Flow at Station A – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (OTN)

The signal flow of station A is as follows:

4 The 320 GE service signals from the client side equipment undergo the O /

E conversion implemented by twenty 16TN1 cards and are processed into

320 ODU0 signals and sent to the cross-connect card. Based on the EMS

configuration, the cross-connect card sends the 320 ODU0 signals to four

1LN4 cards. After being multiplexed and converted by the 1LN4 cards to

100G signals with one to four wavelengths, the signals are sent to the

VMU48-O card.

6-18 Version: A


4 The six OTU3 service signals from the client side equipment undergo the

O / E conversion implemented by six 1TO3 cards and are processed into

six ODU3 signals and sent to the cross-connect card. Based on the EMS

configuration, the cross-connect card sends the six ODU3 signals to three

1LN4 cards. After being multiplexed and converted by the 1LN4 cards to

100G signals with 12 to 14 wavelengths, the signals are sent to the

VMU48-O card.

4 The eight OTU4 service signals from the client side equipment undergo the

O / E conversion implemented by eight 1TN4 cards and are processed into

eight ODU4 signals and sent to the cross-connect card. Based on the EMS

configuration, the cross-connect card sends the eight ODU4 signals to

eight 1LN4 cards. After being multiplexed and converted by the 1LN4

cards to 100G signals with 15 to 22 wavelengths, the signals are sent to

the VMU48-O card.

The VMU48-O card multiplexes all wavelength signals, and then the OA card

amplifies the signals. After being multiplexed with the supervisory signals from

the OSC card by the OSCAD card, the signals are output to the line.

The signal flow in the Rx direction is a reverse process of the signal flow in the

Tx direction.

u Station B

The signal flow of Station B is shown in Figure 6-19. According to the service

requirements, station B needs to add and drop four services from station A and

seven services from station D, and pass through 11 services of stations A and

E.

Version: A 6-19


Figure 6-19 Signal Flow at Station B – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (OTN)

The signal flow of station B is as follows:

4 Add and drop services:

¡ The 320 GE service signals from the client side equipment undergo

the O / E conversion implemented by twenty 16TN1 cards and are

processed into 320 ODU0 signals and sent to the cross-connect card.

Based on the EMS configuration, the cross-connect card sends the

320 ODU0 signals to four 1LN4 cards. After being multiplexed and

converted by the 1LN4 cards to 100G signals with one to four

wavelengths, the signals are sent to the west VMU48-O card.

6-20 Version: A


¡ The forty 10GE LAN service signals from the client side equipment

undergo the O / E conversion implemented by two 20TP2 cards and

are processed into 40 ODU2 signals that are sent to the cross-

connect card. Based on the EMS configuration, the cross-connect

card sends the forty ODU2 signals to four 1LN4 cards. After being

multiplexed and converted by the 1LN4 cards to 100G signals with

five to eight wavelengths, the signals are sent to the west VMU48-O

card.

¡ The six OTU3 service signals from the client side equipment undergo

the O / E conversion implemented by six 1TO3 cards and are

processed into six ODU3 signals and sent to the cross-connect card.

Based on the EMS configuration, the cross-connect card sends the

six ODU3 signals to three 1LN4 cards. After being multiplexed and

converted by the 1LN4 cards to 100G signals with 9 to 11

wavelengths, the signals are sent to the VMU48-O card.

The signal flow in the Rx direction is a reverse process of the signal flow in

the Tx direction.

4 Pass-through services:

¡ From west to east

The 12th to 22nd channel of services from the line in the west

direction (from station A) are amplified by the PA card and sent to the

ODU48-O card in the west direction and to the VMU48-O card in the

east direction over the intra-station fiber pigtail.

The VMU48-O card in the east direction multiplexes all wavelength

signals and then the OA card in the east direction amplifies the signals.

After being multiplexed with the supervisory signals from the OSC

card by the OSCAD card in the east direction, the signals are output to

the line in the east direction.

¡ From east to west

The signal flow from east to west is a reverse process of the signal

flow from west to east.

u Station C

Version: A 6-21


See Figure 6-20 for the signal flow of station C. According to the service

requirements, station C amplifies the optical power of the line to achieve long-

haul optical regeneration transmission.

Figure 6-20 Signal Flow at Station C – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (OTN)

The signal flow of station C is as follows:

4 From west to east

The service signals from the line in the west direction (from station B) are

amplified by the PA card at the west direction, amplified by the OA card at

the east direction and sent to the OSCAD card in the east direction, and

then multiplexed with the supervisory signals from the OSC card by the

OSCAD card in the east direction and output to the line in the east

direction.

4 From east to west

The signal flow from east to west is a reverse process of the signal flow

from west to east.

u Stations D and E

The signal flow of station D is similar to that of station A, and the signal flow of

station E is similar to that of station B, which are not further described here.

6.2.3 Examples of Electrical Grooming (PIC)

The following describes the electrical grooming and configuration methods of PIC

application of the FONST 5000 U series of products using examples.

6-22 Version: A


Network Diagram

As shown in Figure 6-21, a chain network is composed of three stations (A, B, and C)

in a project.

Figure 6-21 Network Diagram – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (PIC)

Service Demand

u Ten 10GE LAN services are activated in stations A and B.

u Ten 10GE LAN services are activated in stations B and C.

u Ten OTU2 services are activated in stations A and C.

Demand Analysis

The analysis of the electrical layer service wavelength distribution for stations A and

C is as follows:

Ten 10GE LAN services and ten OTU2 services require five 4TN2 cards and two

10IL2 cards and occupy twenty 10 Gbit/s channels.

The analysis of the electrical layer service wavelength distribution for station B is as

follows:

u Ten 10GE services in the west direction require three 4TN2 cards and one

10IL2 card and occupy ten 10 Gbit/s channels.

u Ten 10GE services in the east direction require three 4TN2 cards and one

10IL2 card and occupy ten 10 Gbit/s channels.

Figure 6-22 shows the wavelength distribution between stations.

Version: A 6-23


Figure 6-22 Service Requirement – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (PIC)

Card Configuration

All stations use the FONST 5000 U10 subrack. Figure 6-23 shows the card

configuration of stations A and C, and Figure 6-24 shows the card configuration of

station B.

Figure 6-23 Card Slot Configuration at Stations A and C – Electrical Layer Grooming

Application (PIC)

Figure 6-24 Card Slot Configuration at Station B – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (PIC)

6-24 Version: A


Signal Flow

u Station A

The signal flow of Station A is shown in Figure 6-25. According to the service

requirements, station A adds and drops 20 services of the other two stations.

Figure 6-25 Signal Flow at Station A – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (PIC)

The signal flow of station A is as follows:

4 The ten 10GE service signals and ten OTU2 service signals from the client

side equipment undergo the O / E conversion by five 4TN2 cards and sent

to the cross-connect card. According to the EMS configuration, the cross-

connect card sends 20 signals to two 10IL2 cards. After being multiplexed

and converted by the 10IL2 card, two optical signals are sent to the

BMD2PP card.

4 After two optical signals are multiplexed by the BMD2PP card, the signals

are then multiplexed with the supervisory signals from the OSC card and

output to the line.

The signal flow in the Rx direction is a reverse process of the signal flow in the

Tx direction.

u Station B

Version: A 6-25


The signal flow of Station B is shown in Figure 6-26. According to the service

demand, station B terminates ten 10GE LAN service signals from station A,

and the ten OTU2 service signals from station A and station C pass

transparently through station B.

Figure 6-26 Signal Flow at Station B – Electrical Layer Grooming Application (PIC)

The signal flow of station B is as follows:

The service signals from the line in the west direction (from station A) are sent

to the BMD2PP card in the west direction for demultiplexing.

4 The CE11 to CE20 signals (10×10GE LAN services of A→B) are sent to

the 10IL2 card in the west direction for demultiplexing and local dropping of

the electrical layer services. The signals are terminated locally via three

4TN2 cards.

4 The CE22 to CE31 signals (electrical layer services of A→C) are sent to

the BMD2PP card in the east direction for pass-through in the optical layer.

6-26 Version: A


4 After all the wavelength signals are multiplexed by the BMD2PP card in the

east direction, the signals are multiplexed with the supervisory signals from

the OSC card and then output to the line in the east direction.

The service signals from the line in the east direction (from station C) are sent

to the BMD2PP card in the east direction for demultiplexing.

4 The CE11 to CE20 signals (10×10GE services of C→B) are sent to the

10IL2 card in the east direction for demultiplexing and local dropping of the

electrical layer services. The signals are terminated locally via three 4TN2

cards.

4 The CE22 to CE31 signals (electrical layer services of C→A) are sent to

the BMD2PP card in the west direction for pass-through in the optical

layer.

4 After all the wavelength signals are multiplexed by the BMD2PP card in the

west direction, the signals are multiplexed with the supervisory signals

from the OSC card and then output to the line in the west direction.

u Station C

The signal flow of station C is similar to that of station A, which will not be

further described here.

Version: A 6-27

7 About ASON

The ASON is a new-generation optical transport network, also known as intelligent

optical network. The ASON introduces the control plane on the optical transport

network, thereby achieving the automatic discovery of network resources, providing

flexible service automatic configuration and various protection and restoration

mechanisms, and addressing the issue of low network resource utilization rate.

The following describes the ASON based on the FONST 5000 U series of products,

and introduces basic concepts and solutions.

Background and Introduction of the ASON

Architecture of the ASON System

Basic Concepts of the ASON

ASON Solution

ASON Functions

Version: A 7-1


7.1 Background and Introduction of the ASON

The following describes the background, development, and introduction of the

ASON.

7.1.1 Background of the ASON

With the development of telecommunications networks and increasing customer

demand, problems with traditional optical networks have gradually been exposed.

The details are described as follows:

u Service configuration

In the service configuration for traditional optical networks, massive cross-

connect data analysis and designs as well as ring-to-ring and point-to-point

manual configurations are required, which are time-consuming and labor-

intensive. With the expanding network scales and increasingly complicated

network systems, this type of service configuration can no longer meet the

rapidly increasing customer demand.

u Bandwidth utilization rate

The protection mode of a traditional optical network requires a large capacity

for backup, which leads to a low network bandwidth utilization rate.

u Protection mode

To implement protection, the traditional optical networks generally need to

reserve half the network resources as backup. This lowers the network

bandwidth utilization ratio. In addition, in this protection mode, services are

protected to the same extent without considering importance weights of various

services, and traditional optical networks also fail to protect services effectively

when faults occur at several points.

To solve these problems effectively, the ASON is launched. It introduces signaling to

the transport network and provides the control plane to enhance network connection

management and fault correction capability. It supports end-to-end service

configuration and provides different service protection modes based on importance

and priority of services to meet various customer demands. In addition, the ASON

can implement network protection when faults occur at multiple points.

7-2 Version: A

7 About ASON

7.1.2 Development of the ASON

With regard to standard development, the ASON standards are rather mature now.

The three organizations for standardization, ITU-T, IETF and OIF, have set up

principal standards about the ASON, and the ASON functions are well developed.

Complete and mature standards accelerate commercialization of the ASON. The

SDH-based ASON equipment is widely applied on the network. With the evolution

of the backbone transport network towards OTN, the ASON technologies are

gradually applied to the OTN-based transport plane.

The ASON technology is a control technology independent from the transport

technology and uses the universal GMPLS protocol. The ASON technology can be

used on various transport products. For example, equipped on the SDH product, it

becomes an SDH-based ASON, which is now widely used. Equipped on the OTN

product, it becomes an OTN-based WSON. In this way, various transport layers on

the entire network can be uniformly controlled by the ASON, thereby achieving

unified grooming and control of end-to-end service by the ASON and network

intelligentization.

7.1.3 Introduction of the ASON

The ASON concepts and standards are introduced after wide applications of the

SDH or DWDM optical transport networks. Therefore, reasonable introduction

schemes are essential. The following describes two basic ASON introduction

schemes.

u Setting up a new ASON

To set up a new optical network, the ASON products can be used directly.

u Upgrading the existing network to ASON

If FiberHome OTN or FonsWeaver series of products have been deployed on

the existing network, new software can be loaded to upgrade the existing

network to the ASON network. This upgrade mode does not require new

equipment and can effectively protect the existing investments and save

construction cost.

Version: A 7-3


7.2 Architecture of the ASON System

As shown in Figure 7-1, the ASON is composed of the control plane, the

management plane, and the transport plane. The figure also indicates all reference

interfaces related to the architecture of the ASON system.

Figure 7-1 Structure of the ASON System

The control plane, the most featured key part of the ASON, is composed of

functional modules, e.g., routing, signaling transfer and resource management, and

signaling networks of signal transport and control to perform call management and

connection management. With interfaces, protocols and signaling systems, the

control plane can dynamically exchange topology information, routing information

and other control signals of the optical network, dynamically set up or tear down

optical channels, implement the dynamic assignment of network resources and

recover the connection when a fault occurs.

7-4 Version: A

7 About ASON

The management plane performs distributed and intelligent management functions.

The management system of traditional optical transport networks has been replaced

by a new multi-layer management system based on the transport plane, control

plane and signaling networks. The new system provides a comprehensive optical

network management solution characterized by centralized, distributed and

intelligent management that caters for both the maintenance management

requirements for operators (management plane) and the dynamic service demands

of users (control plane). The ASON management plane and control plane

complement each other to perform the dynamic configuration of network resources,

performance monitoring, fault management and route planning.

The transport plane is composed of a series of transport entities, including intelligent

SDH and OTN products. As a channel to transport services, it supports

unidirectional or bidirectional end-to-end user information transport. In addition, the

transport plane is hierarchically structured and supports the multi-granularity

switching, an important physical supporting technique to implement ASON traffic

engineering. It supports flexible bandwidth allocation and access of multiple

services, and is the evolution trend of the ASON technology in the future.

7.3 Basic Concepts of the ASON

The ASON is composed of intelligent NEs. It performs the signaling transmission,

switching, information multiplexing, and cross-connect on the optical fiber network.

These intelligent NEs store the network topology and routing information of the

entire network and perform the automatic service set-up or tear-down via signaling.

According to the networking model, the ASON mainly consists of intelligent NEs, as


Version: A 7-5


Figure 7-2 ASON Network Model

The following describes some concepts related to the ASON.

Intelligent NE

An intelligent NE is composed of a traditional optical transport NE and a control unit

loaded with the intelligent software SmartWeaver. Compared with traditional NEs,

the intelligent NEs are added with the link management, signaling, and routing

functions.

TE Link

ATraffic Engineering (TE) link is a logical link between adjacent nodes. An

intelligent NE transports its information (like bandwidth) to other intelligent NEs in

the network in the form of TE link to provide evidence for route calculation. Multiple

TE links can exist between two nodes, and one TE line can be bound to multiple

data links.

The TE links used on the ASON based on the FONST 5000 U series of products are

classified into optical layer TE links and electrical layer TE links. The control plane

establishes end-to-end services using the information about the optical layer TE link

and electrical layer TE link.

7-6 Version: A

7 About ASON

u Optical layer TE link

After the fibers between the WSS cards at two intelligent NEs are connected

and the OSC / ESC channel is set up, the control plane can automatically

create the corresponding optical layer TE link, which contains available optical

layer wavelength and bandwidth information.

u Optical layer TE link

After the ESC communication is established between the local line card and the

opposite end line card, the control plane automatically creates the

corresponding electrical layer TE link that carries information such as slot

number, wavelength, and bandwidth.

Figure 7-3 shows the positioning of the optical layer TE link and electrical layer TE

link.

Figure 7-3 Positioning of the TE Link

Control Channel

The control channel is a physical channel between nodes to transport signals

created and maintained between adjacent nodes via the LMP protocol. Control

channels are classified into in-band channels and out-of-band channels. The in-

band control channel uses the OTN overhead or OSC overhead byte, and the out-

of-band control channel uses the Ethernet link that requires manual configuration of

the IP address of each control plane.

Version: A 7-7


PC (Permanent Connection)

PC is a service connection set up through configuration on the network

management system to deliver commands to NEs.

SC (Switching Connection)

SC is a service connection set up by the control plane via signaling after the

terminal user (i.e., a router) initiates a call to the ASON control plane.

Note:

The software of the current version supports SPC and PC services only.

SPC (Soft-Permanent Connection)

SPC is a service connection between the PC and SC. The connection from the user

to the transport network is directly configured on the EMS. The internal connection

of the transport network is completed by the control plane using signaling after the

EMS initiates a request to the control plane. The service granularity of the SPC

includes OCh and ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and flex).

LSP (Label Switch Path)

The LSP refers to the path that the intelligent service passes by. In the ASON, to set

up intelligent services is to set up LSPs. See Figure 7-4 for the paths that the SPC

service passes by, i.e., LSPs.

Figure 7-4 LSP

7-8 Version: A

7 About ASON

u The intelligent wavelength division OCh path can be created when sufficient

optical TE link resources exist.

u The intelligent wavelength division ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, ODU4 and

ODUflex paths can be created when sufficient optical TE link resources exist.

Routing Policy

A routing policy is a way to determine the priority of alternative routes in the process

of route calculation. The route selection policies for the active and standby paths

include node diversity, link diversity and SRLG diversity.

During route calculation, the route calculation module uses the CSPF algorithm to

calculate the routes complying with the conditions. At present, the SmartWeaver

supports the following routing policies: minimum nodes, minimum link cost, and load

balancing.

u Minimum nodes

As to minimum nodes, it is to calculate the best route from the source node to

the destination node as a route that passes by a minimum of nodes. As shown

in Figure 7-5 , the routes involving the minimum nodes between node 1 (source

node) and node 3 (sink node) is 1↔2↔3, that is, the path pointed by the

arrowheads.

Figure 7-5 The Minimum Node Number

u Minimum link cost

Version: A 7-9


Link cost is a parameter to ascertain link priority. The value can be set as fiber

length, fiber cost, link loss or other reference items. As shown in Figure 7-6 , the

number between the two nodes indicates the link cost. The routes involving the

minimum link cost between node 1 (source node) and node 3 (sink node) is

1↔5↔4↔3, that is, the path pointed by the arrowheads.

Figure 7-6 The Lowest Link Cost

Load Balancing

Load balancing is aimed to distribute services evenly into network resources. It

allows abundant network resources, gives little restriction to new service routes and

alleviates the protection and recovery pressure when the network fails.

The FONST 5000 U series of products measure the load as follows: convert the

unallocated timeslots of all TE links that the route passes to the same signal type

(such as ODU0), and use the minimum number of timeslots as the principle for

measuring the load, which is known as load parameter.

With the load parameter, it is possible to compare loads of all possible routes. The

route with the smallest load (with the largest value of the parameter) is the best

route.

If this method is directly used, routers with small load but many hop counts (hop

count = the number of nodes that a route passes by－1) will occur and consume a

large number of network resources. In practical application, the hop counts of the

available routes should be taken into consideration as well as load conditions. The

formula below can be used to choose the best among the available routes.

7-10 Version: A

7 About ASON

f = load parameter/(hop count of available routes)2. The route with the largest f value

is the best route. The load is the minimum bandwidth of the link over the path.

As shown in Figure 7-7, the number between two nodes is the load parameter.

Calculation of the load balance is shown in Table 7-1. It can be known from the

table that the best route is route 1.

Figure 7-7 Load Balancing

Table 7-1 Calculation of Load Balance for Choosing a Route

Route Load Parameter Hop Count f Value Note 1

Route 1: 1↔2↔3 32 2 8

Route 5: 1↔5↔4↔3 64 3 7.1

Note 1: f = load parameter/(hop count of available routes)2.

Routing Policy Priority

When establishing services, users can select only one routing strategy. However,

several best routes may coexist when a single routing strategy is used. In this case,

the SmartWeaver will choose the best route according to the routing policies with

the priority like this: the routing strategy appointed by users > minimum nodes >

minimum link cost > load balancing. If multiple best routes still exist with the

aforesaid work of routing strategies, a route of them will be chosen randomly.

Re-routing

Re-routing is a way to recover services. When the LSP of the service breaks up, the

initial node will calculate the best route for service recovery and a new LSP will be

set up via signaling to transport services. When a new LSP is established, the

original LSP will be removed.

Version: A 7-11


Note:

As to revertive services, when re-routing is implemented, the original LSP

will not be removed.

Soft Re-routing

The soft re-routing refers to the re-routing operations initiated by the OTNM2000 for

network maintenance or optimization.

Revertive

Revertive means that services can be restored to the original route automatically or

manually after faults on the original route are removed.

SRLG

SRLG is a link group that share the risks. Normally, fibers in the same optical cable

share the same risks. When intelligent services interrupt, the control plane will not

choose the link route with the same risk, so as to shorten the time of recovery for

intelligent services in re-routing.

For example, when a cable is cut off, all the fibers in the cable may probably be cut

off. The fibers in this cable form an SRLG. Users can also set any several fibers or a

TE link in an SRLG as desired.

7.4 ASON Solution

The following introduces the products and network solutions that apply the ASON

technology.

7.4.1 Product System

The ASON product system of the FONST 5000 U series of products is divided by

layer into the control plane, transport plane, management plane, and planning tool.

Figure 7-8 shows the relationship between layers.

7-12 Version: A

7 About ASON

Figure 7-8 Product Relationships on Each Layer

Control Plane

The SmartWeaver software is the major functional software of the control plane.

This software is pre-installed in the CCU card of the FONST 5000 U series of

products.

Transport Plane

The FONST 5000 U series of products include FONST 5000 U60, FONST 5000

U40, FONST 5000 U30, FONST 5000 U20, and FONST 5000 U10.

Management Plane

The management plane functions are implemented by the OTNM2000 Element

Management System (EMS). The system supports four management functions,

including performance management, fault management, configuration management,

and security management. In addition, the system provides the graphical user

interface (GUI), which ensures flexible and convenient operations.

Version: A 7-13


Planning Tool

The OTNPlanner is a network planning and optimization tool tailored for

transmission network equipment. It provides such functions as network topology

planning, service protection and route design, wavelength assignment, automatic

equipment configuration, physical impairment calculation, network optimization

calculation, output of statistical analysis reports, and data interaction with the


7.4.2 Solution

FiberHome can provide intelligent transmission network solutions for different types

of networks, such as inter-province trunk networks (level-1), intra-province trunk

networks (level-2), local networks, and Metropolitan Area Networks (MANs).

Equipment is selected and the network is planned according to the network's

requirements for the traffic, service types, and networking. Figure 7-9 shows a

solution for transmission from the MAN to the inter-province trunk network (level-1).

7-14 Version: A

7 About ASON

Figure 7-9 OTN ASON Solution

7.4.3 System Features

The following introduces the ASON system features of the FONST 5000 U series of

products.

Version: A 7-15


CCU 1+1 Hot Backup

The CCU is the entity corresponding to the control plane and loaded with the

SmartWeaver intelligent software. It uses the built-in card installation mode and

mainly provides the route selection, signaling forwarding, and resource

management functions.

This system supports the CCU 1+1 hot backup. Once the active CCU encounters a

software or a hardware failure, the standby CCU enters the working status from the

hot backup status and automatically takes over the services of the faulty CCU. The

set-up services are not affected even when both active and standby CCUs are faulty.

The CCUs can still control the service after being restarted. The system reliability

and availability have thereby been enhanced, and better service quality is provided.

Automatic Discovery of Network Resources and Topology Architecture

The network resources here refer to TE links, and topology refers to the connection

between intelligent NEs, optical fibers and TE links. Different from the traditional

transport equipment, the ASON does not require manual configuration of the

network structure. The intelligent NE records the interconnection among optical

interfaces and reports the interconnection information to the CCU and EMS.

Compatibility with Traditional Networks

The traditional network can be upgraded to the intelligent network smoothly. If the

existing network has been already deployed with the intelligent FONST 5000 U

series of products, it can be smoothly upgraded to an ASON network by loading the

intelligent software.

The flexible resource allocation mechanism effectively solves the coexistence

problem of the traditional and intelligent networks. If a certain resource is occupied

by the PC services (traditional network), the resource will not be in the available

resource list of the SPC services.

Flexible Service Implementation

As a multi-service provider platform, the system provides many service types,

including BoD (Bandwidth on Demand), OVPN (Optical Virtual Private Network), GE

and SDH.

7-16 Version: A

7 About ASON

Intelligent and easy service set-up and flexible bandwidth assignment enhance

operators’ capability of providing BoD. The application of point-to-point and

multicast and independent logical channel for every service enhances operators’

capability of implementing OVPN.

Differentiated Services

The system provides differentiated services, including services in platinum level,

gold level, silver level and bronze level. Multiple routing strategies are provided for

each service type.

7.4.4 Architecture of Intelligent Software SmartWeaver

The intelligent software SmartWeaver is the major functional software of the control

plane in the FiberHome ASON solutions. This software is pre-installed in the CCU

card. Figure 7-10 shows the software architecture, including the traffic management

module, the signaling module, the route module, the cross-connect control module,

and the resource discovery and management module.

Figure 7-10 Architecture of the Intelligent Software SmartWeaver

Table 7-2 describes the sub-modules and functions of each module.

Version: A 7-17


Table 7-2 Modules and Functions of the Intelligent Software SmartWeaver

Module Sub-Module Function

Traffic management

module

Network

management

system proxy

Provides proxy functions for the network management

system to visit the system management database.

Traffic

information

base

Stores and manages service information submitted by

users.

Label base

managementManages labels required by service set-up.

Route module

Route

managementCollects and floods TE link information.

Route

calculation

Calculates the service route based on service

constraint conditions.

Signaling module –

Provides signaling support for set-up, tear-down,

synchronization and correction of services based on

the Resource Reservation Protocol Traffic Engineering

(RSVP-TE) protocol.

Resource discovery

and management

module

Data link

management

Converts information on the bottom layer of data links

and monitors status of data link interfaces.

Link

management

Discovers and maintains link resources, and sets up

and maintains the control channels.

Cross-connect

control module

Cross-connect

control

Calculates cross-connect of the equipment based on

service routes and protection features.

Cross-connect

proxy

Converts logical commands of cross-connect control to

cross-connect commands readable to equipment.

7.5 ASON Functions

The following describes the functions of the FONST 5000 U series of products using

the ASON technology.

7.5.1 Automatic Discovery of Link Resource

The following describes the automatic discovery of ASON link resources of the


7-18 Version: A

7 About ASON

Automatic Discovery of Network Topology

The network topology includes the optical fiber link and the optical channel link

between intelligent NEs. After the completion of fiber connection between intelligent

NEs, the intelligent NEs will record the fiber connection information, including cards

and optical interfaces of the local and opposite ends. The SmartWeaver can

automatically create network topology diagrams based on this information. When

the fiber connection in the network changes , the network can automatically detect

the change via the LMP protocol and display the real time update on the GUI of the


Automatic Discovery of TE Link and Topology

After creating the control channel between adjacent NEs via the LMP protocol, the

intelligent NEs implement TE link check. After that, every intelligent NE can flood its

TE link information via the OSPF-TE protocol to the entire network. In this way, all

NEs receive the TE link information of the entire network, i.e. TE link topology of the

network, which will be finally displayed on the GUI of the network management

system.

In addition, the SmartWeaver can detect any change in the TE link, including links

added, changes in link parameters and links removed, and report to the network

management system for real time display.

Fiber Misconnection Monitoring

With an increasing integration level of card interfaces, fiber misconnection may

occur more frequently. The fiber misconnection monitoring provided by the

intelligent optical network is a good solution. As shown in Figure 7-11, when the Tx

and Rx fibers are misconnected between two ports (as indicated by the dotted lines

in Figure 7-11), the network management system will give an alarm based on the

misconnection information reported by the SmartWeaver.

Version: A 7-19


Figure 7-11 Misconnection of Optical Fibers

7.5.2 Protection and Recovery Function

Protection means replacing a disabled resource with a pre-configured standby

resource. Recovery means replacing a disabled resource with re-routing by virtue of

idle capacity. Generally, the action of protection is completed within scores of

milliseconds, whereas the action of recovery is generally completed in a time range

from hundreds of milliseconds to several seconds.

The SmartWeaver provides protection and recovery for services at the optical layer

and electrical layer respectively. Meanwhile, it supports nesting of optical layer

protection and electrical layer protection. See Table 7-3 for the types of protection

and recovery at the optical layer or electrical layer.

Table 7-3 Protection and Recovery Functions of the ASON

Protection Type Recovery

Type

Description

Optical

layer (OCh

layer)

OCP 1+1 trail

protection

Permanent 1

+1

The OCh services always have two

LSPs (an active LSP and a standby

LSP) until there is no resource available.

Dynamic re-routing Recovery

When the LSP currently used by the

OCh service fails, the SmartWeaver will

work out a new LSP for the services until

there is no resource available.

Electrical

layer

(ODUk

layer)

1+1 trail protectionPermanent 1

+1

The ODUk services always have two

LSPs (an active LSP and a standby

LSP) until there is no resource available.

7-20 Version: A

7 About ASON

Table 7-3 Protection and Recovery Functions of the ASON (Continued)

Protection Type Recovery

Type

Description

Recovery

When the active LSP for the ODUk

services fails, the standby LSP will be

activated. When the protection LSP fails,

the services will be recovered via

rerouting.

SNCP 1+1

protection–

Traditional ODUk 1+1 protection. The

local end is responsible for dual-feeding

of ODUk signals, whereas the opposite

end is responsible for selective receiving

of ODUk signals with better quality.

Dynamic re-routing Recovery

When the LSP currently used by the

ODUk service fails, the SmartWeaver

will work out a new LSP for the services

until there is no resource available.

Enhanced

protectionRecovery

The ODUk Ring protection with the

recovery function. Only two ODUk

channels are needed in the ring to

implement protection of distributed

services between nodes. When the two

protection routes defined by the

transport plane both fail, the services will

be recovered via the function of re-

routing of the control plane.

7.5.3 Differentiated Services

To meet different customer demands for the service security levels, the ASON

provides differentiated services, which can be classified into different levels from the

perspective of service protection and recovery, as shown in Table 7-4.

Version: A 7-21


Table 7-4 Differentiated Service Functions

Service Level Service

Quality

Protection and

Recovery Mode

Protection and

Recovery TimeNote1

Number of

Protection

Times

Platinum HighestPermanent 1+1

protection＜50ms Multiple times

Gold High

Combination of 1

+1 protection and

recoveryNote 2

Protection < 50ms

Recovery < 2sMultiple times

Silver Medium 1+1 protection ＜50ms One time

Copper Low Dynamic recovery ＜2s Multiple times

Iron Lowest No protection None None

Note 1: The protection and recovery time in the table indicates the protection and recovery time

in the electrical layer environment with lower traffic. The optical layer protection and

recovery time is associated with the amount of traffic, and generally is shorter than 10s.

Note 2: In the optical layer environment, the combination of 1+1 protection and recovery mode

is not recommended in actual engineering configuration.

7.5.4 End-to-End Service Configuration Function

The following describes the ASON end-to-end service configuration of the FONST


Service Set-up

Besides the traditional OTN and SDH static services, the ASON also supports the

end-to-end intelligent services. When configuring intelligent services, users only

need to know the information about the source node, sink node, bandwidth needed,

and protection level. The network will automatically choose routes and create cross-

connection between nodes.

Service routes can also be restrained by setting compulsory (or repulsive) nodes

and links. Compared with the end-to-end configuration of the traditional OTN and

SDH, this service configuration method fully uses the routing and signaling functions

of each intelligent NE, and ensures security and reliability of the service

configuration.

7-22 Version: A

7 About ASON

Strict Route Configuration

The SmartWeaver provides the strict route configuration function. Strict route, or

static route, is a very special route which designates every detail of the route,

including all nodes, links and timeslots without route calculation. In strict route

configuration, all nodes and links of the LSP must be designated. As the route

calculation is not involved, all route information is obtained manually.

Configuration with Repulsive Resources

During service setup, several best routes may exist under the restriction of a single

routing policy. To further select the best route among them, the user can configure

the routes to include / exclude certain resources, such as NEs, links and link

interfaces.

7.5.5 Network Management Function

Besides the common fault, performance, security, and configuration management,

the system further provides the resource management function. In addition, the

system provides link resources, port resources, PC resources, and SPC resources

statistics reports, helping users to learn the resource usage, and properly analyze,

plan, and use the resources.

7.5.6 Network Maintenance Optimization Function

The SmartWeaver provides the following network maintenance optimization

functions:

Returning to the Original Route

After several topology changes, protections and recoveries of intelligent services,

the current service route may no longer be the original one. By configuring the

revertive property of the services, the SmartWeaver can restore the services to their

original route.

Version: A 7-23


Generally, a route selected for the intelligent services when they are established is

the original route for the intelligent services. After the re-routing of intelligent

services, when the fault on the original route is removed, the services set to

"revertive" will be switched back to their original route.

Presetting Route

To optimize network configuration and make the re-routing as designed by users

when the service path fails, i.e. to enhance the controllability of the service re-

routing, the SmartWeaver provides preset route function. That is, it restores

services on the preset path preferentially when the intelligent services perform re-

routing.

Soft Re-routing

For the purpose of network maintenance or optimization, this system supports the

network re-routing activated by users without implementing on-site function

verification of re-routing services.

Network Traffic Balancing

The ASON distributes traffic flow to different routes as much as possible.

The ASON works out the best route using the CSPF algorithm. However, when

many LSPs exist between two nodes, several LSPs may pass the same route. The

SmartWeaver avoids this situation via the traffic balancing strategy.

As shown in Figure 7-12, several silver services exist between R4 and R3. If the

route strategy applied to all services is "load balancing", the intelligent software will

distribute services to different routes as much as possible, like F-A-B-C, F-E-D-C

and F-A-D-C, to enhance the network security and reliability.

7-24 Version: A

7 About ASON

Figure 7-12 Network Traffic Balancing

Version: A 7-25

8 Management and Maintenance

The FONST 5000 U series of products are used as the packet optical transport

equipment in the inter-province backbone and WAN, fully considering the

equipment management and maintenance requirements of the user in terms of

structure design and function setting, and providing equipment management and

maintenance capabilities.

Monitoring and Management Module

Communication and Maintenance Interfaces

Optical Supervisory Channel Management

Electrical Supervisory Channel Management

Alarm and Performance Event Management

Network Performance Monitoring

Safety Management

TCM

Version: A 8-1


8.1 Monitoring and Management Module

The FONST 5000 U series of products adopt the modular and hierarchical

management design for monitoring and management.

From the bottom up, the monitoring and management modules include the card

management (BMU) module, the element management (EMU) module, and the

EMS module, as shown in Figure 8-1.

Figure 8-1 Monitoring and Management Module

8-2 Version: A


u The BMU is embedded in each card to collect information such as the card

status, alarm events and performance data. The BMU transforms, processes

and saves the collected information, and then sends the saved information to

the EMU.

u The EMU is embedded in each NE management card to collect the BMU

information of each card. The EMU sends the collected information to the

network management system module and transmits the control and

management information from the network management system module to

other BMUs, to achieve the communication between the EMU and the BMU,

between the EMU and another EMU, and between the EMU and the network

management system.

u The network management system module is classified into the EMS (OTNM2000)

and the NMS (OTNM2100). The OTNM2000 exchanges information with the

EMU, provides the GUI, and performs configuration management, alarm

management, performance management, and security management on the

equipment in the entire network; the NMS exchanges information with other

EMSs including the OTNM2000 and achieves uniform information between

different NMS versions, equipment types, and equipment vendors, thereby

facilitating unified network management.

8.2 Communication and Maintenance Interfaces

The communication and maintenance interfaces of FONST 5000 U series of

products are provided by the NE management cards, the AIF cards, and the optical

supervisory channel cards. Table 8-1 lists the management and maintenance

interfaces provided by each card.

Table 8-1 List of Management and Maintenance Interfaces

Card Interface Purpose

NE

manage-

ment

card

CCU

CLKExternal clock input and output

interface

TOD Reserved interface

MON

External monitoring ON/OFF

event input interface, generally

connected to the equipment to

be monitored

Version: A 8-3


Table 8-1 List of Management and Maintenance Interfaces (Continued)


CTR

External control ON/OFF event

output interface, generally

connected to the external

environment monitoring

equipment

ALM Subrack alarm output interface

f

Local monitoring interface,

generally connected with the

serial port of a computer where

the LCTsoftware is installed

F

Network management interface,

generally connected with a

network management computer

SIG Reserved interface

COM

Intra-NE communication

extension interface and

software debugging interface

EMU/FCU/EFCU

ETH3/ETH4



network management computer

COM




TEST Reserved interface

Terminal

board

AIF card (FONST 5000

U60/U60 2.0)

CKIOExternal clock input and output

interface

TOD

External time input and output

interface, which can be used to

access 1PPS+TOD signals

F



network management host

SIG Control plane interface

COM




ALM Alarm output interface

AIF card (COTP) ALM Alarm output interface

8-4 Version: A




f Local monitoring interface

CTR

External control ON/OFF event

output interface, generally

connected to the external

environment monitoring

equipment

MON

External monitoring ON/OFF

event input interface, generally

connected to the equipment to

be monitored

COM




F




ETH Control plane input interface

AIF1/AIF2 (FONST 5000 U40)

F1/F2/F3




SIG1/SIG2 Control plane interface

COM1/-

COM2/COM3




CLKExternal clock input and output

interface

TOD




ALM1/ALM2 Alarm output interface

AOR

Output interface of the alarm

indicator on the top of the rack,

generally connected to the top

alarm indicator

AOC

Alarm output interface on the

head of row cabinet, generally

connected to alarm interface of

the head of row cabinet

Version: A 8-5




AIF1/AIF2 (FONST 5000

U30/U20)

CLK



input or output 1PPS+TOD

signals

F




SIG Control plane interface

TOD




ALM1/ALM2

Subrack alarm cascade

interface, which is used to

connect and converge alarms

of other subracks

AOR

Output interface of the alarm

indicator on the top of the rack,

generally connected to the top

alarm indicator

AOC

Alarm output interface on the

head of row cabinet, generally

connected to alarm interface of

the head of row cabinet

Optical

supervi-

sory

channel

unit

OSC card (FONST 5000

U60/U60 2.0

U40/U30/U20/U10 and COTP)

W2M Both W2M and E2M can input

or output one E1 signal. W2M

can be used as an input / output

interface of the external clock.

E2M

FE1/FE2

100 Mbit/s electrical interface,

used to connect to the FE

equipment that supports the

PTP clock.

TODInputs or outputs one 1588 time

signal.

OUT1/IN1

OUT2/IN2

GE interface, used to connect

to the GE optical interface


PTP clock.

OSC (COTP)W2M Both W2M and E2M can input

or output two E1 signals.E2M

8-6 Version: A




EOSC (COTP)

1PPS&TOD

Clock interface, used to input or

output one 1PPS+TOD clock

signal.

W2M Both W2M and E2M can input

or output one E1 signal. W2M

can be used as an input / output

interface of the external clock.

E2M

FE1/FE2/-

FE3/FE4

100 Mbit/s electrical interface,

used to connect to the FE


PTP clock.

OUT1/IN1

OUT2/IN2

GE interface, used to connect

to the GE optical interface


PTP clock.

8.3 Optical Supervisory Channel Management

The supervisory and management information between stations can be transmitted

over the OSC.

Overview of the Optical Supervisory Channel

The OSC uses the 1510 nm wavelength and the OSC card (optical supervisory

channel card) and OSCAD card (1510/1550 multiplexing and demultiplexing card).

The optical supervisory channel uses the 2B1H code. After encoding, the line signal

rate reaches 25.344 Mbit/s.

Working Mode of the Optical Supervisory Channel

Figure 8-2 shows the signal flow of the supervisory channels of three stations. As

shown in the figure, the supervisory channel signal (blue line) and main optical

channel signal (signal transmitted over the OA) are independent. The supervisory

signals are terminated and regenerated within the station without being amplified.

Version: A 8-7


In the following the communication between the OTM and the OLA is used as an

example to describe the communication process over the optical supervisory

channel.

Figure 8-2 Signal Flow in the OSC for the Chain Network

The supervisory signal flow in the OTM1→OTM2 direction is as follows:

u The OSC card at the OTM1 station receives the overhead data frames sent by

the NE management card and OPM card of the NE. The OSC card

encapsulates the overhead data frames and some overhead data (such as the

E1 data) accessing the card, and multiplexes the data as 25 Mbit/s signals. The

25 Mbit/s signals, after the E / O conversion via the optical transmitting module,

are modulated on the supervisory channel wavelength (1510 nm). The OSCAD

card multiplexes the signals over the supervisory channel and main optical

channel by using the multiplexer and sends the multiplexed signals to the OLA.

u At the OLA station, the splitter on the east OSCAD card splits the optical line

signals into main optical channel signals and supervisory channel optical

signals. The main optical channel signals are amplified by the repeater on the

OA card and sent to the east direction. The supervisory channel optical signals,

after the E / O conversion via the west optical receiving module of the OSC

card, are recovered as supervisory data frames for processing, and then sent to

the NE management card and OPM card for data exchange. The processed

supervisory signals, after E / O conversion via the east transmitting module of

the OSC card, are finally multiplexed by the east OSCAD card with the main

optical signals and are sent to the line for transmission.

8-8 Version: A


u At the OTM2 station, the multiplexer on the OSCAD card multiplexes the input

optical line signals into the main channel signals and supervisory channel

optical signals. After E / O conversion via the optical receiving module of the

OSC card, the supervisory channel optical signals are recovered as

supervisory data frames for processing, and then sent to the NE management

card and OPM card on the NE for data exchange.

The signal flow of the optical supervisory channel in the OTM2→OTM1 direction is

the same as that in the OTM1→OTM2 direction.

8.4 Electrical Supervisory Channel Management

The supervisory and management information of each station can be transmitted

over the OSC and also over the ESC. Using the ESC can save equipment

investment of the OSC and avoid insertion loss caused by the OSCAD card.

Overview of Electrical Supervisory Channel

The electrical supervisory channel uses the MCC0/1/2 bytes in the frame header of

the tributary and line cards to transmit the supervisory information. This product

uses the MCC0 to transmit the EMS supervisory information and uses the MCC1 or

MCC2 to transmit the inter-control plane information. The supervisory channel

bandwidth is associated with the line rate (OTU rate level).

Working Mode of the Electrical Supervisory Channel

Figure 8-3 shows the signal flow of the supervisory channels of two stations. As

shown in the figure, all the tributary and line cards supporting the ESC on the TX

end receive the supervisory information sent by the NE management cards and the

OPM cards, and then they send the information to the opposite end station. The NE

management cards and the OPM cards on the RX end automatically select and

receive the supervisory information output from a tributary or line card according to

the actual situation. If the route fails, the data will be automatically switched to

another route for receiving.

In the following the communication between two OTMs is used as an example to

describe the communication process over the electrical supervisory channel.

Version: A 8-9


Figure 8-3 Signal Flow in the ESC for the Chain Network

The supervisory signal flow in the OTM1→OTM2 direction is as follows:

u The NE management cards and the OPM cards at the OTM1 station insert the

respective supervisory information to the OTN overhead processing units of the

tributary and line cards and send the overhead to the line side after processing

it.

u At the OTM2 station, the tributary and line cards extract the overhead from the

line side and send the overhead to the NE management cards and the OPM

cards.

The supervisory channel signal flow in the OTM2→OTM1 direction is the same as

that in the OTM1→OTM2 direction.

8.5 Alarm and Performance Event Management

In the daily management and maintenance, users learn the current operating status

via the alarm information and performance statistics, so as to find silent failures in a

timely manner and monitor the equipment in real time.

The alarm and performance information is reported by the BMU to the EMU card,

and then reported to the OTNM2000 by the EMU card. Users can obtain information

about the alarms and performance events conveniently by observing the alarm

indicators on cards and querying on the OTNM2000.

8-10 Version: A


Alarm Management Function

The system supports the alarm management functions, including setting and

querying alarm levels, querying and confirming current alarms, querying and saving

the alarm history, etc. These functions enable users to monitor and maintain the

system operating status instantly.

Performance Monitoring Function

Performance events are important references to reflect the working performance of

the equipment. Performance events and alarms are correlated. When the value of a

certain performance exceeds the preset threshold, the related alarms will be

triggered. When a certain performance event occurs, check whether related alarms

appear, and handle the corresponding performance events according to the

handling methods of related alarms.

System Items to Be Monitored

u Operating temperature of a card

u Present status of a card

u Input / output optical power of an optical module

u Input / output optical power of the optical amplification card, VOA state, and

VOA attenuation value

u Temperature of the amplifier laser

u Temperature of the transmitting laser

u Laser current of an amplifier

u Error code count of the tributary interface card and the line interface card

u Packet count of the tributary interface card and the line interface card (total

number of transmitted / received packets, number of error transmitted and

received packets, and number of lost transmitted and received packets)

u Blocking status and single-wavelength attenuation value of the WSS card

u Protection switching status at the optical layer and the electrical layer

Version: A 8-11


8.6 Network Performance Monitoring

The following describes the performance monitoring capability of the FONST 5000

U series of products on the WDM side and the client side.

Service Performance Monitoring on the Client Side

The FONST 5000 U series of products provide 15-minute and 24-hour performance

monitoring functions based on the access services, as shown in Table 8-2.

Table 8-2 Service Performance Monitoring on the Client Side

ServiceMonitorable Performance

ItemService

SDH/SONET B1 error

STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-

64/STM-256

OC-3/OC-12/OC-48/OC-

192/OC-768

OTN

SM-BIP8 error

TCM-BIP8 error

PM-BIP8 error

OTU1/OTU2/OTU2e/OTU3/O-

TU4

Ethernet services

Statistics of various packets

received and transmitted

FE, GE, 10GE LAN, 10GE

WAN, 40GE, and 100GE

SAN services

ESCON

FICON

FC100/FC200/FC400/FC800/-

FC1200

Video and other servicesDVB

HDTV

Signal Performance Monitoring on the WDM Side

The FONST 5000 U series of products support the monitoring on the optical power

on the WDM and client sides, monitoring on the optical power of the single

wavelength signal and multiplexed signals, and monitoring on the laser bias current.

The FONST 5000 U series of products provide the network-based performance

monitoring, as shown in Table 8-3.

8-12 Version: A


Table 8-3 Signal Performance Monitoring on the WDM Side

Monitoring Category Monitorable Performance

Item

Card

Performance monitoring

of OTS / OMS optical

signals

Optical power

The optical amplification unit,

optical protection unit, and optical

multiplexing and demultiplexing

unit provide the real-time detection

function.

Online spectrum

analysis of OTS / OMS

signals

Optical power, OSNR, and

wavelength value of each

wavelength signal

Optical protection unit and optical

multiplexing and demultiplexing

unit. The optical protection unit can

provide the MON optical interface,

through which the optical spectrum

analysis unit can be accessed to

monitor the spectrum of the main

channel without interrupting

services.

Performance monitoring

of OCh optical signals

Input / output optical power,

laser temperature, and bias

current

The optical interfaces of all line

cards on the WDM side provide the

real-time detection function.

Detection of signals at

the OTN electrical layer

SM-BIP8 error

TCM-BIP8 error

PM-BIP8 error

The tributary line unit using the

OTN interface provides the real

time detection function.

Corresponding power monitoring points are set on the equipment. The MON

interfaces on certain card panels provide the optical power online monitoring

function. Cards equipped with MON interfaces are listed as follows:

u Optical amplification unit: OA, PA, and PIC cards

u Multiplexing and demultiplexing unit: OSCAD

8.7 Safety Management

The following describes operation safety management of the FONST 5000 U series

of products and the EMS.

Version: A 8-13


Equipment Operation Safety

u Obvious signs for safe operations are located on the subrack, cards, and fan

unit of the equipment, including the subrack earth grounding sign, the ESD

protection sign, the card optical interface level sign, the sign for safe operations

of the fan unit, etc.

u The equipment structure design meets the requirements specified in ETSI 300

019 Environmental conditions and environmental tests for telecommunications

equipment.

EMS Operation Safety

u The access control covers the user login management, division of management

domains, control of access time, and management of remote access. The

purpose is to prevent illegal users from accessing the network resources

(including the OTNM2000) or authorized users from accessing a network

domain beyond their authorization.

u To define legal users and prevent operations beyond authority, the system

divides the users into different authority levels. The users are divided into four

levels. Each level has the corresponding management authority. For each user,

only the management right of his / her own level is authorized. The higher-level

users have all the rights that the lower-level users have.

u The system supports the log management: The login operations and other key

operations of users are recorded in the log automatically.

8.8 TCM

The following introduces the TCM of the FONST 5000 U series of products.

TCM Structure

The TCM is the overhead based on the OTUk layer. Each TCM overhead occupies

three bytes and provides six-level serial connection supervision function. Multi-

carrier, multi-equipment vendor, and multi-subnet environments can be managed in

a hierarchical and segmental manner by properly planning and configuring the TCMi

(i=1 to 6) of the OTUk layer.

Figure 8-4 shows the position of the TCM overheads in the OTN frame structure.

8-14 Version: A


Figure 8-4 The OTU Frame Structure

TCM Application

The following describes the TCM supervision. Figure 8-5 shows the channel

supervision across multiple carrier networks by using the TCM overhead.

According to the ITU-G G.709, up to six TCM levels are supported. In this example,

3-level TCM overhead is used to supervise different networks.

Figure 8-5 TCM Function

u The client uses TCM1 to supervise the QoS of the optical UNI-UNI.

u The operator uses the TCM2 to supervise the QoS of the carrier network.

u Operator A and operator B use the TCM3 to supervise the intra-domain and

inter-domain network connections.

Version: A 8-15


Once a failure occurs, the fault location can be identified through the TCM1, TCM2,

and TCM3 status.

For details about the TCM overhead configuration, see Flexible OTN Overhead

Configuration.

8-16 Version: A

9 Technical Specification

The following introduces the technical specifications of the FONST 5000 U series of

products.

Frequency and Wavelength

Specifications of Tributary Interface Cards

Specifications of Line Interface Cards

Specifications of Cross-Connect Cards

Specifications of PIC Cards

Specifications of the Optical Transponder Cards

Specifications of Optical Layer Cards

Specifications of System Connection and Management Cards

DCM Specifications

Power Consumption of Cards

Mechanical Dimensions

Version: A 9-1


9.1 Frequency and Wavelength

The FONST 5000 U series of products support hybrid transmission of the following

signals.

u 48-channel × 10Gbit/s, 48-channel × 40Gbit/s, and 48-channel × 100Gbit/s

u 96-channel × 10Gbit/s, 96-channel × 40Gbit/s, and 96-channel × 100Gbit/s

u The 96-channel below systems support 10Gbit/s, 40Gbit/s, and 100Gbit/s

signals.

Different channels of the FONST 5000 U series of products use different bands.

u 48-channel system: The channel spacing is 100 GHz. The 48 channels in the

CE band are usually used.

u 96-channel system: The channel spacing is 50 GHz. The 96 channels (48

channels in the CO and 48 channels in the CE bands respectively) are usually

used. Using the channel interleaved technology, the channel spacing can be

converted from 100 GHz to 50 GHz.

Table 9-1 lists the frequencies and wavelengths at the CO and CE bands.

Table 9-1 Frequencies and Wavelengths at the CO and CE Bands

CE CO

No f (THz) λ (nm) No f (THz) λ (nm)

1 196.000 1529.55 1 196.050 1529.16

2 195.900 1530.33 2 195.950 1529.94

3 195.800 1531.12 3 195.850 1530.72

4 195.700 1531.90 4 195.750 1531.51

5 195.600 1532.68 5 195.650 1532.29

6 195.500 1533.47 6 195.550 1533.07

7 195.400 1534.25 7 195.450 1533.86

8 195.300 1535.04 8 195.350 1534.64

9 195.200 1535.82 9 195.250 1535.43

10 195.100 1536.61 10 195.150 1536.22

11 195.000 1537.40 11 195.050 1537.00

12 194.900 1538.19 12 194.950 1537.79

13 194.800 1538.98 13 194.850 1538.58

14 194.700 1539.77 14 194.750 1539.37

15 194.600 1540.56 15 194.650 1540.16

9-2 Version: A


Table 9-1 Frequencies and Wavelengths at the CO and CE Bands (Continued)

CE CO

No f (THz) λ (nm) No f (THz) λ (nm)

16 194.500 1541.35 16 194.550 1540.95

17 194.400 1542.14 17 194.450 1541.75

18 194.300 1542.94 18 194.350 1542.54

19 194.200 1543.73 19 194.250 1543.33

20 194.100 1544.53 20 194.150 1544.13

21 194.000 1545.32 21 194.050 1544.92

22 193.900 1546.12 22 193.950 1545.72

23 193.800 1546.92 23 193.850 1546.52

24 193.700 1547.72 24 193.750 1547.32

25 193.600 1548.51 25 193.650 1548.11

26 193.500 1549.32 26 193.550 1548.91

27 193.400 1550.12 27 193.450 1549.72

28 193.300 1550.92 28 193.350 1550.52

29 193.200 1551.72 29 193.250 1551.32

30 193.100 1552.52 30 193.150 1552.12

31 193.000 1553.33 31 193.050 1552.93

32 192.900 1554.13 32 192.950 1553.73

33 192.800 1554.94 33 192.850 1554.54

34 192.700 1555.75 34 192.750 1555.34

35 192.600 1556.55 35 192.650 1556.15

36 192.500 1557.36 36 192.550 1556.96

37 192.400 1558.17 37 192.450 1557.77

38 192.300 1558.98 38 192.350 1558.58

39 192.200 1559.79 39 192.250 1559.39

40 192.100 1560.61 40 192.150 1560.20

41 192.000 1561.42 41 192.050 1561.01

42 191.900 1562.23 42 191.950 1561.83

43 191.800 1563.05 43 191.850 1562.64

44 191.700 1563.86 44 191.750 1563.45

45 191.600 1564.68 45 191.650 1564.27

46 191.500 1565.5 46 191.550 1565.09

47 191.400 1566.31 47 191.450 1565.90

48 191.300 1567.13 48 191.350 1566.72

Version: A 9-3


9.2 Specifications of Tributary Interface Cards

The following describes the interface specifications, mechanical specifications and

optical power of the tributary interface cards.

9.2.1 Specifications of the xTN1 Cards

Interface Specifications

Table 9-2 Optical Interface Specifications of the xTN1 Cards

Item Unit Specification

Optical module type –

155M-2.67G

multi-rate SFP

optical module

155M-2.67G

multi-rate SFP

optical module

155M-2.67G

multi-rate SFP

optical module

Optical line code – NRZ NRZ NRZ

Target distance km 15 40 80

Tran-

smit-

ter at

refer-

ence

point

S

Operating

wavelength rangenm 1260 to 1335 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580

Source type – SLM/DFB SLM/DFB SLM/DFB

Maximum -20dB

widthnm 1 1 1

Minimum side

mode suppression

ratio

dB 30 30 30

Maximum mean

launched powerdBm 0 3 3

Minimum mean

launched powerdBm -5 -2 -2

Minimum

extinction ratiodB 8.2 8.2 8.2

Transmit signal

eye pattern– Compliant with the G.957 template

Re-

cei-

ver at

refer-

ence

point

R

Receiver type – PIN APD

Minimum

sensitivity (BER ≤

10-12)

dBm -18 -27 -28

Minimum overload

(BER ≤ 10-12)dBm 0 -9 -9

9-4 Version: A


Table 9-2 Optical Interface Specifications of the xTN1 Cards (Continued)


Maximum

reflectance of

receiver, measured

at reference point

R

dB -27 -27 -27

Mechanical Parameters

Table 9-3 Mechanical Parameters of the xTN1 Cards

Card Panel Dimension (H × W) (mm)

8TN1 407×30

16TN1 407×30

24TN1 407×30

32TN1 407×30

Power Consumption

Table 9-4 Power Consumption of the xTN1 Cards

Card Maximum Power Consumption (W)

8TN1 72

16TN1 (PMC) 80

16TN1 (microelectronic) 85

24TN1 95

32TN1 110

9.2.2 Specifications of the xTN2 Cards


Table 9-5 Optical Interface Specifications of the xTN2 Cards


Optical module type –10 Gbit/s (multiple

rates)

Target distance km 10

Version: A 9-5


Table 9-5 Optical Interface Specifications of the xTN2 Cards (Continued)


Trans-

mitter at

refer-

ence

point S

Operating wavelength range nm 1290 to 1330

Maximum -20dB width nm 1.0

Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 30

Maximum mean launched power dBm -1

Minimum mean launched power dBm -6

Minimum extinction ratio dB 6.5

Transmit signal eye pattern –

Compliant with the

ITU-T G.691

template

Recei-

ver at

refer-

ence

point R

Receiver type – PIN

Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm -14

Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm -1

Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured

at reference point RdB -14


Table 9-6 Mechanical Parameters of the xTN2 Cards


4TN2 407×30

8TN2 407×30

10TN2 407×30

12TN2 407×30

20TN2 407×30

Power Consumption

Table 9-7 Power Consumption of the xTN2 Cards


4TN2 120

8TN2 123

10TN2 125

12TN2 127

20TN2 145.6

9-6 Version: A


9.2.3 Specifications of the 10TP2 / 20TP2 Card


Table 9-8 Optical Interface Specifications of the 10TP2 / 20TP2 Card


Optical module type –10 Gbit/s

(multiple rates)


Transmitter at

reference point S



Minimum side mode suppression

ratiodB 30

Maximum mean launched power dBm -1




Compliant with

the ITU-T G.691

template

Receiver at

reference point R

Receiver type – PIN


Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 0

Maximum reflectance of receiver,

measured at reference point RdB -27


Table 9-9 Mechanical Parameters of the 10TP2 / 20TP2 Card


10TP2 407×30

20TP2 407×30

Power Consumption

Table 9-10 Power Consumption of the 10TP2 / 20TP2 Card


10TP2 88

20TP2 100

Version: A 9-7


9.2.4 Specifications of the 1TO3 Card


Table 9-11 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1TO3 Card


Optical module type – VSR

Optical line code – NRZ



-20dB spectrum width nm ≤ 1

Tran-

smit-

ter at

refer-

ence

point

S

Source type – MSA

Minimum side mode

suppression ratiodB 35

Maximum mean launched power

(each lane)dBm 3

Minimum mean launched power

(each lane)dBm 0


Transmit signal eye pattern –Compliant with the G.693

template

Re-

cei-

ver

at

refer-

ence

point

R



Maximum optical path penalty dB 2

Maximum reflectance of

receiver, measured at reference

point R

dB -27


Table 9-12 Mechanical Parameters of the 1TO3 Card


1TO3 407×30

9-8 Version: A


Power Consumption

Table 9-13 Power Consumption of the 1TO3 Card


1TO3 120

9.2.5 Specifications of the 1TN3 / 2TN3 Card


Table 9-14 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1TN3 / 2TN3 Card


Optical module type – C4S1-2D1



Op-

erat-

ing

wa-

ve-

leng-

th

rang-

e

LANE0 nm 1264.5 to 1277.5

LANE1 nm 1284.5 to 1297.5

LANE2 nm 1304.5 to 1317.5

LANE3 nm 1324.5 to 1337.5

Tran-

smit-

ter at

refer-

ence

point

S

Source type – SMF

Minimum side mode



(each lane)dBm 2.3


(each lane)dBm -7


Transmit signal eye pattern –Compliant with the ITU-T G.959.

1 template

Version: A 9-9


Table 9-14 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1TN3 / 2TN3 Card (Continued)


Re-

cei-

ver

at

refer-

ence

point

R

Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm -11.5





point R

dB -26


Table 9-15 Mechanical Parameters of the 1TN3 / 2TN3 Card


1TN3 407×30

2TN3 407×30

Power Consumption

Table 9-16 Power Consumption of the 1TN3 / 2TN3 Card


1TN3 110

2TN3 160

9.2.6 Specifications of the 1TN4 / 2TN4 Card


Table 9-17 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1TN4 / 2TN4 Card


Optical module type – C4S1-2D1



9-10 Version: A


Table 9-17 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1TN4 / 2TN4 Card (Continued)


Op-

erat-

ing

wa-

ve-

leng-

th

rang-

e

LANE0 nm 1264.5 to 1277.5

LANE1 nm 1284.5 to 1297.5

LANE2 nm 1304.5 to 1317.5

LANE3 nm 1324.5 to 1337.5

Tran-

smit-

ter at

refer-

ence

point

S

Source type – SMF

Minimum side mode



(each lane)dBm 2.3


(each lane)dBm -7


Transmit signal eye pattern –Compliant with the G.959.1

template

Re-

cei-

ver

at

refer-

ence

point

R

Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm -11.5





point R

dB -26


Table 9-18 Mechanical Parameters of the 1TN4 / 2TN4 Card


1TN4 407×30

2TN4 407×30

Version: A 9-11


Power Consumption

Table 9-19 Power Consumption of the 1TN4 / 2TN4 Card


1TN4 120

2TN4 177

9.3 Specifications of Line Interface Cards

The following describes the interface specifications, mechanical specifications and

power consumption of the line interface cards.

9.3.1 Specifications of the xLN2 Cards


Table 9-20 Optical Interface Specifications of the xLN2 Cards


Source type and modulation type – DFB/MZ

Dispersion tolerance ps/nm800 (wavelength

untunable module)

Transmitter at

reference point S



ratiodB 30

Maximum mean launched power dBm 2


Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 (Filter off)


Compliant with the

ITU-T G.691

template

Receiver at

reference point R

Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm -17 (PIN)

Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 0 (PIN)



measured at reference point RdB -27

9-12 Version: A



Table 9-21 Mechanical Parameters of the xLN2 Cards


4LN2 407×30

12LN2 407×30

20LN2 407×30

Power Consumption

Table 9-22 Power Consumption of the xLN2 Cards


4LN2 130

12LN2 140

20LN2 160

9.3.2 Specifications of the 1LN4 / 2LN4 Card


Table 9-23 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1LN4 / 2LN4 Card on the WDM Side


Channel spacing GHz 50

Optical line code – Coherent PM-QPSK

Transmission rate Gbit/s 127.156

Tran-

smit-

ter at

refer-

ence

point

S

Nominal central frequency

rangeTHz 191.3 to 196.05

Maximum central frequency

deviationGHz ±2.5

Maximum -20dB spectrum

widthnm 0.5

Minimum side mode


Maximum mean launched

powerdBm 5

Minimum mean launched

powerdBm -5

Version: A 9-13


Table 9-23 Optical Interface Specifications of the 1LN4 / 2LN4 Card on the WDM Side

(Continued)


Re-

cei-

ver at

refer-

ence

point

R

Minimum sensitivity of the

receiverdBm ≤ -18

Minimum overload of the

receiverdBm ≥0

Maximum reflectance of the

receiverdB ≤ -27

Receiving range of the

receiver Note 1nm 1529.16 to 1567.14

Dispersion tolerance ps/nm ±55000

Differential group delay

tolerance valueps 105 (0.5dB OSNR cost)

Note 1: Receivable wavelength range for the receiver. The receiver is required to work within

the range that corresponds to the transmitted wavelength.


Table 9-24 Mechanical Parameters of the 1LN4 / 2LN4 Card


1LN4 (single-slot) 407×30

1LN4 (double-slot) 407×60

2LN4 407×60

Power Consumption

Table 9-25 Power Consumption of the 1LN4 / 2LN4 Card


1LN4 (single-slot) 185

1LN4 (double-slot) 185

2LN4 300

9.4 Specifications of Cross-Connect Cards

The following describes the specifications of the cross-connect cards of the FONST


9-14 Version: A



Table 9-26 Mechanical Parameters of the Cross-connect Cards


UXU2 (U60/U60 2.0) 352×55

UXU2 (U40/U30/U20/U10) 352×30

Power Consumption

Table 9-27 Power Consumption of the Cross-connect Cards


UXU2 120

9.5 Specifications of PIC Cards

The following describes the PIC card specifications of the FONST 5000 U series of

products.

9.5.1 Specifications of the 10IL2 Card


Table 9-28 Optical Interface Specifications of the 10IL2 Card

Item Unit PIN Module Specification APD Module Specification

Rate Gb/s 9.953 to 11.3 9.953 to 11.3

Maximum

-20dB spectrum

width

nm 0.3 0.4

Minimum side

mode

suppression

ratio

dB 35 30

Transmit power dBm -5 to 1 -1 to 2

Optical power

of the

multiplexer

dBm 5 to 11 8 to 11

Version: A 9-15


Table 9-28 Optical Interface Specifications of the 10IL2 Card (Continued)


Maximum

output power of

a wavelength

dBm 0.5 0.5

Maximum

output power

error

dB 1.5 2

Transmit signal

eye pattern― Fit G.959.1 mode Fit G.959.1 mode

Acceptable

receive rangenm Band1 to Band8 Band1 to Band8

Channel

spacingGHz 100 100

Maximum

central

frequency

deviation

nm -0.05 to +0.05 -0.05 to +0.05

Minimum

sensitivity of

the single-

channel

receiver

dBm -13 -24

Minimum

sensitivity of

the all-channel

receiver

dBm -3 -11

Minimum

overload of the

single-channel

receiver

dBm 2 -9

Minimum

overload of the

all-channel

receiver

dBm 12 1

Maximum

reflectance of

the receiver

dB -27 -27

Maximum

transmission

loss

dB 3 3

9-16 Version: A


Table 9-28 Optical Interface Specifications of the 10IL2 Card (Continued)


Minimum

optical signal-

to-noise ratio

dB 12 12



Table 9-29 Mechanical Parameters of the 10IL2 Card


10IL2 407×30

Power Consumption

Table 9-30 Power Consumption of the 10IL2 Card


10IL2 130

9.5.2 Specifications of the BMD2 Card

Specifications of the BMD2 Card

Table 9-31 Specifications of the BMD2 Card


OSC 1510 wavelength range nm 1510 to 1520

DWDM channel spacing GHz 100

DWDM channel bandwidth nm λ±0.11

Bandwidth range nmBand 2: 1537.4 to 1544.53

Band 3: 1546.12 to 1553.33

Insertion loss dB

OSC 1550 channel: ≤ 0.8


Multiplexing and

demultiplexing: ≤ 1.4

Version: A 9-17


Table 9-31 Specifications of the BMD2 Card (Continued)


Isolation dB

Adjacent channel isolation of

multiplexing and

demultiplexing: ≥ 15

OSC 1550 channel: ≥ 15


Temperature-related loss dB ≤ 0.005

Return loss dB ≥ 45

Direction dB ≥ 50

Polarization dependent loss dB ≤ 0.15

PMD Ps ≤ 0.15


Table 9-32 Mechanical Parameters of the BMD2 Card

Card Panel Dimensions (H × W) (mm)

BMD2 407×30

Power Consumption

Table 9-33 Power Consumption of the BMD2 Card


BMD2 20

9.5.3 Specifications of the BMD2P Card

Specifications of the BMD2P Card

Table 9-34 Specifications of the BMD2P Card






Band 3: 1546.12 to 1553.33

9-18 Version: A


Table 9-34 Specifications of the BMD2P Card (Continued)


Insertion loss dB



Multiplexing and


Isolation dB


multiplexing and






Direction dB ≥ 50


PMD Ps ≤ 0.15

Specifications of the BMD2P Card's Amplifier

Table 9-35 Specifications of the BMD2P Card's Amplifier


Gain flatness dB ≤ 1.5

Output power (APR) dB -1

Output power with no input

powerdB -16 to -12

Error range of nominal gain dB ±0.5

Error range of saturated

output optical powerdB ±0.5

Split ratio of the output power

monitoring interface% 1

VOA attenuation range dB 0 to 25


Table 9-36 Mechanical Parameters of the BMD2P Card


BMD2P 407×30

Version: A 9-19


Power Consumption

Table 9-37 Power Consumption of the BMD2P Card


BMD2P 28

9.5.4 Specifications of the BMD2PP Card

Specifications of the BMD2PP Card

Table 9-38 Specifications of the BMD2PP Card






Band 3: 1546.12 to 1553.33

Insertion loss dB



Multiplexing and


Isolation dB


multiplexing and






Direction dB ≥ 50


PMD Ps ≤ 0.15

Specifications of the BMD2PP Card's Amplifier

Table 9-39 Specifications of the BMD2PP Card's Amplifier


Gain flatness dB ≤ 1.5

Output power (APR) dB -1

9-20 Version: A


Table 9-39 Specifications of the BMD2PP Card's Amplifier (Continued)


Output power with no input

powerdB -16 to -12

Error range of nominal gain dB ±0.5

Error range of saturated

output optical powerdB ±0.5

Split ratio of the output power

monitoring interface% 1

VOA attenuation range dB 0 to 25


Table 9-40 Mechanical Parameters of the BMD2PP Card


BMD2PP 407×30

Power Consumption

Table 9-41 Power Consumption of the BMD2PP Card


BMD2PP 36

9.6 Specifications of the Optical TransponderCards

The following introduces the interface specifications, mechanical parameters, and

power consumption of the optical transponder cards.

Version: A 9-21


9.6.1 Specifications of the MST2 Card


Table 9-42 Specifications of Client Side Interfaces on the MST2 Card (the STM-16 / OTU1

Service)


Optical module type -

155M-2.

67G multi-

rate SFP

optical

module

155M-2.67G

multi-rate

SFP optical

module

155M-2.67G

multi-rate

SFP optical

module

Optical line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ


Transmitter at

reference point S

Operating wavelength range nm1260 to

1335

1280 to

1335

1500 to

1580

Source type - SLM/DFB SLM/DFB SLM/DFB

Maximum -20 dB width nm 1 1 1


ratiodB 30 30 30

Maximum mean launched power dBm 0 3 3

Minimum mean launched power dBm -5 -2 -2

Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 8.2 8.2

Transmit signal eye pattern - ITU-T G.957 mask compliant

Receiver at

reference point R

Receiver type - PIN APD

Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm -18 -27 -28

Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 0 -9 -9


measured at RdB -27 -27 -27

Table 9-43 Specifications of Client Side Interfaces on the MST2 Card (the GE Service)


Optical module type -1000BA-

SE-SX

1000B-

ASE-LX

1000BA-

SE-EX

1000BA-

SE-ZX

Optical line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ

Target distance km 0.55 10 40 80

Transmitter at

reference point S


860

1270 to

1355

1275 to

1350

1500 to

1580

Maximum mean launched power dBm 0 -3 0 5

9-22 Version: A


Table 9-43 Specifications of Client Side Interfaces on the MST2 Card (the GE Service)

(Continued)


Minimum mean launched power dBm -9.5 -8 -5 0

Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 9 9 9

Transmit signal eye pattern - IEEE 802.3 mask compliant

Receiver at

reference point R

Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 0 -3 -3 -3

Table 9-44 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the MST2 Card


Source type and modulation mode - DFB/MZ

Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 800

Transmitter at reference

point S

Maximum -20 dB width nm 0.3




Minimum extinction ratio dB 10

Transmit signal eye pattern -ITU-T G.691 mask

compliant

Receiver at reference

point R




at RdB -27


Table 9-45 Mechanical Parameters of the MST2 Card

Card Panel Dimension (Height × Width) (mm) Net Weight (kg)

MST2 368 × 30 1.13

Power Consumption

Table 9-46 Power Consumption of the MST2 Card


MST2 40

Version: A 9-23


9.6.2 Specifications of the OTU2S Card


Table 9-47 Specifications of Client Side Interfaces on the OTU2S Card



10 Gbit/s

(multiple

rates)

10 Gbit/s

(multiple

rates)

10 Gbit/s

(multiple

rates)


Transmitter at

reference point S


1330

1530 to

1565

1530 to

1565

Maximum -20 dB width nm 1.0 0.4 0.4


ratiodB 30 - -

Maximum mean launched power dBm -1 2 4

Minimum mean launched power dBm -6 -1 0

Minimum extinction ratio dB 6.5 8.2 9


Receiver at

reference point R



Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 0 0 -7








point S







compliant

Receiver at reference point

R



9-24 Version: A


Table 9-48 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2S Card (Continued)



measured at RdB -27


Table 9-49 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU2S Card


OTU2S 368 × 30 1.0

OTU2S (XFP) 368 × 30 1.03

Power Consumption

Table 9-50 Power Consumption of the OTU2S Card


OTU2S 25

OTU2S (XFP) 16

9.6.3 Specification of the 2OTU2S Card


Table 9-51 Specifications of Wavelength Division Side Optical Interfaces on the 2OTU2S Card



10 Gbit/s

(multiple

rates)

10 Gbit/s

(multiple

rates)

10 Gbit/s

(multiple

rates)


Transmitter at

reference point S


1330

1530 to

1565

1530 to

1565

Maximum -20dB width nm 1.0 0.4 0.4

Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 30 - -





Version: A 9-25



(Continued)


Receiver at

reference point R








Source type and modulation mode – DFB/MZ



point S







compliant


point R




measured at RdB -27


Table 9-53 Mechanical Parameters of the 2OTU2S Card


2OTU2S 368×30 1.03

Power Consumption

Table 9-54 Power Consumption of the 2OTU2S Card


2OTU2S 36

9-26 Version: A


9.6.4 Specifications of the OTU2E Card





155M-2.67G

multi-rate SFP

optical module

155M-2.67G

multi-rate SFP

optical module

155M-2.67G

multi-rate SFP

optical module

Optical line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ


Transmitter at

reference point S

Operating wavelength range nm 1260 to 1335 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580

Source type - SLM/DFB SLM/DFB SLM/DFB

Maximum -20 dB width nm 1 1 1

Minimum side mode

suppression ratiodB 30 30 30

Maximum mean launched

powerdBm 0 3 3

Minimum mean launched

powerdBm -5 -2 -2

Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 8.2 8.2


Receiver at

reference point R


Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤

10-12)dBm -18 -27 -28

Minimum overload (BER ≤

10-12)dBm 0 -9 -9


receiver, measured at RdB -27 -27 -27





Transmitter at

reference point S





Version: A 9-27


Table 9-56 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2E Card (Continued)




compliant


point R



Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured at

RdB -27


Table 9-57 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU2E Card


OTU2E 368 × 30 1.2

Power Consumption

Table 9-58 Power Consumption of the OTU2E Card


OTU2E 33

9.6.5 Specification of the OTU2F Card


Table 9-59 Specifications of Wavelength Division Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU2F Card


Source type and modulation mode – DFB/MZ



point S







compliant

9-28 Version: A



(Continued)



point R




RdB -27


Table 9-60 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU2F Card


OTU2F 368 × 30 1.5

Power Consumption

Table 9-61 Power Consumption of the OTU2F Card


OTU2F 29





Optical line code - NRZ

Application code - VRZ2000-3R2

Fiber type - G.652

Transmitter at reference point

S


Maximum -20 dB width nm -



Minimum mean launched power dBm 0


Receiver at reference point R Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm -6

Version: A 9-29


Table 9-62 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3S Card (Continued)






measured at RdB -27



Channel spacing GHz 50 50

Optical line code - sRZ-DQPSK sDPSK

Transmitter

at reference

point S

Maximum central frequency deviation GHz ±2.5 ±2.5

Maximum -20 dB width nm NA NA

Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35 35

Maximum mean launched power dBm 5 5

Minimum mean launched power dBm -10 -5

Transmit signal eye pattern - TBD TBD

Minimum extinction ratio dB NA NA

Receiver at

reference

point R

Minimum sensitivity of the receiver Note 1 dBm -14 -14

Minimum overload of the receiver dBm 0 0

Maximum reflectance of the receiver dB -27 -27

Receiving range of the receiver Note 2 nm1528 to

15681528 to 1568

Note 1: An optical pre-amplifier is integrated in the receiver.

Note 2: The receiver is required to work within the range that corresponds to the transmitted wavelength.

The built-in PA module on the wavelength division side in the receiving direction of

the OTU3S card is a single-wavelength optical amplification module applicable to

the 40G optical transport network. Using the pump laser with TEC (Thermo Electric

Cooling), the module can adjust its output power in the range of 0 to 10 dBm. See

Table 9-64 for specifications of the module.

Table 9-64 Specifications of the Built-in PA Module of the OTU3S Card


Optical wavelength range nm 1528 to 1568

Input power range dBm -30 to 0

9-30 Version: A


Table 9-64 Specifications of the Built-in PA Module of the OTU3S Card (Continued)


Output optical power range Note 1 dBm 0 to 10

Gain Note 2 dB ≥ 25

NF (noise figure) - 5.5 / 7.5

Threshold for the Rx-LOS alarm dBm -25 to -24

Threshold for the Tx-LOS alarm dBm -3 to -2

Input optical power threshold at pump OFF dBm -25 to -24

Note 1: The optical output power includes the signal power and the ASE power. Make sure that

the output optical power is 10 dBm when the input power is more than -25 dBm. In the

APC working mode, the optical power can be adjusted within the range via the

parameter setting.

Note 2: For the signal power gain, the larger gain the better. However, make sure that the gain

should be no less than 20 dB.

Table 9-65 Specifications of the Built-in TDCM of the OTU3S Card


Wavelength range nm 1527 to 1565

Mean dispersion accuracy ps/nm ±20

Insertion loss dB 4




OTU3S 368 × 60 3.0 (DPSK) / 3.4 (DQPSK)

Power Consumption



OTU3S 81 (DPSK) / 91 (DQPSK)

Version: A 9-31


9.6.7 Specification of the OTU3S Card (Coherent)


Table 9-68 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3S Card (Coherent)


Optical line code - NRZ

Application code - VRZ2000-3R2

Fiber type - G.652

Transmitter at

reference point S


Maximum -20 dB width nm -



Minimum mean launched power dBm 0



point R






at point RdB -27

Table 9-69 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3S Card (Coherent)



Optical line code - PM-DQPSK

Transmitter at

reference point S

Maximum central frequency deviation GHz ±2.5





Transmit signal eye pattern - TBD

Minimum extinction ratio dB NA

Receiver at

reference point R

Minimum sensitivity of the receiver Note 1 dBm -15

Minimum overload of the receiver dBm 0


point RdB -27

9-32 Version: A


Table 9-69 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3S Card (Coherent)

(Continued)


Receiving range of the receiver Note 2 nm 1528 to 1568


Differential group delay tolerance ps 100


Note 2: The receivable wavelength of the receiver should be corresponding to the Tx wavelength.


Table 9-70 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU3S Card (Coherent)

Card Panel Dimension (Height×Width) (mm) Net Weight (kg)

OTU3S (Coherent) 368×60 3.2

Power Consumption

Table 9-71 Power Consumption of the OTU3S Card (Coherent)


OTU3S (Coherent) 108






10 Gbit/s

(multiple

rates)

10 Gbit/s

(multiple

rates)

10 Gbit/s

(multiple

rates)


Transmitter at

reference point

S


1330

1530 to

1565

1530 to

1565




Version: A 9-33


Table 9-72 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3E Card (Continued)





Receiver at

reference point

R









Optical line code -sRZ-

DQPSKsDPSK

Transmitter at

reference point S








Receiver at

reference point R




Receiving range of the receiver Note 2 nm1528 to

1568

1528 to

1568



The built-in OPA module on the wavelength division side in the receiving direction of

the OTU3E card is a single-wavelength optical amplification module applicable to

the 40G optical transport network. Using the pump laser with TEC (Thermo Electric


Table 9-74 and Table 9-75 for the parameters.

9-34 Version: A


Table 9-74 Specifications of the Built-in PA Module of the OTU3E Card


Optical wavelength range (48 channels of C-band) nm 1528 to 1568



Gain Note 2 dB ≥ 25

NF (noise figure) dB 5.5 / 7.5

Threshold for the Rx-LOS alarm dBm -25 to -24






parameter setting.



Table 9-75 Specifications of the Built-in TDCM of the OTU3E Card


Wavelength range nm 1527 to 1565

Mean dispersion accuracy ps/nm ±20

Insertion loss dB 4




OTU3E 368 × 60 2.75

Power Consumption



OTU3E 75 (DPSK) / 85 (DQPSK)

Version: A 9-35


9.6.9 Specification of the OTU3E Card (Coherent)


Table 9-78 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3E Card (Coherent)



10 Gbit/s

(multiple

rates)

10 Gbit/s

(multiple

rates)

10 Gbit/s

(multiple

rates)


Transmitter

at reference

point S


1330

1530 to

1565

1530 to

1565






Transmit signal eye pattern - ITU-T Rec. G.691 mask compliant

Receiver at

reference

point R





point RdB -27 -27 -27

Table 9-79 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3E Card (Coherent)



Optical line code - PM-DQPSK

Transmitter at

reference point S






Transmit signal eye pattern - TBD

Minimum extinction ratio dB NA

Receiver at

reference point R

Minimum sensitivity of the receiver Note 1 dBm -20

Minimum overload of the receiver dBm 0

9-36 Version: A


Table 9-79 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU3E Card (Coherent)

(Continued)


Maximum reflectance of receiver dB -27

Receiving range of the receiver Note 2 nm 1528 to 1568


Differential group delay tolerance ps 100


Note 2: The receivable wavelength of the receiver should be corresponding to the Tx wavelength.


Table 9-80 Mechanical Parameters of the OTU3E Card (Coherent)

Card Panel Dimension (Height×Width) (mm) Net Weight (kg)

OTU3E (Coherent) 368×90 3.5

Power Consumption

Table 9-81 Power Consumption of the OTU3E Card (Coherent)


OTU3E (Coherent) 98

9.6.10 Specification of the OTU3F Card





Optical line code - sRZ-DQPSK sDPSK

Transmitter at

reference point S







Version: A 9-37



(Continued)



Receiver at

reference point R




Receiving range of the receiver Note 2 nm 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568



The built-in PA module on the wavelength division side in the Rx direction of the

OTU3E card is a single-wavelength optical amplification module applicable to the

40G optical transport network. Using the pump laser with TEC (Thermo Electric


Table 9-83 for specific specifications.

Table 9-83 Specifications of the Built-in PA Module of the OTU3F Card


Optical wavelength range nm 1528 to 1568



Gain Note 2 dB ≥25

NF (noise figure) dB 5.5 / 7.5

Threshold for Rx-LOS alarm dBm -25 to -24






parameter setting.



9-38 Version: A





OTU3F (2.018.150) 368×90 3.7

OTU3F (2.200.589) 368×90 3.98

OTU3F (2.200.181) 368×90 4.11

Power Consumption



OTU3F (2.018.150) 88

OTU3F (2.200.589) 93

OTU3F (2.200.181) 98





Optical interface type - 100GBASE-LR4

100G-

BASE-

ER4

4I1-

9D1F4I1-9C1F

Single-channel signal rate Gbit/s 25.78125 27.95249339

Multiplexed signal rate Gbit/s 103.125 111.8099736

Transmitter at

reference point S

Transmitter central

wavelength rangenm

λ1 1294.53 to 1296.59

λ2 1299.02 to 1301.09

λ3 1303.54 to 1305.63

λ4 1308.09 to 1310.19

Single-channel mean

launched power (OMA)dBm -2.5 to +2.9 -2.7 to +2.9

-2.5 to

+2.9

-0.6 to +4.

5

Version: A 9-39


Table 9-86 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU4S Card (Continued)


Single-channel eye

pattern-

X1 X2 X3 Y1 Y2 Y3

0.25 0.4 0.45 0.25 0.28 0.4

Single-channel eye

pattern extinction ratiodB ≥ 4 ≥ 8 ≥ 4 ≥ 8

Receiver at

reference point R

Single-channel receiver

minimum sensitivitydBm ≤ -8.6 (OMA)

≤ -21.4

(OMA)≤ -10.5 ≤ -23.2

Single-channel minimum

overloaddBm 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5




Optical line code - Coherent PM-QPSK


Transmitter at

reference point S

Nominal central frequency range THz 191.3 to 196.05






Receiver at

reference point R

Minimum sensitivity of the receiver dBm ≤ -18

Minimum overload of the receiver dBm ≥ 0

Maximum reflectance of the receiver dB ≤ -27

Receiving range of the receiver Note 1 nm 1529.16 to 1567.14


9-40 Version: A


Table 9-87 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU4S Card (Continued)


Differential group delay tolerance ps 105 (0.5 dB OSNR cost)





OTU4S 368 × 60 3.25

Power Consumption



OTU4S 160






10

Gbit/s

(multi-

ple

rates)

10 Gbit/s

(multiple

rates)

10

Gbit/s

(multi-

ple

rates)


Transmitter at

reference point S


1330

1530 to

1565

1530 to

1565






Version: A 9-41


Table 9-90 Specifications of Client Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU4E Card (Continued)




point R





at RdB -27 -27 -27







point S








point R











OTU4E 368 × 60 3.75

9-42 Version: A


Power Consumption



OTU4E 200

9.6.13 Specifications of the OTU4F Card


Table 9-94 Specifications of WDM Side Optical Interfaces on the OTU4F Card






point S








point R











OTU4F 368 × 90 4.5

Version: A 9-43


Power Consumption



OTU4F 250

9.7 Specifications of Optical Layer Cards

The following describes the optical layer card specifications of the FONST 5000 U

series of products.

9.7.1 Specifications of the OMU Series Card


Table 9-97 Specifications of the OMU Series Cards



Insertion loss

OMU2

dB

≤ 3.8

OMU4 ≤ 7

OMU8 ≤ 11

OMU40 ≤ 6.5

OMU48 ≤ 6.5

Insertion loss difference dB ≤ 1.5

Adjacent channel isolation dB ≥ 25

Nonadjacent channel isolation dB ≥ 30

Integrated cross interference dB ≥ 23


-1 dB width nm ≥ 0.4

-20 dB width nm ≤ 1.2

Central wavelength shift nm ±0.05

9-44 Version: A



Table 9-98 Mechanical Parameters of OMU Series Cards


OMU8 368 × 30 0.9

OMU4 368 × 30 0.9

OMU2 368 × 30 0.9

OMU40 368 × 60 1.1

OMU48 368 × 60 1.1

Power Consumption

Table 9-99 Power Consumption of the OMU Series Cards


OMU48_E 15

OMU40_E 15

OMU48_O 15

OMU40_O 15

OMU2 2

OMU8 2

OMU4 2

9.7.2 Specification of the VMU Series Card


Table 9-100 Specifications of the VMU Series Cards



Insertion loss dB ≤7.5Note 1


Ripple dB ≤ 0.75

Adjacent channel isolation dB ≥25

Non-adjacent channel isolation dB ≥30

Integrated cross interference dB ≥22

-1 dB spectrum width nm ≥0.4

-20 dB spectrum width nm ≤ 1.2

Version: A 9-45


Table 9-100 Specifications of the VMU Series Cards (Continued)



VOA attenuation range dB 0-10

VOA response time ms ≤ 10

VOA attenuation accuracy dB ±0.8

power-off attenuation value dB ≥10

Note 1: This item is the test value when the VOA attenuation value is set to 0dB. The VOA

attenuation value of each channel is set to 0dB by default before delivery, and users

can adjust the value according to the project requirement in practise.


Table 9-101 Mechanical Parameters of VMU Series Cards


VMU48 / 40 368×60 1.8

Power Consumption

Table 9-102 Power Consumption of the VMU Series Cards


VMU48_E 40

VMU40_E 40

VMU48_O 40

VMU40_O 40

9.7.3 Specifications of the ODU Series Card


Table 9-103 Specifications of the ODU Series Cards



Insertion loss

ODU2

dB

≤ 3.8

ODU4 ≤ 7

ODU8 ≤ 11

9-46 Version: A


Table 9-103 Specifications of the ODU Series Cards (Continued)


ODU40 ≤ 6.5

ODU48 ≤ 6.5



Nonadjacent channel isolation dB ≥ 30

Integrated cross interference dB ≥ 23


-1 dB width nm ≥ 0.4

-20 dB width nm ≤ 1.2



Table 9-104 Mechanical Parameters of ODU Series Cards


ODU2 368 × 30 0.9

ODU4 368 × 30 0.9

ODU8 368 × 30 0.9

ODU40 368 × 60 1.1

ODU48 368 × 60 1.1

Power Consumption

Table 9-105 Power Consumption of the ODU Series Cards


ODU48_E 15

ODU40_E 15

ODU48_O 15

ODU40_O 15

ODU8 2

ODU4 2

ODU2 2

Version: A 9-47


9.7.4 Specifications of the ITL50 Card


Table 9-106 Specifications of the ITL50 Card


Wavelength range at C-band nm 1528 to 1568

Input optical power range dBm ≤ 27

Input signal wavelength spacing GHZ 50

Output signal wavelength

spacingGHZ 100

Insertion loss

Multiplexing

directiondB ≤ 4

Demultiplexing

directiondB ≤ 3

Optical return loss dB 40


Non-adjacent channel isolation dB ≥ 25

Direction dB ≥ 55

Polarization dependent loss dB 0.5

Maximum insertion loss

difference between channelsdB ≤ 1

PMD Ps ≤ 0.5

-1dB bandwidth nm ≥ 0.1

Device PMD Ps ≤ 0.5


Table 9-107 Mechanical Parameters of the ITL50 Card


ITL50 368×30

Power Consumption

Table 9-108 Power Consumption of the ITL50 Card


ITL50 1

9-48 Version: A


9.7.5 Specifications of the OSCAD Card


Table 9-109 Specifications of the OSCAD Card


Operating wavelength nm 1510 / 1550

Wavelength

Range

Passband nm 1500 to 1520

Reflex bandwidth nm 1528 to 1568

Insertion loss

Transmission

channelNote 1dB ≤ 1.0

Reflection channelNote2 dB ≤ 0.6

IsolationTransmission channel dB ≥ 44

Reflection channel dB ≥ 22

Flatness dB ≤ 0.5

Insertion loss thermal stability dB/℃ ≤ 0.007

Direction dB ≥ 50



Polarization mode dispersion ps ≤ 0.10

Bearer optical power mW ≤ 300

Note 1: Transmission channel refers to the optical supervisory channel with the wavelength of

1510 nm.

Note 2: Reflection channel refers to the main optical channel with the wavelength of 1550 nm.


Table 9-110 Mechanical Parameters of the OSCAD Card


OSCAD 368×30

Power Consumption

Table 9-111 Power Consumption of the OSCAD Card


OSCAD 1

Version: A 9-49


9.7.6 Specifications of the WSS8M Card


Table 9-112 Specifications of the WSS8M Card


Channel spacing GHz 50 / 100


Dimension – 1×9

Isolation dB > 35

Insertion loss

An/MI→LO dB < 6.5

LI→LONote 1 dB < 13

LI→DROP dB < 3.5

LI→MO/EO dB < 7.5

Optical return loss dB > 40

Attenuation range dB 0 to 28

Note 1: To measure the insertion loss (LI→LO), connect the MI and MO ports of the card by

using an optical fiber.


Table 9-113 Mechanical Parameters of the WSS8M Card


WSS8M 368×60

Power Consumption

Table 9-114 Power Consumption of the WSS8M Card


WSS8M 11

9-50 Version: A


9.7.7 Specifications of the WSS8D Card


Table 9-115 Specifications of the WSS8D Card


Channel spacing GHz 50 / 100


Dimension – 1×9

Isolation dB > 35

Insertion loss

LI→Dn/MO dB < 6.5

LI→LONote 1 dB < 13

MI/EI→LO dB < 7.5

ADD→LO dB < 3.5

Optical return loss dB > 40

Attenuation range dB 0 to 28

Note 1: To measure the insertion loss (LI→LO), connect the MI and MO ports of the card using

an optical fiber.


Table 9-116 Mechanical Parameters of the WSS8D Card


WSS8D 368×60

Power Consumption

Table 9-117 Power Consumption of the WSS8D Card


WSS8D 11

Version: A 9-51


9.7.8 Specifications of the OA Card


Table 9-118 Specifications of the OA Card

Item Unit SpecificationRe-

mark

Optical wavelength range nm 1528 to 1568 –

Saturated output optical power dBm 21 24 –

Target gain dB18, 20, 23, 25,

27, 30, 33

18, 20, 23, 25,

27, 30, 33–

Gain flatness dB ≤ 1.5 25°C

Noise figure (NF) dB ≤ 5.5–

DGV dB/dB ≤ 3

Output power (APR) dBm -1±0.5 –

Output power with no input power dBm 6±0.5 –

Input power monitoring range dBm -25 to 3

–

Output power monitoring range dBm -10 to 22

Split ratio at the output power

monitoring port– 1% 0.5%

Power monitoring accuracy dB ±0.5

Optical power overshoot (at least

two channels with output power no

less than 7 dBm)

dB ≤ 3

Nominal gain error range dB ±0.5

Error range of saturated output

optical powerdB 0.5

EVOA attenuation range dBm 1 to 25


Table 9-119 Mechanical Parameters of the OA Card


OA 368×30

OA 368×60

9-52 Version: A


Power Consumption

Table 9-120 Power Consumption of the OA Card


OA 20

9.7.9 Specifications of the PA Card


Table 9-121 Specifications of the PA Card

Item Unit Specification Remark

Optical wavelength range nm 1528 to 1568 –

Saturated output optical power dBm 14 13 –

Target gain dB10, 14, 17,

2025 –

Gain flatness dB ≤ 1 25°C

Valid noise figure dB ≤ 5.5–

DGV dB/dB ≤ 3

Output power (APR) dBm -1±0.5 –

Output power with no input power dBm -16 to -12 –

Input power monitoring range dBm -33 to 0

–

Output power monitoring range dBm -15 to 15

Split ratio at the output power

monitoring port– 1%

Power monitoring accuracy dB ±0.5

Optical power overshoot (at least

two channels with output power no

less than 7 dBm)

dB ≤ 3

Nominal gain error range dB ±0.5

Error range of saturated output

optical powerdB 0.5

EVOA attenuation range dBm 1 to 25

Version: A 9-53



Table 9-122 Mechanical Parameters of the PA Card


PA 368×30

Power Consumption

Table 9-123 Power Consumption of the PA Card


PA 11

9.7.10 Specifications of the OCP Card


Table 9-124 Specifications of the OCP Card

Item Unit Specification Remark

Insertion loss

IN→TXA, IN→TXB dB ≤ 4.5 Line 1, line 2

RXA→OUT,

RXB→OUTdB ≤ 1.5 Line 1, line 2

Optical power

monitoring rangeRXA/RXB dBm -30 to 20 Line 1, line 2

Optical power detection accuracy dBm ≤ 1 –

Protection switching time ms ≤ 30 –


Table 9-125 Mechanical Parameters of the OCP Card


OCP 368×30

Power Consumption

Table 9-126 Power Consumption of the OCP card


OCP 5

9-54 Version: A


9.7.11 Specifications of the OMSP Card


Table 9-127 Specifications of the OMSP Card


Insertion loss

IN→WTXdB ≤ 4.5

IN→PTX

WRX→OUTdB ≤ 1.5

PRX→OUT

Optical power

monitoring rangeWRX/PRX dBm -30 to 20

Optical power detection accuracy dBm ≤ 1

Protection switching time ms ≤ 30


Table 9-128 Mechanical Parameters of the OMSP Card

Card Panel Dimension (Height × Width) (mm)

OMSP 368×30

Power Consumption

Table 9-129 Power Consumption of the OMSP card


OMSP 3.5

9.7.12 Specifications of the OLP (1+1) Card


Table 9-130 Specifications of the OLP (1+1) Card


Operating

wavelength

OSC interface nm 1510±5

LINE interface nm Standard wavelength of the C-band

MAIN interface nm1510 ± 5 or 1510 + wavelength of

the C-band

Version: A 9-55


Table 9-130 Specifications of the OLP (1+1) Card (Continued)


PROT interface nm1510 ± 5 or 1510 + wavelength of

the C-band

Insertion loss

OSC_I→MAIN_O dB≤ 5.5

OSC_I→PROT_O dB

MAIN_I→LINE_O dB≤ 2.5

PROT_I→LINE_O dB

LINE_I→MAIN_O dB≤ 5.5

LINE_I→PROT_O dB

MAIN_I→OSC_O dB≤ 5.5

PROT_I→OSC_O dB

Isolation

LINE-O (for the 1510

nm signal)dB ≥ 15

OSC-O (for the 1550

nm signal)dB ≥ 30

Input optical

power range

PROT_I dBm -42 to -10

MAIN-I (1510 nm) dBm -42 to -10

MAIN-I (1550 nm) dBm -40 to 10

Optical power monitoring accuracy dBm ±1

Switching time ms ≤ 50



Table 9-131 Mechanical Parameters of the OLP (1+1) Card


OLP (1+1) 368×30

Power Consumption

Table 9-132 Power Consumption of the OLP (1+1) Card


OLP (1+1) 3

9-56 Version: A


9.7.13 Specifications of the OLP (1:1) Card


Table 9-133 Specifications of the OLP (1:1) Card


Operating

wavelength

OSC interface nm 1510±5

LINE interface nmStandard wavelength of the C-

band

MAIN interface nm1510 ± 5 or 1510 + wavelength

of the C-band

PROT interface nm1510 ± 5 or 1510 + wavelength

of the C-band

Insertion loss

OSC_I→MAIN_O dB≤ 5.5

OSC_I→PROT_O dB

MAIN_I→LINE_O dB≤ 2.5

PROT_I→LINE_O dB

LINE_I→MAIN_O dB≤ 2.5

LINE_I→PROT_O dB

MAIN_I→OSC_O dB≤ 5.5

PROT_I→OSC_O dB

Isolation

LINE-O (for the 1510 nm

signal)dB ≥ 15

OSC-O (for the 1550 nm

signal)dB ≥ 30

Input optical

power range

PROT_I dBm -42 to -10

MAIN-I (1510 nm) dBm -42 to -10

MAIN-I (1550 nm) dBm -40 to 10

Optical power monitoring accuracy dBm ±1

Switching time ms ≤ 50



Table 9-134 Mechanical Parameters of the OLP (1:1) Card


OLP (1:1) 368×30

Version: A 9-57


Power Consumption

Table 9-135 Power Consumption of the OLP (1:1) Card


OLP (1:1) 5

9.7.14 Specifications of the OSC / EOSC Card


Table 9-136 Optical Interface Specifications of the OSC / EOSC Card

Item Specification Remark

Line Rate 25.344 Mbit/s–

Code 2B1H

Transmitting optical

power-7 dBm to -2 dBm > 2 dBm for a long span module

Receiver sensitivity -45 dBm -48 dBm for a long span module

Input overload point -3 dBm -8 dBm for a long span module

-20 dB width 0.5 nm

–Side mode suppression

ratio> 30 dB

Operating wavelength1510 nm ± 5 nm (room

temperature)

1510 nm ± 10 nm for a high

temperature (50℃)

Table 9-137 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the OSC / EOSC Card (2048 kbit/s)

Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 2048 kbit/s

Bit rate accuracy ±50 ppm (±102.4 bit/s)

Code HDB3

Pulse shapeRectangular, conforming to the relevant mask in ITU-

T G.703

Pair(s) in each direction One coaxial pair One symmetrical pair

Test load impedance 75 Ω 120 Ω

Nominal peak voltage of a mask

(pulse)2.37V 3V

Peak voltage of a space (no pulse) 0±0.237 V 0±0.3V

Nominal pulse width 244 ns

9-58 Version: A


Table 9-137 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the OSC / EOSC Card (2048 kbit/s)

(Continued)

Item Specification

Ratio of the amplitudes of positive and

negative pulses at the center of the

pulse interval

0.95 to 1.05

Ratio of the widths of positive and

negative pulses at the nominal half

amplitude

0.95 to 1.05

Maximum peak-to-peak jitter at the

output portCompliant with ITU-T G.823

Return loss at the output port (dB)

Return loss in the following frequency ranges:

(51 kHz to 102 kHz) ≥ 6 dB

(102kHz to 3072kHz) ≥ 8 dB

Return loss at the input port (dB)

Return loss in the following frequency ranges:

(51 kHz to 102 kHz) ≥ 12 dB

(102kHz to 2048kHz) ≥ 18 dB

(2048kHz to 3072kHz) ≥ 14 dB

Attenuation at the input port 0 dB to 6 dB (1024 kHz)

Jitter tolerance at the input port Compliant with ITU-T G.823

Table 9-138 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the OSC / EOSC Card (2048 kHz)

Item Specification

Pulse shapeRectangular, conforming to the relevant mask in ITU-

T G.703

Pair type Coaxial pair Symmetrical pair

Test load impedance 75 Ω 12 Ω

Maximum peak voltage (Vop) 1.5 1.9

Minimum peak voltage (Vop) 0.75 1.0

Output jitter≤ 0.05 UIp-p (the measuring frequency range is f1 =

20 Hz to f4 = 100 kHz) (ITU-T G.813)

Attenuation at the input port0 dB to 6 dB attenuation at 2048kHz according to

Return loss ≥ 15dB (at the frequency of 2048 kHz)

Version: A 9-59


Table 9-139 Clock Interface Specifications of the OSC (Electrical Layer) / EOSC Card

Clock Type Description

External clock synchronization source

(W2M)One 120 ohm 2048 Kbit/s or 2048 kHz input

Synchronization output clock (W2M) One 120 ohm 2048 Kbit/s or 2048 kHz output

External time synchronization source

(1PPS+TOD)One 1PPS+TOD time signal input

Synchronization output time (1PPS

+TOD)One 1PPS+TOD time signal output

Table 9-140 GE Optical Interface Specifications of the OSC (Electrical Layer) / EOSC Card


Optical module type – 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-EX 1000BASE-ZX

Optical line code – NRZ NRZ NRZ


Tra-

nsm-

itter

at

re-

fer-

ence

point

S

Operating

wavelength rangenm 1270 to 1355 1275 to 1350 1500 to 1580

Maximum mean

launched powerdBm -3 0 5

Minimum mean

launched powerdBm -8 -5 0

Minimum extinction

ratiodB 9 9 9

Transmit signal eye

pattern– Compliant with the IEEE802.3 template

Re-

cei-

ver

at

re-

fer-

ence

point

R

Minimum sensitivity

(BER ≤ 10-12)dBm -20 -23 -23

Minimum overload

(BER ≤ 10-12)dBm -3 -3 -3

9-60 Version: A



Table 9-141 Mechanical Parameters of the OSC / EOSC Card


OSC (electrical layer) 307×30

OSC (optical layer) 368×30

EOSC 368×30

Power Consumption

Table 9-142 Power Consumption of the OSC / EOSC Card


OSC (electrical layer) 30

OSC (optical layer) 10

EOSC 30

9.7.15 Specifications of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card


Table 9-143 Specifications of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card


Monitoring channel quantity – 96


Central wavelength detection

accuracydBm ±0.05

Power detection accuracy dBm ±0.5

Dynamic range of the signal-to-

noise ratiodB 10 to 25

Signal-to-noise ratio detection

accuracydB ±1.5

Monitoring optical interface

number– 4 / 8

Version: A 9-61



Table 9-144 Mechanical Parameters of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card


OPM4 368×30

OPM8 368×30

Power Consumption

Table 9-145 Power Consumption of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card


OPM4 10

OPM8 10

9.8 Specifications of System Connection andManagement Cards

The following describes the specifications of the system connection and

management cards of the FONST 5000 U series of products.

9.8.1 Specifications of the CCU Card


Table 9-146 Mechanical Parameters of the CCU Card


CCU 307×27.5

Power Consumption

Table 9-147 Power Consumption of the CCU Card


CCU 56

9-62 Version: A


9.8.2 Specifications of the EMU/FCU/EFCU Card


Table 9-148 Mechanical Parameters of the EMU/FCU/EFCU Card


EMU 368×30

FCU 368×30

EFCU 368×30

Power Consumption

Table 9-149 Power Consumption of the EMU/FCU/EFCU Card


EMU 22

FCU 22

EFCU 22

9.8.3 Specifications of the PWR Card


Table 9-150 Mechanical Parameters of the PWR Card


PWR (FONST 5000 U60) 247×30

PWR (FONST 5000 U60 2.0) 112×30

PWR (FONST 5000 U40/U30/U20/U10) 90×30

PWR (COTP 3030036) 190×30

PWR (COTP 3030105) 164×30

Power Consumption

Table 9-151 Power Consumption of the PWR Card


PWR (FONST 5000 U60) 30

PWR (FONST 5000 U60 2.0) 30

PWR (FONST 5000 U40/U30/U20/U10) 30

Version: A 9-63


Table 9-151 Power Consumption of the PWR Card (Continued)


PWR (COTP 3030036) 8

PWR (COTP 3030105) 8

9.8.4 Specifications of the Auxiliary Terminal Card


Table 9-152 Mechanical Parameters of the Auxiliary Terminal Card


AIF (FONST 5000 U60/U60 2.0) 307×27.5

AIF1/AIF2 (FONST 5000 U30/U20) 90.5×30

AIF1/AIF2 (FONST 5000 U40) 407×30

AIF (COTP) 368×30

Power Consumption

Table 9-153 Power Consumption of the Auxiliary Terminal Cards


AIF (FONST 5000 U60/U60 2.0) 5

AIF1 (FONST 5000 U30/U20) 5

AIF2 (FONST 5000 U30/U20) 5

AIF1 (FONST 5000 U40) 15

AIF2 (FONST 5000 U40) 5

AIF (COTP) 10

9.9 DCM Specifications

The following introduces the DCM specifications of the FONST 5000 U series of

products.

Optical lines with a rate of 10 Gbit/s or above are sensitive to dispersion. Therefore,

dispersion compensation is required for lines longer than a certain distance. A

compensation scheme can be selected based on Table 9-154 and Table 9-155.

9-64 Version: A


Table 9-154 G.652 Optical Fiber–DCM Specifications

Module

Type

Typical

Compensa-

tion

Distance

(km)

Maximum

Insertion

Loss (dB)

Dispersion

Slope

Compensa-

tion Rate

PMD (ps)

Polariza-

tion

Dependent

Loss (dB)

Maximum

Input

Power

Allowed

(dBm)

Operating

Wave-

length

Range (nm)

1 20 3.3

90% to 110%

0.4 0.1 20

1528 to

1568

2 40 4.7 0.5 0.1 20

3 60 6.4 0.6 0.1 20

4 80 8 0.7 0.1 20

5 100 9 0.8 0.1 20

6 120 9.8 0.3 0.1 20

Table 9-155 G.655 Optical Fiber–DCM Specifications

Module

Type

Typical

Compensa-

tion

Distance

(km)

Maximum

Insertion

Loss (dB)

Dispersion

Slope

Compensa-

tion Rate

PMD (ps)

Polariza-

tion

Dependent

Loss (dB)

Maximum

Input

Power

Allowed

(dBm)

Operating

Wavelength

Range (nm)

1 40 590% to

110%

0.5 0.3 241528 to

15682 80 8 0.7 0.3 24

3 120 9.8 0.9 0.3 24


Table 9-156 Mechanical Parameters of the DCM

Item Panel Dimensions (H × W × D) (mm)

DCM 50×491×270.5

9.10 Power Consumption of Cards

The following introduces the power supply and power consumption of the FONST


Power Consumption of Cards

Table 9-157 shows the power consumption of cards and fan units (measured at the

power supply of -48 V).

Version: A 9-65


Table 9-157 Power Consumption of Cards

Type CardMaximum Power

Consumption (W)

Electrical layer

cards

8TN1 72

16TN1 (PMC) 80

16TN1 (microelectronic) 85

24TN1 95

32TN1 110

4TN2 120

8TN2 123

10TN2 125

12TN2 127

20TN2 145.6

10TP2 88

20TP2 100

1TO3 120

1TN3 110

2TN3 160

1TN4 120

2TN4 177

UXU2 120

4LN2 130

12LN2 140

20LN2 160

1LN4 185

2LN4 300

PIC cards

10IL2 130

BMD2 20

BMD2P 28

BMD2PP 36

Optical layer

cards

OMU48_E 15

OMU48_O 15

VMU48_E 40

VMU48_O 40

ODU48_E 15

ODU48_O 15

ITL50 1

OSCAD 1

9-66 Version: A


Table 9-157 Power Consumption of Cards (Continued)


Consumption (W)

WSS8M 11

WSS8D 11

OA 20

PA 11

OCP 5

OMSP 3.5

OLP (1+1) 3

OLP (1:1) 5

OSC 10

EOSC 30

OPM4 10

OPM8 10

System

connection and

management

unit

CCU 56

EMU 22

FCU 22

EFCU 22

AIF (FONST 5000 U60/U60 2.0 subrack) 5

AIF1 (FONST 5000 U40 subrack) 15

AIF2 (FONST 5000 U40 subrack) 5

AIF (COTP subrack) 10

AIF1 (FONST 5000 U30 / U20 subrack) 5

AIF2 (FONST 5000 U30 / U20 subrack) 5

PWR (FONST 5000 U60 subrack) 30

PWR (FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack) 30

PWR (FONST 5000 U40/U30/U20/U10 subrack) 30

PWR (COTP subrack) 8

Fan unit

Fan unit for the FONST 5000 U60 / U60 2.0 / U40

/ U30 / U20 / U10 subrack

(Each fan unit houses ten fans.)

Power consumption at

room temperatureNote 1:

50

Maximum power

consumptionNote 2: 450

Version: A 9-67


Table 9-157 Power Consumption of Cards (Continued)


Consumption (W)

Fan unit for the COTP (3030036) subrack

(three independent fan units)



3

Maximum power


Fan unit for the COTP (3030105) subrack

(Each fan unit houses ten fans.)



100

Maximum power


Note 1: Power consumption at room temperature refers to the power consumption generated

when the equipment using typical service configuration operates at room temperature

(23±2℃) and fans operate at the duty cycle of 30%.

Note 2: Maximum power consumption refers to the power consumption generated when the

equipment using the maximum power consumption configuration operates at the high

temperature (>45℃) and fans operate at the maximum speed.

9.11 Mechanical Dimensions

Table 9-158, Table 9-159 and Table 9-160 show the dimensions of the cabinets,

subracks and cards used by the FONST 5000 U series of products respectively.

Table 9-158 Mechanical Dimensions of the Cabinets

Item Dimension (H × W × D) (mm)

1600 mm high cabinet (680 mm deep) 1600×600×680








9-68 Version: A


Table 9-159 Mechanical Dimensions of the Subracks

Item Dimension (H × W × D) (mm)

PDP (3000064) 150×530×145.8

PDP (3000068) 100×530×157.5

PDP (3000082) 150×530×127.8

FONST 5000 U60 2.0 subrack 1575×563×570

FONST 5000 U60 subrack 1447×563×570

FONST 5000 U40 subrack 1166×566×570

FONST 5000 U30 subrack 1677×566×295

FONST 5000 U20 subrack 1152×566×295

FONST 5000 U10 subrack 535×566×295

COTP (3030036) subrack 520.5×555×280.2

COTP (3030105) subrack 512.5×555×280.2

Fan unit for the subracks

40×484.3×279

70×160×240 (COTP (3030036))

61×484.3×255.3 (COTP (3030105))

DCM slide rail 50×491×270.5

Table 9-160 Mechanical Dimensions of the Cards

Type Card Panel Dimension (H × W) (mm)

Electrical layer cards

8TN1 407×30

16TN1 407×30

24TN1 407×30

32TN1 407×30

4TN2 407×30

8TN2 407×30

10TN2 407×30

12TN2 407×30

20TN2 407×30

10TP2 407×30

20TP2 407×30

1TO3 407×30

1TN3 407×30

2TN3 407×30

1TN4 407×30

2TN4 407×60

UXU2 (FONST 5000

U60/U60 2.0 subrack)352×55

Version: A 9-69


Table 9-160 Mechanical Dimensions of the Cards (Continued)


UXU2 (FONST 5000

U40/U30/20/U10

subrack)

352×30

4LN2 407×30

12LN2 407×30

20LN2 407×30

1LN4 407×30

2LN4 407×60

PIC cards

10IL2 407×30

BMD2 407×30

BMD2P 407×30

BMD2PP 407×30

Optical layer cards

OMU48_E 368×60

OMU48_O 368×60

VMU48_E 368×60

VMU48_O 368×60

ODU48_E 368×60

ODU48_O 368×60

ITL50 368×30

OSCAD 368×30

WSS8M 368×60

WSS8D 368×60

OA 368×30

OA 368×60

PA 368×30

OCP 368×30

OMSP 368×30

OLP (1+1) 368×30

OLP (1:1) 368×30

OSC 368×30

EOSC 368×30

OPM4 368×30

OPM8 368×30

System connection and

management unit

CCU 307×27.5

EMU 368×30

FCU 368×30

9-70 Version: A


Table 9-160 Mechanical Dimensions of the Cards (Continued)


EFCU 368×30

PWR (FONST 5000

U60 2.0 subrack)307×27.5

AIF (FONST 5000 U40

subrack)407×30

AIF (COTP subrack) 368×30

AIF1/AIF2 (FONST

5000 U30/20 subrack)90.5×30

PWR (FONST 5000

U60 subrack)247×30

PWR (FONST 5000

U60 2.0 subrack)112×30

PWR (FONST 5000

U40/U30/20/U10

subrack)

90×30

PWR (COTP subrack) 190×30

Version: A 9-71

10 Equipment Standards andEnvironmental Requirements

The following describes the equipment standards and environmental requirements

for the FONST 5000 U series of products.

Optical Interface Performance Standards

Power Supply Requirements

Electromagnetic Compatibility

Environment Requirements

Version: A 10-1


10.1 Optical Interface Performance Standards

u SDH: ITU-T G.957 and G.691

u SONET: GR-253-CORE, GR-1377-CORE, and ANSI T1.105

u OTN: ITU-T G.709 and ITU-T G.959.1

u 10GE: IEEE 802.3ae

u GE: IEEE 802.3az

u ESCON: ANSI X3.296 and ANSI X3.230

u FC: ANSI X3.303 and ANSI X3.230

u Optical fiber connector: LC/PC and LSH/APC

u Laser safety: ITU-T G.664 compliant and automatic laser shutdown supported

u All optical interfaces of the equipment are provided with anti-dust caps.

10.2 Power Supply Requirements

u Dual-backup protection is required for the DC power supply. When a power rail

is interrupted, no services on the equipment will be affected, but a single power

rail interruption alarm will be generated.

u DC voltage: -40 V DC/-57 V DC

u Voltage range: -40 V DC to -72.0 V DC

u The working ground and protection ground must be independent from each

other.

10.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility

The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) complies with the ETS 300 386, including

u Radiated emission: EN55022

u Conducted emission: EN55022

u Electronic static discharge (ESD): IEC61000-4-2

u Conducted susceptibility: IEC61000-4-6

10-2 Version: A

10 Equipment Standards and Environmental Requirements

u Electrical fast transient (EFT): IEC61000-4-4

u Radiated susceptibility: IEC61000-4-3

u Surge: IEC61000-4-5

u Voltage dip and short interruption: IEC61000-4-29

10.4 Environment Requirements

Environment requirements involve the storage environment, transportation

environment, and working environment.

10.4.1 Storage Environment

u Climate

Table 10-1 shows the climate requirements for the storage environment.

Table 10-1 Climate Requirements (Storage Environment)

Item Specification

Altitude ≤ 3000m

Atmospheric pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Temperature -40℃ to +70℃ (-55℃ to +50℃ in East Europe and Russia)

Temperature gradient ≤ 1℃/min

Relative humidity 5% to 95%

Condensation Not allowed

Rainwater Equipment package must be protected against rainwater.

Icing Allowed

Solar radiation ≤ 1120W/s2

Heat radiation ≤ 600W/s2

Air speed ≤ 30m/s

u Air cleanliness

4 The air must be free of explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive,

or corrosive dust.

4 Table 10-2 shows the concentration requirements for mechanically active

substances.

Version: A 10-3


Table 10-2 Concentration Requirements for Mechanically Active Substances (Storage

Environment)

Mechanically Active Substance Specification

Suspension density ≤ 5 mg/m3

Subsidence rate ≤ 20 mg/(m2h)

Gravel ≤ 300mg/m3

4 The concentration of the chemically active substances meets the

requirements specified in Table 10-3.

Table 10-3 Concentration Requirements for Chemically Active Substances (Storage

Environment)

Chemically Active Substance Content (mg/m3)

SO2 ≤ 0.30

H2S ≤ 0.10

NO2 ≤ 0.50

NH3 ≤ 1.00

Cl2 ≤ 0.10

HCl ≤ 0.10

HF ≤ 0.01

O3 ≤ 0.05

u Biological environment

4 Microbe such as fungus and mould must be avoided.

4 Rodents such as mice must be prevented.

u Mechanical environment

4 The sinusoidal vibration meets requirements listed in Table 10-4.

Table 10-4 Sinusoidal Vibration Requirements (Storage Environment)

Frequency range (Hz) Displacement (mm) Acceleration (m/s2)

2 to 9 3.5 –

9 to 200 – 10

200 to 500 – 15

4 Impact: not allowed

4 Static pile load: ≤5kPa

10-4 Version: A


10.4.2 Transportation Environment

u Climate

Table 10-5 shows the climate requirements during equipment transportation.

Table 10-5 Climate Requirements (Transportation Environment)

Item Specification

Altitude ≤ 3000m


Temperature -40℃ to +70℃ (-55℃ to +50℃ in East Europe and Russia)

Temperature gradient ≤ 0.5℃/min

Relative humidity 5% to 95%


Rain and snow Not allowed

Icing Not allowed

Solar radiation ≤ 1120W/s2


Air speed ≤ 30m/s

u Air cleanliness


or corrosive dust.


substances.

Table 10-6 Concentration Requirements for Mechanically Active Substances (Transportation

Environment)


Suspension density None

Subsidence rate ≤ 20 mg/(m2h)

Gravel ≤ 300mg/m3



Version: A 10-5


Table 10-7 Concentration Requirements for Chemically Active Substances (Transportation

Environment)


SO2 ≤ 1.00

H2S ≤ 0.50

NO2 ≤ 1.00

NH3 ≤ 3.00

Cl2 None

HCl ≤ 0.50

HF ≤ 0.03

O3 ≤ 0.10

Salt mist Not allowed





Table 10-8 shows the mechanical requirements during equipment

transportation.

Table 10-8 Mechanical Requirements (Transportation Environment)

Item Sub-item Specification

Sinusoidal

vibration

Frequency range (Hz) 2 to 9 9 to 200 200 to 500

Displacement (mm) 3.5 – –

Acceleration (m/s2) – 10 15

Random

vibration

Frequency range (Hz) 10 to 200 200 to 2000 –

ASD (m2/s3) 1 0.3 –

Nonstatic-state

impact

Response spectrum type Type II

Acceleration (m/s2) 250

Period (ms) 6

Drop

Drop type Free drop

Weight (kg) < 20 20 to 100 > 100

Drop height (mm) 1200 1000 250

Package tilt or overturn Not allowed

Static pile load ≤ 10 kPa

10-6 Version: A


10.4.3 Working Environment

u Climate

Table 10-9 shows the climate requirements for the working environment.

Table 10-9 Climate Requirements (Working Environment)

Item Specification

Altitude ≤ 4000 m


Tempera-

ture

Long-term

operation5℃ to 45℃

Short-term

operation-5℃ to 50℃

Temperature gradient ≤ 0.5℃/min

Relative

humidity

Long-term

operation5% to 85%

Short-term

operation5% to 95%


Rain and snow Not allowed

Icing Not allowed

Solar radiation ≤ 700 W/s2


Air speed ≤ 5 m/s

Note 1: When the altitude is higher than 1800 m, the operation temperature of the equipment

decreases by 1℃ each time the altitude increases by 220 m.

u Air cleanliness


or corrosive dust.


substances.

Version: A 10-7


Table 10-10 Concentration Requirements for Mechanically Active Substances (Working

Environment)


Suspension density ≤ 20 mg/m3

Subsidence rate ≤ 1.5 mg/(m2h)

Gravel ≤ 30 mg/m3



Table 10-11 Concentration Requirements for Chemically Active Substances (Working

Environment)


SO2 ≤ 0.30

H2S ≤ 0.10

NO2 ≤ 0.50

NH3 ≤ 1.00

Cl2 ≤ 0.10

HCl ≤ 0.10

HF ≤ 0.01

O3 ≤ 0.05

Salt mist Not allowed





Table 10-12 shows the mechanical requirements for the working environment.

Table 10-12 Mechanical Requirements (Working Environment)


Sinusoidal vibration

Frequency range (Hz) 2 to 9 9 to 200

Displacement (mm) 1.5 –

Acceleration (m/s2) – 5

Unsteady-state

impact

Response spectrum type Type II

Acceleration (m/s2) 250

Period (ms) 6

10-8 Version: A


Table 10-12 Mechanical Requirements (Working Environment) (Continued)


Floor bearing ≥ 600kg/m2

Grounding resistance ≤ 5 Ω

Version: A 10-9

11 Product Safety Standards

The following introduces the safety standards of the FONST 5000 U series of

products.

Relevant ITU-T Standards

Relevant IEEE Standards

Laser Safety Standards

Relevant Safety Standards

Relevant EMC Standards

Relevant Environment Standards

Grounding Standards

Noise Standards

Fire Prevention Standards

Relevant International Standards

Version: A 11-1


11.1 Relevant ITU-T Standards

Architecture Standard

Architecture Standard Description

ITU-T G.803Architectures of transport networks based on the Synchronous

Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

ITU-T G.841Types and characteristics of SDH network protection

architectures

ITU-T G.842 Interworking of SDH network protection architectures

ITU-T G.871 Framework for optical transport network Recommendations

ITU-T G.872 Architecture of optical transport networks

Physical-layer Feature Standard

Physical-layer Feature

StandardDescription

ITU-T Rec.G.692Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical

amplifiers

ITU-T Rec.G.694.1 Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid

ITU-T Rec.G.694.2 Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid

ITU-T Rec.G.696.1 Intra-Domain DWDM applications

ITU-T Rec.G.703Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital

interfaces

ITU-T G.957Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to the

synchronous digital hierarchy

ITU-T G.691Optical interfaces for single channel STM-64 and other SDH

systems with optical amplifiers

ITU-T G.693 Optical interfaces for intra-office systems

ITU-T G.697 Optical monitoring for DWDM systems

ITU-T G.698.2Amplified multichannel DWDM applications with single channel

optical interfaces

ITU-T G.671Transmission characteristics of optical components and

subsystems

ITU-T G.959.1 Optical transport network physical layer interfaces

ITU-T G.661Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters

of optical amplifiers and subsystems

ITU-T G.662 Generic characteristics of optical amplifiers and subsystems

11-2 Version: A


Physical-layer Feature

StandardDescription

ITU-T G.663Application related aspects of optical amplifiers and sub-

systems

ITU-T G.664Optical safety procedures and requirements for optical

transport systems

ITU-T G.665Generic Characteristics of Raman Amplifiers and Raman

Amplified Subsystems

Structure and Mapping Standard

Structure and Mapping

StandardDescription

ITU-T G.702 Digital hierarchy bit rates

ITU-T G.704Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448

and 44736 Kbit/s hierarchical levels

ITU-T Rec.G.707Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy

(SDH)

ITU-T Rec.G.709 Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN)

ITU-T Rec.G.7041/Y.1303 Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)

Equipment Function and Feature Standard

Equipment Function and

Feature StandardDescription

ITU-T G.783Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

equipment functional blocks

ITU-T G.798Characteristics of optical transport network hierarchy

equipment functional blocks

ITU-T G.813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)

ITU-T G.975 Forward error correction for submarine systems

ITU-T G.975.1Forward error correction for high bit rate DWDM submarine

systems

ITU-T Rec.G.781 Synchronization layer functions

ITU-T Rec.G.811 Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks

ITU-T Rec.Q.812 Protocol profile for electronic communications interactive agent

ITU-T Rec.M.2120International multi-operator paths, sections and transmission

systems fault detection and localization procedures

Version: A 11-3


Network Protection Standard

Network Protection

StandardDescription

ITU-T G.808.1Generic protection switching–Linear trail and subnetwork

protection

ITU-T G.873.1 Optical Transport Network (OTN):Linear protection

Jitter and Performance Standard

Jitter and Performance

StandardDescription

ITU-T G.823The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which

are based on the 2048 Kbit/s hierarchy


are based on the 1544 Kbit/s hierarchy


are based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

ITU-T G.826Error performance parameters and objectives for international,

constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate

ITU-T M.2401

Error performance limits and procedures for bringing-into-

service and maintenance of multi operator international paths

and sections within an optical transport network

ITU-T G.8201Error performance parameters and objectives for multi-operator

international paths within the Optical Transport Network (OTN)

ITU-T Rec.G.828Error performance parameters and objectives for international,

constant bit rate synchronous digital paths

ITU-T Rec.G.829Error performance events for SDH multiplex and regenerator

sections

ITU-T Rec.G.8251The control of jitter and wander within the optical transport

network (OTN)

Equipment Management Standard

Equipment Management

StandardDescription

ITU-T G.7710Equipment Management Function (EMF) requirements that are

common to multiple transport technologies

ITU-T G.773Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of

transmission systems

11-4 Version: A


Equipment Management

StandardDescription

ITU-T Rec.G.774.1Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Bidirectional performance

monitoring for the network element view

ITU-T Rec.G.774.2Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Configuration of the

payload structure for the network element view

ITU-T Rec.G.774.3Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Management of multiplex-

section protection for the network element view

ITU-T Rec.G.774.4Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Management of the

subnetwork connection protection for the network element view

ITU-T Rec.G.774.5

Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Management of

connection supervision functionality (HCS/LCS) for the network

element view

ITU-T Rec.G.775

Loss of Signal (LOS), Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and

Remote Defect Indication (RDI) defect detection and clearance

criteria for PDH signals

ITU-T G.784 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management

ITU-T G.831Management capabilities of transport networks based on the

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

ITU-T G.870/Y.1352 Terms and definitions for Optical Transport Networks (OTN)

ITU-T G.874 Management aspects of the optical transport network element

ITU-T G.875Optical transport network (OTN) management information

model for the network element view

ITU-T M.3010 Principles for a telecommunication management network

ITU-T Rec.Q.811 Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3 and X interfaces

ITU-T Rec.X.721

Information Technology - Open Systems Interconnection -

Structure of Management Information: Definition of

Management Information

11.2 Relevant IEEE Standards

Relevant IEEE Standard Description

IEEE Std 802.3Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection

(CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specification

IEEE 802.3zMedia Access Control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer,

repeater and management parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation

IEEE 802.3aeMedia Access Control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, and

management parameters for 10 Gbit/s operation

Version: A 11-5


11.3 Laser Safety Standards

Laser Safety Standard Description

IEC 60825-1Safety of laser products - Part 1: Equipment classification,

requirements and user's guide

IEC 60825-2Safety of laser products - Part2: Safety of optical fiber

communication systems

ANSI CDRH 21-CFR-1040 Optical Safety

11.4 Relevant Safety Standards

Relevant Safety Standard Description

IEC 60215 Safety requirements for radio transmitting equipment

EN 60950-1Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including

Electrical Business Equipment

IEC 60950-1Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including


IEC41003

Particular safety requirements for equipment to be connected

to telecommunication networks and/or a cable distribution

system

CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 60950-1Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including


UL 1950 Information Technology Equipment - Safety

EN 300 253Earthling and Bonding of Telecommunications Equipment in

Telecommunication Centers

AS/NZ 3260

Approval and test specification – safety of information

technology equipment including electrical business

equipment

CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 60950-1Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including


UL 60950-13rd edition Safety of Information Technology Equipment

Including Electrical Business Equipment

IEC Publication 479-1Guide on the effects of current passing through the human

body

IS 8437 {1993}Guide on the effects of current passing through the human

body

IS 13252 {1993}Safety of information technology equipment including

electrical business equipment

11-6 Version: A


11.5 Relevant EMC Standards

Relevant EMC Standard Description

IEC Publication 1000-4-2Testing and measurement techniques of electrostatic discharge

immunity test

IEC Publication 4/3/1000 Radiated RF electromagnetic field immunity test

IEC Publication 4/4/1000Testing and measurement techniques of electrical fast

transients/burst immunity test

IEC Publication 4/6/1000 Immunity to conducted disturbances

EN 55022Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance

characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement

EN 55024Information technology equipment-Immunity characteristics-

Limits and methods of measurement

IEC 61000-4-2Testing and measurement techniques - Electrostatic discharge

immunity test

IEC 61000-4-3Testing and measurement techniques – Radiated, radio-

frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test

IEC 61000-4-4Testing and measurement techniques – Electrical fast

transient/burst immunity test

IEC 61000-4-5 Testing and measurement techniques – Surge immunity test

IEC 61000-4-6Testing and measurement techniques – Immunity to conducted

disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields

IEC 61000-4-11Testing and measurement techniques – Voltage dips, short

interruptions and voltage variations immunity tests

IEC 61000-4-29Testing and measurement techniques – Voltage dips, short

interruptions

GR-1089-COREElectromagnetic compatibility and electrical safety - generic

criteria for network telecommunications equipment

11.6 Relevant Environment Standards

Relevant Environment

StandardDescription

IEC 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

ETSI EN 300 386

Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters

(ERM); Telecommunication network equipment;

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements

ETS 300 019-1-1Class 1.1: Weather-protected, partly temperature-controlled

storage locations

Version: A 11-7


Relevant Environment

StandardDescription

Class 1.2: Weather protected, not temperature-controlled

storage locations

ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.2 Partly temperature-controlled location

NEBS GR-63-CORENetwork Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements:

Physical Protection

ROHSRestriction of the use of certain hazardous substance in

electrical and electronic equipment

The equipment complies with the RoHS Directive. Table 11-1 describes the

materials of each part.

Table 11-1 Component Materials

Compo-

nentMaterial Weight

Percentage (Based

on Product Weight)

RoHS

Material

Cabinet

Fe 56 28.10% None

Al 3 1.50% None

Cu 2 1.00% None

ABS 3 1.50% None

Other materials 2 1.00% None

Subrack

Fe 26 13.00% None

ABS 0.3 0.15% None

Zn 0.15 0.08% None

Cable

Typical configuration (power

cable, ground cable, alarm

cable, management cable, and

clock cable)

7 3.51% None

Other configurations (weight per

meter)

1.5

kg/m- None

PigtailTypical configuration (fifty-eight

10-meter optical fibers)30 15.04% None

CardFull configuration (including the

components and 44 cards)70 35.10%

Pb (for

soldering)

Total Typical configuration 199.45 100% –

11-8 Version: A


11.7 Grounding Standards

Grounding Standard Description

ETS 300 253Earthing and bonding of telecommunication equipment in

telecommunication centres

GR 1089 COREElectromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety - Generic

Criteria for Network Telecommunications Equipment

11.8 Noise Standards

Noise Standard Description

ETS 300 753 Acoustic noise emitted by telecommunications equipment

11.9 Fire Prevention Standards

Fire Prevention Standard Description

EN 60950 (Europe) Safety of information technology equipment

ANSI/UL 60950 Safety of information technology equipment

CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.950-95

(North America)Audio, Video and Similar Electronic Equipment

IEC 60950 (International) Safety of information technology equipment

73/23/EEC (Europe) Low Voltage Directive

11.10 Relevant International Standards

Relevant International

StandardDescription

IEC 61291-1Optical amplifiers–Part 4: Multichannel Applications

Performance specification Template

CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 1-M94 Audio, Video and Similar Electronic Equipment

73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive

IEC 529Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures.

(IP Code)

SMPTE 259MTelevision—SDTV1 Digital Signal/Data— Serial Digital

Interface

SMPTE 424M Television—3 Gb/s Signal/Data Serial Interface

Version: A 11-9


Relevant International

StandardDescription

SMPTE 292MTelevision—Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-Definition

Television Systems

CENELEC EN 50083-9

Cable networks for television signals, sound signals and

interactive services—Part 9: Interfaces for CATV/SMATV

headends and similar professional equipment for DVB/MPEG-2

transport streams

ISO 9314 Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI)

11-10 Version: A

Appendix A Abbreviations

ACB Air Circuit Breaker

ACL Access Control List

APD Avalanche Photon Diode

API Access Point Identifier

APR Automatic Power Reduction

APS Automatic Protection Switching

ASON Automatically Switched Optical Network

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

BC Boundary Clock

BDI Backward Defect Indicator

BFD Bidirectional Forwarding Detection

BMC Best Master Clock

BMU Board Management Unit

BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit

BRAS Broadband Remote Access Server

CAR Committed Access Rate

CBS Committed Burst Size

CCM Continuity Check Message

CD Chromatic Dispersion

CE Customer Edge

CFM Connectivity Fault Management

CIR Committed Information Rate

CR Core Router

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

CV Connectivity Verification

DAPI Destination Access Point Identifier

DCC Data Communication Channel

DCF Dispersion Compensation Fiber

DCM Dispersion Compensation Module

DCN Data Communication Network

DDF Digital Distribution Frame

DGE Dynamic Gain Equalization

DiffServ Differentiated Services

Version: A A-1


DoS Denial of Service

DPA Dynamic Power Adjustment

DPSK Differential Phase Shift Keying

DQPSK Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

DSP Digital Signal Processing

DTE Data Terminating Entity

DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

E2ETC End-to-End Transparent Clock

ECC Embedded Communication Channel

EDFA Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier

EFM Ethernet in the First Mile

ESC Electrical Supervisory Channel

ESD Electrostatic Discharge

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

EVOA Electrical Variable Optical Attenuator

FCS Frame Check Sequence

FE Fast Ethernet

FEC Forward Error Correction

FOADM Fixed Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer

FPGA Field-Programmable Gate Array

GCC General Communication Channel

GE Gigabit Ethernet

GFP Generic Framing Procedure

GMC Grandmaster Clock

GMPLS Generalized Multiprotocol Label Switching

GPS Global Positioning System

IC Integrated Circuit

ID Identity

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IP Internet Protocol

ISP Internet Service Provider

ITU-TInternational Telecommunication Union–Telecommunication

Standardization Sector

L2VPN Layer 2 Virtual Private Network

LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol

LAG Link Aggregation

A-2 Version: A


LAN Local Area Network

LCT Local Craft Terminal

LPT Link State Pass Through

LSA Link State Advertisement

LTE Long Term Evolution

MA Maintenance Association

MAC Media Access Control

MCC Management Communication Channel

MCF Message Communication Function

MCN Management Communication Network

MD Maintenance Domain

MDF Main Distribution Frame

MEG Maintenance Entity Group

MEP Maintenance End Point

MIB Management Information Base

MIMO Multiple-Input Multiple-Output

MIP Maintenance Intermediate Point

MME Mobility Management Entity

MP Maintenance Point

MPLS Multi-Protocol Label Switching

MS-OTN Multi-Service Optical Transport Network

MSTP Multi-Service Transport Platform

NNI Network Node Interface

NTP Network Time Protocol

OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer

OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance

OC Ordinary Clock

ODF Optical Distribution Frame

OFDM Optical Frequency Division Multiplexing

OLA Optical Line Amplifier

OLT Optical Line Terminal

OMS Optical Multiplex Section

OSC Optical Supervisory Channel

OSNR Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio

OSPF Open Shortest Path First

OTDR Optical Time Domain Reflectometer

Version: A A-3


OTM Optical Terminal Multiplexer

OTN Optical Transport Network

OTS Optical Transmission Section

OTU Optical Transponder Unit

P2PTC Peer-to-Peer Transparent Clock

PBS Peak Burst Size

PC Personal Computer

PCS Physical Coding Sublayer

PDP Power Distribution Panel

PDU Protocol Data Unit

PE Provider Edge

PHB Per-Hop Behavior

PIN Positive-Intrinsic-Negative

PIR Peak Information Rate

PMD Polarization Mode Dispersion

PMDC Polarization Mode Dispersion Compensation

POTS Packet Optical Transport System

PRC Primary Reference Clock

PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network

PTN Packet Transport Network

PTP Precision Time Protocol

PW Pseudo Wire

QoS Quality of Service

QSFP Quad Small Form-factor Pluggable

RDI Remote Defect Indication

RNC Radio Network Controller

ROADM Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplex

RRC Radio Resource Control

SAN Storage Area Network

SAPI Source Access Point Identifier

SAR Segmentation And Reassembly

SC Switched Connection

SCC Signaling Communication Channel

SCN Signaling Communication Network

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SFP Small Form-Factor Pluggable

A-4 Version: A


SGW Signaling Gateway

SN Serial Number

SNCP Sub-network Connection Protection

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SP Strict Priority

SPC Soft Permanent Connection

SR Service Router

SSM Synchronization Status Message

STM Synchronous Transport Module

TC Transparent Clock

TCM Tandem Connection Monitor

TCP Transmission Control Protocol

TDCM Tunable Dispersion Compensation Module

TDM Time-Division Multiplexing

TE Traffic Engineering

TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch

TM Terminal Multiplexer

TMUX Trans-Multiplexer

TTI Trail Trace Identifier

TTL Time To Live

UCT Coordinated Universal Time

ULH Ultra Long Haul

UNI User Network Interface

VGA Variable Gain Amplifier

VLAN Virtual Local Area Network

VOA Variable Optical Attenuator

WAN Wide Area Network

WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing

WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing

WRED Weighted Random Early Detection

WSS Wavelength Selective Switch

XFP 10-Gigabit Small Form-factor Pluggable

Version: A A-5

Product Documentation Customer Satisfaction Survey

Thank you for reading and using the product documentation provided by FiberHome. Please take a moment to

complete this survey. Your answers will help us to improve the documentation and better suit your needs. Your

responses will be confidential and given serious consideration. The personal information requested is used for

no other purposes than to respond to your feedback.

Name

Phone Number

Email Address

Company

To help us better understand your needs, please focus your answers on a single documentation or a complete

documentation set.

Documentation Name

Code and Version

Usage of the product documentation:

1. How often do you use the documentation?

□ Frequently □ Rarely □ Never □ Other (please specify)

2. When do you use the documentation?

□ in starting up a project □ in installing the product □ in daily maintenance □ in trouble

shooting □ Other (please specify)

3. What is the percentage of the operations on the product for which you can get instruction from the

documentation?

□ 100% □ 80% □ 50% □ 0% □ Other (please specify)

4. Are you satisfied with the promptness with which we update the documentation?

□ Satisfied □ Unsatisfied (your advice)

5.Which documentation form do you prefer?

□ Print edition □ Electronic edition □ Other (please specify)

Quality of the product documentation:

1. Is the information organized and presented clearly?

□ Very □ Somewhat □ Not at all (your advice)

2. How do you like the language style of the documentation?

□ Good □ Normal □ Poor (please specify)

3. Are any contents in the documentation inconsistent with the product?

4. Is the information complete in the documentation?

□ Yes

□ No (Please specify)

5. Are the product working principles and the relevant technologies covered in the documentation sufficient for

you to get known and use the product?

□ Yes

□ No (Please specify)

6. Can you successfully implement a task following the operation steps given in the documentation?

□ Yes (Please give an example)

□ No (Please specify the reason)

7.Which parts of the documentation are you satisfied with?

8.Which parts of the documentation are you unsatisfied with?Why?

9.What is your opinion on the Figures in the documentation?

□ Beautiful □ Unbeautiful (your advice)

□ Practical □ Unpractical (your advice)

10.What is your opinion on the layout of the documentation?

□ Beautiful □ Unbeautiful (your advice)

11. Thinking of the documentations you have ever read offered by other companies, how would you compare

our documentation to them?

Product documentations from other companies:

Satisfied (please specify)

Unsatisfied (please specify)

12. Additional comments about our documentation or suggestions on how we can improve:

Thank you for your assistance. Please fax or send the completed survey to us at the contact information

included in the documentation. If you have any questions or concerns about this survey please email at

[email protected]

arioonet.com€¦ · Thank you for choosing our products. We appreciate your business. Your...

Documents

Transcript of arioonet.com€¦ · Thank you for choosing our products. We appreciate your business. Your...